Fire Data Book 2010

Fire Alarm Systems
Databook 08/2009
F
i
r
e

A
l
a
r
m

S
y
s
t
e
m
s
Bosch Security Systems
For more information please visit
www.boschsecurity.com
or send an e-mail to
emea.securitysystems@bosch.com
Bosch Security Systems, 2009
Modications reserved
08/2009
A Tradition of Quality and
Innovation
For over 100 years, the Bosch name
has stood for quality and reliability.
Bosch is the global supplier of
choice for innovative technology,
backed by the highest standards
for service and support.
Bosch Security Systems proudly
offers a wide range of security,
safety, communications and sound
solutions that are relied upon every
day in applications around the
world, from government facilities
and public venues to businesses,
schools and homes.
2
0
0
9
SVK-Brand.fm Page 147 Friday, March 28, 2008 9:52 AM
Fire Alarm Systems
Databook 08/2009
We are proud to present the new 2009 edition of our
Fire Data Book. It includes quite a few highly innovative
products, among them the addressable Local
SecurityNetwork improved version (LSNi) components
such as the Smoke Detector 520 Series and Automatic
Fire Detector 420 Series, complete range of Fire
Interface Modules, Manual Call Points, and improved
Automatic Special Detectors.
There are also Smoke Aspiration Systems with LSNi
technology for all kind of application sizes as well as
low-current loop-powered sounders.
A highlight is the new Fire Panel 1200 Series providing
a compact solution for small to medium sized projects .
Together with the FPA 5000, where we offer enhanced
features and network capabilities, there is now a panel
platform for every installation, large or small.
Bosch Security Systems B.V.
In addition to an extensive range of superior products,
Bosch also offers you top-notch support so that you can
always offer your customers ideal solutions. A key
element is training. Under the expert guidance of our
product specialists, you can learn all about the products
and systems available from Bosch. For more information
on our products, sales support or training, please visit
our website www.boschsecurity.com or contact your
local Bosch representative. The book includes a list of
addresses in different countries.
Bosch Security Systems will help you to grow your
business by working closely with you to win, support
and maintain top quality communication and security
installations. We are condent that our unique
combination of innovative, top-quality products and 80
years of experience serving the market will let you offer
ideal solutions for all of your customers needs.
Dear Customer,
www.boschsecurity.com Bosch Security Systems B.V.
Superior security, safety and communication
products: stressing quality, innovation and support.
A tradition of innovation
We have a long tradition of attaching top priority to
innovation. We are proud of the fact that we constantly
strive for the best possible solutions: high-tech,
innovative, high-performance, good-looking and
ergonomic products that meet evolving needs.
To achieve this, we invest an average of 11 percent
of our sales volume in R&D. Around the world, the
Bosch Group has more than 25,000 research and
development associates continuously working to
develop new products, systems and innovative
manufacturing processes, as well as to improve existing
products. This is also driven by many decades of
experience and synergies between product categories.
Examples are our advanced lithium ion batteries, which
we originally developed for power tools, and intelligent
Video Analysis (IVA), the algorithms for which were rst
developed for automotive applications.
The results are impressive: Bosch les an average of
over 3000 patents a year, putting it among the worlds
top lers.

Committed to your success
Integral to our success are an in-depth understanding of
our partners and customers needs and a commitment
to delivering solutions that add real value. We make sure
that all Bosch security, safety and communication
products are efcient and user-friendly and thus easier
for you to sell. The low failure rate and reliability of our
products makes them popular choices. In short, we let
you offer your customers a greater return on their
investment. Working with Bosch lets you be a strong
partner to your customers.
Quality comes rst
Our companys founder, Robert Bosch, set the standard.
He wrote I have constantly tried to make products that
prove themselves superior in every respect ... His motto
was sell the best of the best. Our strict adherence to
this principle down to this day ensures the reliability of
our products from day one. All of our production plants
worldwide rigorously apply our high standards of quality
and have implemented ISO 9001-compliant quality
management and ISO 14001-compliant environmental
management systems. Bosch also harmonizes its
production technologies and processes worldwide to
ensure full interchangeability. We use only the very best
materials, purchased according to strict criteria.
In-house quality control standards support our core
processes of development, production, logistics and
purchasing. We also actively apply the Six Sigma process
improvement methodology to tap all potentials for
optimizing our processes.
For over 100 years, the Bosch name has stood for quality and reliability.
Bosch is the global supplier of choice for innovative technology, backed by
the highest standards for service and support.
Bosch Security Systems B.V. www.boschsecurity.com
Long-term partnerships
Our goal has always been to build long-term, sustainable
relationships with our partners and customers.
Moreover, our distribution strategies are clearly dened
and tailored to meet your needs, wherever you are.
With Bosch behind you, you can look forward to many
years of successful and protable partnership.
Global and local service you can count on
You and your customers benet from our international
and local presence, backed by the global Bosch brand.
As part of the Robert Bosch Corporation, we are one
of the worlds largest manufacturers of security, safety
and communication products. In other words, we are
here to stay and represent a secure investment.
Our worldwide network of highly trained support
technicians is always near at hand, responding quickly
and effectively to meet your needs as they arise.
The Bosch Security Academy also holds local training
courses to keep you optimally informed about all our
products and technologies. Courses offered by us
teach you everything you need to know to do your work
effectively. They cover regulations, guidelines, current
technologies and the principles of operation of security
systems, as well as quality management and other
topics.
Europe, Middle East and Africa
Corporate Office
Germany
Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH
Robert-Koch-Strae 100
85521 Ottobrunn
Phone: +49 89 6290 0
Fax:+49 89 6290 1020
de.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.bosch-sicherheitsprodukte.de
Regional /Export Office:
The Netherlands
Bosch Security Systems BV
Direct Export
PO Box 80002
5600 JB Eindhoven
Phone: +31 40 2577 315
Fax: +31 40 2577 300
export.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.com/export
Sales Offices
Belgium
Bosch Security Systems NV/SA
Torkonjestraat 21F
8510 Kortrijk-Marke
Phone: +32 56 24 5080
Fax: +32 56 22 8078
be.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.be
Czech Republic
Bosch Security Systems s.r.o.
Pod Viovkou 1661/35
140 00 Praha 4
Phone: +420 261 300 244
Fax: +420 261 300 249
cz.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecuritysystems.cz
Denmark
Robert Bosch A/S
Security Systems Division
Telegrafvej 1
2750 Ballerup
Phone: +45 4489 8620
Fax: +45 4489 8630
dk.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.dk
Dubai
Robert Bosch Automotive Middle
East
Security Systems Div
313, West Wing #1
PO Box 54307
Dubai Airport Free Zone
Dubai
UAE
Phone: + 9714 2123340
Fax: + 9714 2996137
Estonia
Robert Bosch O
Jrvevana Tee 9
11314 Tallinn
Phone: +372 6549 563
Fax: +372 6549 569
Finland
Robert Bosch Oy
Ansatie 6 a C
01740 Vantaa
Phone: +358 9 435 991
Fax: +358 9 4359 9333
fi.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.fi
France
Bosch Security Systems France SAS
Atlantic 361
Avenue du Gnral de Gaulle
92147 Clamart
Phone: +33 825 078 476
Fax : +33 1 4128 8191
fr.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.fr
Great Britain
Bosch Security Sysetms Ltd.
North Orbital Rd
Denham UB 5HJ
Phone: +44 1895 87 80 88
Fax: +44 1895 83 90 39
www.boschsecurity.co.uk
Germany
Bosch Sicherheitssysteme STDE
Werner-Heisenberg-Strasse 16
D-34123 Kassel
Phone: /Fax: +49 561 8908-
CCTV: -200/-299; Comm. -300/-399
Einbruch/Brand/Access: -500/-199
de.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.bosch-sicherheitsprodukte.de
Greece
Robert Bosch S.A.
162, Kifissou Ave.
121 31 Peristeri
Phone: +30 210 570 1352
Fax: +30 210 570 1357
BoschST@gr.bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.gr
Hungary
Bosch Security Systems Llc
Gymri t 120.
1103 Budapest
Phone: +36 1 4313 200
Fax: +36 1 4313 222
hu.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.hu
Portugal
Bosch Security Systems -
Sistemas de Segurana, SA.
Av. Infante D.Henrique, Lt.2E - 3E
Apartado 8058
1801-805 Lisboa
Phone: +351 218 500 360
Fax: +351 218 500 088
pt.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.com/pt
Contact_page_EMEA.fm Seite 3 Dienstag, 18. August 2009 3:41 15
Spain
Bosch Security Systems, SAU
C/Hermanos Garca Noblejas, 19
28037 Madrid
Tel.: +34 914 102 011
Fax: +34 914 102 056
es.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.es
Italy
Bosch Security Systems S.P.A.
Via M.A.Colonna, 35
20149 Milano
Phone: +39 02 3696 1
Fax: +39 02 3696 3907
it.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.it
Norway
Robert Bosch AS
Security Systems
Berghagan 1, Postboks 350
1402 Ski
Phone: +47 64 87 89 70
Fax: +47 64 87 89 80
no.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.no
Poland
Robert Bosch Sp. z o.o./
Security Systems
ul. Poleczki 3
02-822 Warszawa
Phone: +48 22 715 4101
Fax: +48 22 715 4105
pl.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.pl
Russia
Robert Bosch OOO
Security Systems
13/5, Akad. Korolyova str.
129515 Moscow
Phone: +7 495 937 5361
Fax: +7 495 937 5363
Info.bss@ru.bosch.com
ru.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.com/ru
South Africa
Robert Bosch (Pty) Ltd.
Private Bag X118
Midrand 1685
Phone: +2711 651 9814
Fax: +27 11 651 9811
Sweden
Bosch Security Systems AB
Vestagatan 2
416 64 Gteborg
Phone: +46 31 722 5300
Fax: +46 31 722 5340
se.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.se
The Netherlands
Bosch Security Systems BV
Postbus 80002
5600 JB Eindhoven
Phone: +31 40 2577 200
Fax: +31 40 2577 202
nl.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.nl
Turkey
Bosch Gvenlik Sistemleri
Sat Ofisi
Ahi Evran Cad. N:1
Polaris Plaza K:22
Maslak - Istanbul
Phone: +90 212 335 0660
Fax : +90 212 346 0042
www.boschsecurity.com/tr
Ukraine
Robert Bosch Ltd.
1, Kraynya Str.
02606 Kiev
Phone: +380 44 490 5990
Fax: +380 44 490 2507
ua.securitysystems@bosch.com
www.boschsecurity.com/ua
Contact_page_EMEA.fm Seite 4 Dienstag, 18. August 2009 3:41 15
You are looking for information about our products? You
need documentation for the installation, operation or
handling of a certain product? You want to recommend
a product to somebody else?
Our online product catalog offers you all of these
information and answers your questions with a few clicks!
Functionalitites
Intelligent search function for products
Download Library for documents and software
Overview about last months updated software and
documents for download
Printer friendly optimization of all product-related
information
Click for big zoom view of all product images
Tell a friend function
Search function to find Bosch contacts and
locations worldwide
View of a product with the complete archive of product-
related information

Product information
Quick access to all product catalogs
CCTV
IP Network Video
Observation Systems
Intrusion Alarm Systems
Fire Alarm Systems
Congress and Conference
Personal Security and Paging
Public Address
Voice Evacuation
...
Detailed product information in different languages
for download
Product images
Advertising material
Brochures, flyers and mailers
Posters and advertisings
Application references
...
Technical information
Data sheets
Installation, operation and user guides
Application guides
Wiring guides
A/E specifications
....
Visit our website and convince yourself!
www.boschsecurity.com/emea
Online Product Catalog -
www.boschsecurity.com/emea
IntroductionPage_Online_cmyk.fm Seite 3 Dienstag, 18. August 2009 4:36 16
SVK-Brand.fm Page 147 Friday, March 28, 2008 9:52 AM
Fire_T2365506827_20090818T1526_EMEA_en-US_print_RC8.08f_cza5ot_DatabookPDF
Modular Panel 1
LSN Panels 2
Conventional Panels 3
Display Panels 4
Power Supplies and Batteries 5
Automatic Fire Detectors 6
Manual Call Points 7
Interface and EOL Modules 8
Signaling Devices 9
Distributors and Relays 10
Test and Service Devices 11
Table of Contents | i
Modular Panel 1
Modular Fire Panel FPA-5000 2
FPA5000 With Functional Modules 2
BCM 0000 A Battery Controller Module 8
BCM0000B Battery Controller Module 11
ANI 0016 A Annunciator Module 14
LSN 0300 A LSN improved Module 300 mA 16
FPE5000UGM Interface Module 20
CZM 0004 A 4 Zone Conventional Module 22
IOS 0020 A 20 mA Communication Module 24
IOS 0232 A RS232 Communication Module 26
ENO 0000 B Fire Service Interface Module 28
IOP 0008 A Input/Output Module 30
RML 0008 A Relay Module 32
RMH 0002 A Relay Module 34
NZM 0002 A Notification Appliance Zone Module 36
Panel Rails FPA-5000 38
Panel Rails 38
Panel Controller FPA-5000 40
Panel Controller 40
Address Cards 42
FMR-5000 Remote Keypad 43
ADC5000OPC License Key 45
Housings for Frame Installation FPA-5000 46
Housings for Frame Installation 46
CPH 0006 A Modular Panel Housing for 6 Modules,
Frame Installation 49
MPH 0010 A Modular Panel Housing for
10 Modules, Frame Installation 50
EPH 0012 A Extension Housing for 12 Modules,
USF 0000 A Universal Housing Small, Frame
Installation 52
PSF 0002 A Power Supply Small, Frame
Installation 52
PMF 0004 A Power Supply Big, Frame Installation 53
Accessories - Frame Installation FPA-5000 54
FBH 0000 A Mounting Frame Large 54
FMH 0000 A Mounting Frame Medium 54
FSH 0000 A Mounting Frame Small 55
FHS 0000 A Mounting Frame Large with
Distributor Rail 55
RLE 0000 A Junction Board EU 56
HMP 0003 A Mounting Plate for Mounting Frame 56
FRB 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit, Large 57
FRM 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit, Medium 57
FRS 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit, Small 58
FDT 0000 A Front Door Transparent 58
Housings for Wall Mounting FPA-5000 60
Housings for Wall Mounting 60
HCP 0006 A Modular Panel Housing for 6 Modules 62
HBC 0010 A Modular Panel Housing for
10 Modules 63
HBE 0012 A Modular Extension Housing for
12 Modules 64
PSS 0002 A Power Supply Small 65
PSB 0004 A Power Supply 66
DIB 0000 A Distribution Box 67
Accessories - Wall Mounting FPA-5000 68
RLU 0000 A Junction Board 68
HMP 0001 A Mounting Plate Short 68
HMP 0002 A Mounting Plate Long 69
FRK 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit 69
FDT 0001 A Large Front Door Transparent 70
Power Supplies FPA-5000 72
Power Supply Brackets 72
UPS 2416 A Universal Power Supply 73
Cable Sets FPA-5000 75
Cables 75
THP 2020 A Thermal Printer 76
PSL 0001 A Labelling Strips, Small 77
PSK 0001 A Labelling Strips, Wide 77
FDP 0001 A Dummy Cover Plate 78
Accessories - FPA-5000 79
FSM2000 Fire Monitoring System 79
LSN Panels 81
FPA-1200 Fire Panel 82
Accessories - BZ 500 LSN 85
ERWE 10 voltage converter 85
ERT100 Module for Loop System Power Supply 86
Isolator Type YBOR/SCI 88
SIV 28 Fuse Distributor 28 V 89
ERLE 10 Line Extension 89
ERSE 10 Interface Extension 90
SM 20 Interface Module 90
BS ATE 100 LSN Primary Extension Kit, Red 91
ATE 100 LSN red Extension Kit, Red 92
ATE 100 LSN ye Extension Kit, Yellow 92
Key Switch 93
TRN Panel Relay Module 93
RTP Panel Relay Module 94
BS NRKN Network Relay Card 94
MOD 300 Modem 95
Options Plate 95
Mounting Kit 19" for BZ 500 LSN 96
DR 500 T/AV Tabletop Printer 97
Service Switch for Extinguishing Systems 97
Accessories - UEZ 2000 LSN 98
LVM 100 Line Extension Module 98
ERT100 Module for Loop System Power Supply 99
MOD 300 Modem 101
TRN Panel Relay Module 102
RTP Panel Relay Module 102
Isolator Type YBOR/SCI 103
SIV 28 Fuse Distributor 28 V 104
DR 2020 T/AV Log Printer with Roll-up Equipment 105
DR 2020 T Log Printer without Roll-up Equipment 106
ii | Table of Contents
FP Conventional Fire Panels 108
Display Panels 111
LSN Display Panels 112
BAT 100 LSN Display Panel 112
Power Supplies and Batteries 115
Power Supplies 116
Power Supply Unit Kit 12 V/5.4 A 116
FPP5000 External Power Supply Unit Kit 24 V/6 A 117
FPP5000TI Trouble Interface for FPP5000 119
Converter Kit 24 V/28 V/35 V 120
Automatic Fire Detectors 121
LSN Detectors 122
FAP520 Automatic Fire Detectors LSN improved
version 122
FAP420/FAH420 Automatic Fire Detectors LSN
improved version 127
Accessories - Series 500 LSN and 520 LSN 133
FAA500TR-W Trim Ring, White 133
FAA500TRP Trim Ring, Transparent with Color
Inserts 133
FAA500 LSN Base 134
FAA500R LSN Base with Relay 135
FAA500GB LSN Base for GB 136
FAA500RGB LSN Base with Relay for GB 136
FAA500BB Ceiling Mount Back Box 137
FAA500CB Built-in Housing for Concrete Ceilings 137
FAA500SB Surface Mount Back Box 138
FAA500SB-H Surface Mount Back Box with Damp
Room Seal 138
FAA500SPRING for Concrete/Wooden Ceilings 139
Accessories - Series 420 LSN improved version 140
MS 400 Detector Base 140
MSF 400 Detector Base with Damp Room Seal 141
MS 420 LSN Detector Base with Spring 142
FAAMSR 420 Detector Base with Relay 143
FAAMS 420RSP Detector Base with Relay and
Spring 144
MSC 420 Additional Base with Damp Room Seal 145
MPA External Detector Alarm Display according to
DIN 14623 146
FAA420RI Remote Indicator 147
Mounting Bracket for Fire Detectors on False Floor
Stilts 148
MK 400 Detector Console 148
MH 400 Detector Heating Element 149
SK 400 Protective Basket 149
SSK 400 Protective Dust Cover 150
TP4 400 Support Plate for Detector Identification 150
LSN RF Fire Detection Systems 152
LSN RF Fire Detection System 152
Accessories - LSN RF Fire Detection System 157
DZW 1171 Radio Test Unit 157
Radio Spy 1 Field Strength Measuring Unit and
Software 157
DBZ 1193A Detector identification 158
Exchanger device for the DOW 1171 RF smoke
detector 158
Conventional Detectors 159
FCP500 Conventional Automatic Fire Detectors 159
FCP320/FCH320 Conventional Automatic Fire
Detectors 164
DO1101AEx Optical Smoke Detector for Ex Areas 170
Accessories - Series 500 Conventional 172
FAA500TR-W Trim Ring, White 172
Inserts 172
FCA500EU Conventional Base 173
FAA500BB Ceiling Mount Back Box 173
FAA500CB Built-in Housing for Concrete Ceilings 174
FAA500SB Surface Mount Back Box 174
Room Seal 175
FAA500SPRING for Concrete/Wooden Ceilings 176
FAA500RTL Exchanger Device 176
FAA500TTL Test Adapter with Magnet 177
MS 400 Detector Base 178
MSF 400 Detector Base with Damp Room Seal 179
MSC 420 Additional Base with Damp Room Seal 179
MSR 320 Conventional Detector Base with Relay 180
MSD 320 Conventional Detector Base with Diode 181
DIN 14623 182
FAA420RI Remote Indicator 183
Stilts 184
MK 400 Detector Console 184
MH 400 Detector Heating Element 185
SK 400 Protective Basket 185
SSK 400 Protective Dust Cover 186
Accessories - DO1101A-Ex 188
Base for DO1101AEx Smoke Detector 188
DBZ 1191 Additional Base 189
DBZ 1192 Additional Base for Damp Rooms 190
DBZ 1193A Detector Identification 190
SB3 Safety Barrier incl. DCA1192 Input/Output
Module 191
Specialty Detectors 192
FAS-420-TM Series Aspirating Smoke Detectors
LSN improved version 192
FAS420 Series Aspirating Smoke Detectors
Components for Smoke Aspiration Systems 203
Fireray 50/100RV Linear Smoke Detectors 204
Fireray 2000 Linear Smoke Detector 208
FRay5000-50-EN Linear Smoke Detector 212
FCSLWM1 Linear Heat Detector 215
Table of Contents | iii
ADW 511A Linear Heat Detector 217
Infrared Flame Detectors 220
FAD420HSEN Duct Smoke Detector 222
Manual Call Points 225
LSN Manual Call Points 226
FMC420RW Single Action Call Points LSN
improved 226
FMC210DM Manual Call Points 230
FMC210SM Single Action Call Points 235
Conventional Manual Call Points 237
FMC300RW Single Action Call Points 237
FMC120DKM Manual Call Points 241
Accessories - Manual Call Points LSN and
Conventional 246
Punched, Self-adhesive Foil Sets (Blank), for
Operating Panel and Labeling Field 246
FMXFSOLSN Punched, Self-adhesive Foil Sets
(Blank) 246
FMXFSOGLT Punched, Self-adhesive Foil Sets
(Blank) 247
FMCFSTDE Printed Labeling Foils for the Upper
Label Field 247
FMCSPGLDEIL Spare Glasses 248
Conventional Manual Call Points for Ex Areas 249
Accessories - Manual Call Points for Ex Areas 251
Module 251
Interface and EOL Modules 253
LSN Interface Modules Series 420 258
FLM420/4CON Conventional Interface Modules
4wire LSN 258
FLM420NAC Signaling Device Interface Modules 261
FLMI 420S Short Circuit Isolator 264
FLM420RHV Relay High Voltage Interface
Modules 266
FLM420RLV1 Relay Interface Modules Low
Voltage 269
FLM420RLV8S Octo-relay Interface Module Low
Voltage 272
FLM420I8R1S Octo-input Interface Module with
Relay 274
FLM420I2 Input Interface Modules 277
FLM420O2 Output Interface Modules 281
FLM420O1I1 Output-input Interface Modules 284
FLM-420-RLE-S Extinguishing Interface Module 288
FMXIFB55S Interface Box Surface-mount 290
FLMIFB126S Surface-mounted Housing 290
NAK 100 LSN Branch Interface 291
EOL Modules 293
FLM-320-EOL2W Conventional EOL Module 2-
Wire 293
FLM-420-EOL2W-W EOL Module LSN 294
Signaling Devices 295
Acoustic Signaling Devices 298
MAGIC.SENS Detector Base Sounders 298
SG 200 Acoustic Signaling Devices 301
DS 10 Sounders 303
HPW 11 AC Alarm Horn 305
FNM-420-A Sounder Indoor 306
Optical Signaling Devices 309
BL 200 Strobes 309
FNS-P400RTH Rotating Beacons 311
PB 2005 Strobe Red, 24 V 313
EASY AVR Conventional Inbuilt Strobe for SG 200 315
FNS420R LSN Strobe, Red 317
Distributors and Relays 319
Relays 320
UAR Relays for Fire Detection Systems 320
Test and Service Devices 321
Test Devices 322
SOLO461 Heat Detector Tester 322
SOLO330 Smoke Detector Tester 324
SOLO100 Telescopic Access Pole 325
Solo A3001 Test Aerosol for Optical Smoke
Detectors 326
Solo CO Testing Gas 326
LSN Simulator 327
LSN Test Device 327
Service Devices 328
SOLO200 Detector Removal Tool 328
FME420ADAP Tool Adapter for MS420 329
Exchanger Device for DO1101AEx and DOW 1171 329
SOLO100 Telescopic Access Pole 330
SOLO101 Fixed Extension Pole 331
SOLO610 Test Equipment Bag 332
Modular Panel
1
Modular Fire Panel FPA-5000 2
Panel Rails FPA-5000 38
Panel Controller FPA-5000 40
Housings for Frame Installation FPA-5000 46
Accessories - Frame Installation FPA-5000 54
Housings for Wall Mounting FPA-5000 60
Accessories - Wall Mounting FPA-5000 68
Power Supplies FPA-5000 72
Cable Sets FPA-5000 75
Accessories - FPA-5000 79
2 | Modular Panel | Modular Fire Panel FPA-5000
FPA5000 With Functional
Modules
Features
Modular configuration allowing for easy extension
Easy adaptation to country-specific regulations and
conditions
Complete set-up with up to 46 modules per control
panel
Interconnection of up to 32 Panel Controllers and
Remote Keypads (by August 2009)
Loop or bus connection with redundancy
Connection to BIS Building Integration System via OPC
server
Control of up to 4096 addresses (stand-alone panel), or
of up to 32512 addresses of a network with 2032
addresses per control panel (by August 2009)
Installation and auto-detection of functional modules
by simply inserting them into the Panel Rail
Large LCD display with touch screen
Thanks to the modular configuration, the innovative
FPA5000 Modular Fire Panel is easily adapted to local
circumstances and regulations. Due to the different
functional modules, country-specific characteristics are
accommodated in the connection just as quickly as the
respective alarm handling.
The fire panel is available with two different housings:
Housing for mounting directly on the wall
Frame installation housings which are fitted to the

mounting frame and can be swiveled.
With the aid of special mounting kits, the housings can be
mounted in 19" cabinets.
All housings can be extended with various additional
housings for all conceivable applications.
The entire fire detection system is configured via a laptop
using the new programming software FSP-5000-RPS.
Thanks to the external CAN bus interface, several Panel
Controllers and Remote Keypads can be interconnected.
Using either a loop structure or bus structure, the network
adapts to every application conditions.
FPA5000 systems can be connected to the Bosch
UGM 2020 Universal Security System and thus, be
integrated into a large network system.
An Ethernet interface allows for the connection to a
Building Management System (BIS Bosch Building
Integration System) via an OPC server.
Ethernet
BIS
OPC
FPA-5000
FMR-5000
The FMR5000 Remote Keypad offers the decentralized
operation of a control panel or control panel network.
1
Modular Panel | Modular Fire Panel FPA-5000 | 3
System Overview
N I
T U O
N I
T U O
# 0 *
8 9
5 6
2 3
7
4
1
?
PQRS TUV WXYZ
GHI JKI MNO
ABC DEF
F i r e
Test
City Tie
City Tie Fault
Ground Fault
Battery Fault
Power
Trouble
Signal Silence
Bypassed
Supervisory
N A C 1 N A C 3 N A C 7 N A C 9 N A C 5
N A C 2 N A C 4 N A C 8 N A C 1 0 N A C 6
P S 2 P S 3 P S 5 P S 6 P S 4
BCBAT
BCBAT
B AT 2
1 0 A
2 5 A
2 5 A
Bri dge 2- 3 Bri dge 3- 4 Bri dge 4- 5 Bri dge 5- 6
- - - - - + + + + +
- + - +
-
+
B AT1 A B AT1 B -
+ -
+
NETZEIN
NETZSTROM
Strung
BATTERIE1
Strung
BATTERIE2
Strung
FAULT MAIN +- BAT1 +- BAT2 +- BAT1 +- +- FAULT AC FAULT
AUX3 +- AUX4 +- AUX2 +- AUX1 +- AUX5 +- AUX6 +-
BCM0000A
LSN
0300 A
AU X 1 + - L S N 1 a -b +AU X 2 + - L S N 2 a -b +
ZONE4
Strung
ZONE3
Strung
ZONE2
Strung
ZONE1
Strung
CZM0004A
AUX1 + - OUT1+ - IN1+ - AUX2 + - OUT2+ - IN2+ -
AUX3 + - OUT3+ - IN3+ - AUX4 + - OUT4+ - IN4+ -
ANI0016AF2 F1
NC1NO1 C1NC2NO2 C2
FB1 + - FB2 + -
RELAIS2
Strung
RELAIS1
Strung
RMH0002A
OUT3 OUT2OUT4OUT6 OUT5OUT7GND OUT8GNDGND GND
IN1IN3 IN2IN4IN6 IN5IN7GND IN8GNDGND GND
OUT1
IOP0008A
C
D
H
L
M
B
E
F
G
I
A
A
Pos. Description
A Functional Modules
B ADC Address Cards
C Panel Controller
D Distributor, optional (RLE/RLU/HPD)
E Panel Rail Short
F Power Supply Bracket (installed in Frame Installation Hous-
ings ex-works)
G Power Supply
H Housing (in this case: HCP 0006 A)
I Panel Rail Long
L Batteries
M Remote Keypad
Functions
Modular Structure of the FPA5000 Modular Fire Panel
Due to its modular structure, the FPA5000 Modular Fire
Panel provides complete flexibility and thus customized
solutions for any application.
Depending on the requirements, the following selection can
be made when planning:
1. Housing type: Frame installation or wall-mount
-
Selection of a basic housing
-
Optional Extension Housings
-
Optional Power Supply Housings
-
Optional kits for installation in 19" racks
2. Operating and Display Unit with Panel Controller
-
Selection from the various language variants
3. Panel Rail
-
Selection according to housing type and/or number
of required functional modules
4. Functional modules
-
Selection based on planning and country-specific
requirements
5. Power supply
-
Batteries
-
Additional power supply facilities
-
Power Supply Brackets are preinstalled ex-works
for Frame Installation Housings
-
For Wall-mount Housings, Power Supply Brackets
are selected as needed
6. Additional accessories
-
Front Doors
-
Printer with Frame Installation Housing
-
Cable Sets for special applications
Modules
The functional modules are autonomous, encapsulated
units that can be inserted into any control panel slot using
"plug-and-play" technology. Thus, the power supply and the
data traffic to the control panel are indicated automatically
without any additional settings. The module is automatically
identified by the control panel and functions in the default
operating mode.
Wiring to external components is performed using compact
connector/screw terminals.
After a replacement, only the connectors need to be
reinserted; extensive rewiring is no longer required.
Module Description
BCM0000B Battery Controller Module
module that controls batteries and power sup-

ply
ANI 0016 A Annunciator Module
with 16 red and 16 yellow LEDs, freely pro-

grammable
LSN 0300 A LSN improved Module 300 mA
for the connection of an LSN loop with up to 254

LSN improved elements or 127 standard LSN
elements, maximum line current 300 mA
LSN 1500 A LSN improved Modul 1500 mA

LSN improved elements, maximum line current
1500 mA, or with up to 127 standard LSN ele-
ments, maximum line current 300 mA
FPE5000UGM Interface Module
for the connection to a UGM2020 System

CZM 0004 A 4 Zone Conventional Module
for the connection of existing conventional pe-

ripherals, with four monitored conventional
lines
IOS 0020 A 20 mA Communication Module
sports an S20 interface, an RS232 interface and

an S1 interface
for a connection with a voice alarm system Plena

via RS232
1
Module Description
IOS 0232 A RS232 Communication Module
with two RS323 interfaces
for a connection with a voice alarm system Ple-

na, a printer or laptop
ENO 0000 B Fire Service Interface Module
for the connection to fire service equipment ac-

cording to DIN 14675
IOP 0008 A Input/Output Module
with 8 digital inputs and 8 open collector out-

puts
RML 0008 A Relay Module
with 8 relays for low voltage applications

RMH 0002 A Relay Module
with 2 relays for mains power (250 V) and with

feedback inputs (can also be used as an inter-
face to extinguishing systems)
NZM 0002 A Notification Appliance Zone Module
with two monitored primary lines

Networking
The CAN interfaces allow for the connection of up to 32
Panel Controllers and / or Remote Keypads in a single
network. Depending on the usage, Panel Controllers and
Remote Keypads can either be defined as a group or as a
network or as a local node. Within a group, only the
conditions of the control panels belonging to the defined
group can be displayed. From the network nodes, the
conditions of all control panels, regardless of their
classification as a group, can be displayed and edited.
When networking via CAN1 and CAN2 interfaces, there are
the following three connection topologies:
Non-redundant bus via CAN1
Redundant bus via busses CAN1 and CAN2
Redundant loop via CAN1 and CAN2

For networking with optical fibers, PSI-MOS-DNET CAN/FO
converters by Phoenix Contact can be used.
Detection Points
For identification and monitoring purposes, a distinct LSN
address is allocated to each LSN element. The Address
Cards allocate one detection point per address. The
FPA5000 governs up to 4096 addresses and 4096
detection points respectively.
Each element and input which, after the programming, is
able to set off an alarm requires a detection point. This
applies to all manual call points and automatic detectors as
well as to the following modules and interfaces because of
their inputs.
Module Detection Points
LSN 0300 A up to 254
CZM 0004 A up to 4
IOP 0008 A up to 8
ENO 0000 B requires a detection point only if an FSE release ele-
ment is connected and programmed via the
FSP-5000-RPS programming software
Interfaces Detection Points
FLM-420/4-CON up to 2
FLM-420-I8R1-S up to 8
FLM-420-I2 up to 2
FLM-420-O8I2-S up to 2
FLM-420-O1I1 up to 1
FLM-420-RLE-S up to 2
FLM-420-EOL-2W-W 1 detection point for each interface
Inputs are only considered as detection points if they are
programmed as "Supervisory" or "Fault" in the
FSP5000RPS.
The following interfaces do not require the allocation of
detection points: FLM420NAC, FLM420RHV,
FLM420RLV1, FLM420RLV8, FLM420O2.
Signaling devices and outputs have no detection points!
Certifications and Approvals
The provided options according to EN 542:1997/A1:2006
include:
Output to fire alarm devices
Control of fire alarm routing equipment

-
Output to fire alarm routing equipment
-
Alarm confirmation input from fire alarm routing
equipment
Outputs to fire protection equipment

-
Output type A
-
Output type B
-
Output type C
-
Fault monitoring of fire protection equipment
Delays to outputs
Dependencies on more than one alarm signal

-
Type A dependency
-
Type B dependency
Alarm counter
Fault warning condition

-
Fault signals from points
-
Total loss of the power supply
-
Output to fault warning routing equipment
Disabled condition
-
Disablement of adressable points
Test condition
Region Certification
Europe CE FPA-5000
CPD 0786-CPD-20818 FPA 5000
Germany VdS-S S 295042 BS 1000
S205106 BS FPA
VdS G 205106 FPA-5000
DIBt Z-6.5-2027 (B) FSA 5000 LSN
Switzerland VKF AEAI 19197 FPA 5000
1
Belgium BOSEC TCC2-738 FPA 5000
TCC2-739 FPA 5000
TCC2-740 FPA 5000
TCC2-741 FPA 5000
TCC2-742 FPA 5000
FPA 5000 V2.0
Poland CNBOP 2662/2008 FPA-5000
Turkey TSE 14.10.01/TSE-4692 FPA-5000
Czech
Republic
TZS 080-011414 FPA-5000
Hungary TMT TMT-32/2005 FPA-5000
Russia GOST B.00223 FPA-5000
POCC DE.C313B06299
MOE UA1.016.0040642-06 FPA-5000
Singapore PSB 022767 FPA-5000
Bulgaria GD FSPP POPSd 60 FPA-5000
Installation/Configuration Notes
Country-specific standards and guidelines must be

considered during planning.
Connection conditions for the regional authorities and

institutions (police, fire service) must be maintained.
It is preferable to use the loop formation owing to the

greater security of loop lines compared with stub lines.
It is possible to combine LSN interface modules and

LSN detectors on one loop or stub line.
If connecting classic and improved LSN elements within

one loop, observe the following:
-
All LSN improved elements must be set to classic
mode.
-
The maximum number of elements within one mixed
loop is limited to 127.
Existing conventional detectors can be connected to a

CZM 0004 A module. A CZM 0004 A module provides
four DC primary lines (zones).
In accordance with EN 542, control panels with more

than 512 LSN elements must be connected
redundantly. To that end, a second basic housing with
a second MPC Panel Controller is used.
For operation of the fire detection system according to

EN 5413, it is necessary to terminate every stub and T-
tap with EOL-modules.
General System Limits
Max. number
Control panels/remote keypads in network
Loop topology 32
Bus topology, redundant 8
Bus topology, non-redundant 8

Addresses
Stand-alone 4096 stand-alone
In Network 32512
In network, per control panel 2032

Detection points / detector zones
Max. number
Stand-alone 4096 stand-alone
In Network 32512
In network, per control panel 2032

Limits per Fire Panel
Sets, e.g. bypass group 128
Total number of modules, per control panel 46
Printer 4
Alarm counter (external, internal, revision) 3
Number of entries in the event database 10000
FSP-5000-RPS programming interface 1
Time control channel 20
Time control programs 19
Programming defined days 365
User 10
Access level 4
System Limits Functional Modules
Functional module Max. number
BCM-0000-B 8
ANI 0016 A 32
LSN 0300 A 32
LSN 1500 A 11
FPE-5000-UGM 4
CZM 0004 A 32
IOS 0020 A 4
IOS 0232 A 4
ENO 0000 B 8
IOP 0008 A 32
RML 0008 A 32
RMH 0002 A 32
NZM 0002 A 8
System Limits for Each LSN 0300 A Module
Up to 254 LSN improved version elements or 127 classic

LSN elements can be connected
Output current
-
LSN 0300 A: up to 300 mA
-
LSN 1500 A: up to 1500 mA
Cable length
-
LSN 0300 A: up to 1600 m
-
LSN 1500 A: up to 3000 m
Unshielded cables can be used

Note Owing to the FSD (Fire System Designer)
programming software, the planning of fire
panels in compliance with the limits (e.g.
concerning cable length and power supply) is
quick and easy.
Installation Notes
Fire panels can only be installed in dry, clean interior

rooms.
To ensure optimum battery service life, the control

panel should only be operated at sites with normal room
temperatures.
The following environmental conditions must be noted:

1
-
Permissible ambient temperature:
-5 C 50 C (23 F 122 F)
-
Permissible relative humidity:
Max. 95 %, non-condensing
Operating and display elements should be located at

eye level.
Frame installation housings require at least 230 mm

free space on the right next to the last housing; this
space is for swiveling out the attached housing for
connection, maintenance, and service.
Sufficient space should be left underneath and next to

the control panel for any possible extensions, e.g. for an
additional power supply or an extension housing.
Do not operate devices showing condensation.
Only use the mounting materials specified by

BOSCH ST. Interference resistance cannot otherwise
be guaranteed.
If connected to a Building Management System (BIS

Bosch Building Integration System) via the Ethernet and
an OPC server, please verify with the responsible
network administrator that in case of a network
spanning multiple buildings
-
the network is designed for connections across
multiple buildings (e.g. no interference by different
potentials of the ground connection)
-
all users are assigned to the network.
Ordering Information
BCM 0000 A Battery Controller Module
for extension of the FPA5000 with the Panel
Controller MPC version A
BCM 0000 A
CBB 0000 A Cable Set BCM/Battery
Used to connect a battery pair and a Power
Supply Housing to the BCM0000B Battery
Controller Module
CBB 0000 A
CPB 0000 A Cable BCM/UPS
Used to connect the BCM0000B Battery Con-
troller Module to a UPS Power Supply, cable
length 150 cm
CPB 0000 A
monitors the power supply of the fire and the
charging of the batteries
BCM-0000-B
displays the status of 16 individually program-
mable detection points
ANI 0016 A
for connecting an LSN loop with up to 254 LSN
improved elements or 127 classic LSN ele-
ments, with a maximum line current of 300 mA
LSN 0300 A
FLM-420-EOL2W-W EOL Module LSN
for EN 5413 compliant termination of LSN
stubs or T-taps
FLM-420-EOL2W-W
improved elements with a maximum line cur-
rent of 1500 mA, or with up to 127 classic LSN
elements, with a maximum line current of
300 mA
LSN 1500 A
stubs or T-taps
FLM-420-EOL2W-W
for connecting the fire panels FPA5000 and
FPA-1200 to superordinate systems
(UGM 2020, FAT 2002/RE, FSM2000)
FPE-5000-UGM
for connecting existing conventional peripher-
als; providing four monitored conventional
lines
CZM 0004 A
FLM-320-EOL2W Conventional EOL Module
2-Wire
for EN 5413 compliant termination of con-
ventional lines
FLM-320-EOL2W
provides one interface each of S20, RS232
and S1
IOS 0020 A
for connecting two devices, e.g. voice alarm
system Plena, a laptop or a printer, via two in-
dependent serial interfaces
IOS 0232 A
for connecting fire service equipment in com-
pliance with DIN 14675
ENO 0000 B
CPA 0000 A Cable Set AT 2000
Used to connect an AT 2000 to the MPC and
the ENO 0000 B.
CPA 0000 A
for individual displays, providing eight inde-
pendent digital inputs and eight open collector
outputs
IOP 0008 A
for low voltage, providing 8 change-over con-
tact relays (type C)
RML 0008 A
for monitored connection of external elements
with feedback, providing 2 change-over con-
tact relays (type C) for high voltage
RMH 0002 A
NZM 0002 A Notification Appliance Zone
Module
for connecting 2 separate notification appli-
ance zone lines, providing 2 monitored primary
lines
NZM 0002 A
NMC 0000 A Cable HPD/NZM
Used for synchronization in accordance with
UL requirements, cable length 90 cm
NMC 0000 A
Accessories
2-Wire
ventional lines
FLM-320-EOL2W
stubs or T-taps
FLM-420-EOL2W-W
FDP 0001 A Dummy Cover Plate
For available module slots
FDP 0001 A
PSK 0001 A Labelling Strips, Wide
20 sheets each with 6 strips, printable,
for the functional modules BCM0000B,
LSN 0300 A, LSN 1500 A, CZM 0004 A,
NZM 0002 A, RMH 0002 A, CTM 0002 A and
ENO 0000 B
PSK 0001 A
1
PSL 0001 A Labelling Strips, Small
20 sheets each with 10 strips, printable, for
the ANI I0016 A Annunciator Module
PSL 0001 A
1
BCM 0000 A Battery
Controller Module
for extension of the FPA5000 with the Panel Controller
MPC version A
System Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
F
A
U
L
T
MAIN
+ -
BAT1
+ -
BAT2
+ -
BAT1
+ - + -
FAULT
AC
FAULT
AUX3
+ -
AUX4
+ -
AUX2
+ -
AUX1
+ -
AUX5
+ -
AUX6
+ -
B
C
M
0
0
0
0
A
MAIN POWER
MAIN POWER
TROUBLE
TROUBLE
TROUBLE
BATTERY 1
BATTERY 2
Pos. Description Connector
1-12 AUX n +/- Voltage outputs:
AUX 1/2/3 - switchable, battery-buffed
(programmable)
AUX 4/5/6 - not switchable, battery-buffered
13-14 MAIN +/- Power supply unit UPS
15 FAULT Input fault, mains
17-18 BAT1 +/- Batteries 1+2 pos./neg.
19-20 BAT2 +/- Batteries 3+4 pos./neg.
21-22 BAT FAULT -/+ Battery fault
23-24 AC FAULT -/+ Main power fault signal output
Voltage outputs 1, 2 and 3: +24 V / max. 1.4 A
Voltage outputs 4, 5 and 6: +24 V / max. 0.5 A
Fault signal outputs: max. 500 mA (at 24 V DC)
Functions
The BCM 0000 A Battery Controller Module monitors the
power supply of the entire control panel and controls
temperature- and time-controlled charging of up to four
batteries (12 V/40 Ah or 12 V/28 Ah).
The charging of batteries is started manually with the key
(at V
Batt
< 22 V). The control panel can be started without
any mains current if the batteries are charged.
1
Configuration specifications for Battery Controller
Modules
With 1 to 4 BCM modules:

-
max. 2 modules at the start of the first panel rail
-
max. 2 modules at the end of the last panel rail
BCM
4
BCM
3
BCM
1
BCM
2

-
2 modules at the start of the first panel rail (BCM 1
and 2)
-
2 modules at the end of the last panel rail
(BCM 3 and 4)
-
additional BCM modules as shown
BCM
4
BCM
3
BCM
1
BCM
2
BCM
5
BCM
6
BCM
7
BCM
8
1
BCM
4
BCM
3
BCM
1
BCM
2
BCM
5
BCM
6
BCM
7
BCM
8
2
Pos. Description
1 Area 1
2 Area 2
-
Current consumption of the BCM modules must not
exceed 10 A in Area 1.
-
-
This only applies to current consumption for
consumer loads of the outputs 1-12 (AUX 1-6).
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 BCM 0000 A Battery Controller Module
1 Cable set with 2 connection cables:
BCM/battery (90 cm) and battery/battery (17 cm)
Note If the batteries are located in a power supply
housing, cable set CBB 0000 A is required
(cable length for BCM/battery 180 cm).
Technical Specifications
Electrical
Input voltage 20 V DC to 30 V DC
5 V DC 5%
Current consumption
Standby 31 mA (at 24 V DC)
Fault 40 mA (at 24 V DC)

Voltage outputs
3 outputs, switchable +24 V / 1.7 A, battery-buffed

(programmable)
3 outputs, not switchable +24 V / 0.5 A, battery-buffered

Capacity of the outputs
BAT FAULT, AC FAULT max. 500 mA (at 27 V DC)
Maximum current to the panel rails
(PRS 0002 A/PRD 0004 A)
Max. 6 A via the BCM 0000 A
Max. 8 A via the batteries
Mechanics
Operating/display elements
1 green LED Power ON
3 yellow LEDs Trouble mains/batt. 1/batt. 2
1 key Batteries charge at V < 22 V and central

units start with battery current
Housing material ABS plastic, Polylac PA-766 (UL94 V0)
Housing color Satin finish, anthracite, RAL 7016
Dimensions Approx. 127 x 96 x 60 mm
(5.0 x 3.8 x 2.4 in.)
Weight
Without packaging Approx. 185 g (6.5 ounces)
With packaging Approx. 335 g (11.8 ounces)

Environmental conditions
Permitted operating temperature -5 C to 50 C (23 F ... 122 F)
Permitted storage temperature -20 C to 60 C (-4 F ... 140 F)
Permitted relative humidity 95%, non-condensing
Protection class as per IEC 60529 IP 30
1
BCM 0000 A Battery Controller Module
for extension of the FPA5000 with the Panel
Controller MPC version A
BCM 0000 A
Accessories
Controller Module
CBB 0000 A
length 150 cm
CPB 0000 A
1
BCM0000B Battery
Controller Module
Features
Two voltage outputs of 2.8 A at 24 V each
Temperature-controlled charging of batteries
according to EN 544
Ready to go thanks to plug-and-play technology and
pluggable terminal blocks
The BCM-0000-B Battery Controller Module monitors the
power supply of the entire control panel. It controls the
charging of up to four batteries (12 V/24 Ah to 12 V/26 Ah
or 12 V/36 Ah to 12 V/45 Ah). The charging is actuated by
temperature and time.
The key has three functions, depending on the state of the
battery controller module:
The LED test of the module is activated by pushing the

key.
The key starts the charging of the batteries if the battery

voltage is between 18 V and 21 V. A mains power supply
is required.
The reset of the 24 V outputs. If an error occurs, the

output is deactivated.
System Overview
Description Connector
24V +/- Output max. 2.8 A (battery buffered)
24V +/- Output max. 2.8 A (battery buffered)
MAIN +/- Power supply unit UPS
MAIN FAULT Input fault, mains
BAT1 +/- Battery pair 1
BAT2 +/- Battery pair 2
FAULT AC - Main power fault signal output
FAULT BAT- Battery fault signal output
FAULT - Collective fault signal output
FAULT + Signal output +
Do not use the 24V outputs in parallel wiring.
Configuration specifications for Battery Controller
Modules

-
max. 2 modules at the start of the first panel rail
-
max. 2 modules at the end of the last panel rail
1
BCM
4
BCM
3
BCM
1
BCM
2

-
2 modules at the start of the first panel rail (BCM 1
and 2)
-
2 modules at the end of the last panel rail
(BCM 3 and 4)
-
additional BCM modules as shown
BCM
4
BCM
3
BCM
1
BCM
2
BCM
5
BCM
6
BCM
7
BCM
8
1
BCM
4
BCM
3
BCM
1
BCM
2
BCM
5
BCM
6
BCM
7
BCM
8
2
Pos. Description
1 Area 1
2 Area 2
-
-
-
This only applies to the current consumption for
consumer loads of the outputs (1) 24 V and (2) 24 V.
Calculation of the standby current according to EN 544
Formula (1) gives the maximum panel current required to
provide a specific buffering time (I
max,Standby
).
Formula (2) gives the maximum panel current with
simultaneous consideration of the battery charge (I
max,A
).
According to formula (3), the required standby current of
the panel (I
nom
) is based on the smaller value of the two
maximum current values of the panel.
Parameter:
t
Standby
= buffering time in hour
I
Alarm
= maximum alarm current (I
max,B
)
C
Batt
= battery capacity in Ah
The following capacities are feasible:
24 26 Ah and 36 45 Ah for 2 batteries
48 52 Ah and 72 90 Ah for 4 batteries

Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 BCM-0000-B Battery Controller Module
1 Cable set with 2 connection cables:
BCM/battery (90 cm) and battery/battery (17 cm)
Note If the batteries are placed in a power supply
housing, the cable set CBB 0000 A is required
(cable length for BCM/battery 180 cm).
Electrical
Input voltage 20,4 V DC to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Standby 25 mA
Fault 40 mA
Voltage outputs
2 outputs, switchable +24 V / 2.8 A, battery-buffed

(programmable)
Capacity of the outputs
BAT FAULT, AC FAULT and collec-
tive FAULT
0 V / 0 to 20 mA
Maximum current of the module Max. 6 A
to the panel rails

(PRS 0002 A/PRD 0004 A)
Max. 6 A via the BCM 0000 A
of the outputs Max. 5.6 A (2 x 2.8 A not in parallel wir-

ing)
Maximum battery resist-

ance
430 m
Permitted battery capacity
with 2 batteries 24 26 Ah
36 45 Ah
with 4 batteries 48 52 Ah
72 90 Ah
Mechanics
Operating/display elements
1 green LED Power ON
3 yellow LEDs Trouble mains/batt. 1/batt. 2
1 key Batteries charge at V < 21 V and central

units start with battery current
(5.0 x 3.8 x 2.4 in.)
1
Weight
With packaging Approx. 340 g (12 ounces)

Permitted operating temperature -5C to 50C (23F to 122F)
Permitted storage temperature -20C to 85C (-13F to 185F)
BCM-0000-B
1
ANI 0016 A Annunciator
Module
Features
Status display of 16 individually programmable
detection points
Ready to go thanks to plug-and-play technology
The module, with 16 red and 16 yellow LEDs, can display
the status of 16 individually programmable detection
points.
System Overview
A
N
I
0
0
1
6
A
Functions
The Annunciator Module has 16 red and 16 yellow LEDs for
displaying the operating states of 16 definable detection
points.
The module is inserted in an open module slot and is
therefore ready for operation.
Only the detection points to be displayed must still be
defined via the programming software [RPS].
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 ANI 0016 A Annunciator Module
4 Labelling strips
Electrical
5 V DC 5%
Max. current consumption
Standby (all LEDs off) 6 mA (at 24 V DC)
All LEDs on 26 mA (at 24 V DC)

1
Mechanics
Display elements 16 red LEDs
16 yellow LEDs
Housing material ABS plastic, Polylac PA-766 (UL94 V-0)
(5.0 x 3.8 x 2.4 in.)
Weight

Permitted operating tempera-
ture
-5 C to 50 C (23 F to 122 F)
Permitted storage temperature -20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F)
Protection class as per
IEC 60529
IP 30
ANI 0016 A
1
LSN 0300 A
LSN improved Module
300 mA
Features
Up to 254 LSN improved elements
Line length up to 1600 m, depending on configuration
and cable type
Unshielded cable can be used
Line current up to 300 mA, depending on configuration
and cable type
Additional voltage output (ERT-capable)
Flexible network structures (loop, stub, and T-tap)
Addressing techniques: LSN improved auto-
addressing, LSN classic auto-addressing and manual
address assignment
This module allows the connection of an LSN loop with up
to 254 LSN improved elements or 127 classic LSN elements,
with a maximum line current of 300 mA.
System Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L
S
N
0
3
0
0
A
AUX1
+ -
LSN1
a- b+
AUX2
+ -
LSN2
a- b+
Ite
m
Description Connection
LSN
loo
p
LSN stub
1 / 2 AUX1 + / - Auxiliary power supply Auxiliary power supply stub
1
3 LSN a1- LSN a1- outgoing Stub 1 LSN a1-
4 LSN b1+ LSN b1+ outgoing Stub 1 LSN b1+
5 / 6 AUX2 + / - Auxiliary power supply*** Auxiliary power supply stub
2
7 LSN a2- LSN a2- incoming Stub 2 LSN a1-
8 LSN b2+ LSN b2+ incoming Stub 2 LSN b1+
*** Auxiliary power must only be returned to AUX2 in looped
isolators (ERT systems). [Suitable isolators include YBO-R/
SCI isolators]
Note Current consumption of the connected devices
and cable length can be calculated with the
Fire System Designer (FSD).


EN 54-13, it is necessary to terminate every stub and T-
1
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 LSN 0300 A LSN improved Module 300 mA
Electrical systems
Input voltage 20 V DC to 30 V DC /
5 V DC 5 %
Output voltage:
LSN 30 1.0 V DC
Aux auxiliary power 28 1.0 V DC

Max. current consumption 1750 mA at 24 V DC
Nominal current consumption
Module 39 mA at 24 V DC
LSN 1,7 x current consumption of LSN elements
AUX 1,2 x Auxiliary power

LSN line current Max. 300 mA, depending on configuration
and cable type
AUX auxiliary power (28 V DC) Max. 500 mA in an LSN loop (ERT system)
or 2 x max. 500 mA in 2 stubs
Mechanical systems
Operation/display elements 2 LEDs ( red = alarm, yellow = fault)
1 button (LED test)
Housing material ABS plastic, (UL94 V-0)
(5.0 x 3.8 x 2.4 in.)
Weight Approx. 225 g
System limits
Max. line length 1600 m, depending on configuration and
cable type
Number of elements Max. 127 classic LSN elements
Max. 254 LSN improved elements
Permissible operating temper-
ature
-5 C to 50 C (23 F to 122 F)
Permitted storage tempera-
ture
-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F)
Permitted relative humidity 95 % , non-condensing
IEC 60529
IP 30
LSN 0300 A
Accessories
stubs or T-taps
FLM-420-EOL2W-W
1
LSN 1500 A
LSN improved Module
1500 mA
Features
Up to 254 LSN improved elements
Line length up to 3000 m, depending on configuration
and cable type
Line current up to 1500 mA, depending on
configuration and cable type
Additional voltage output (ERT-capable)
Flexible network structures (loop, stub, and T-tap)
Addressing techniques: LSN improved auto-
addressing, LSN classic auto-addressing and manual
address assignment
This module allows the connection of an LSN loop with up
to 254 LSN improved elements with a maximum line current
of 1500 mA or with up to 127 classic LSN elements, with a
maximum line current of 300 mA.
System Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ite
m
LSN
loo
p
LSN stub
1 / 2 AUX1 + / - Auxiliary power supply Auxiliary power supply stub
1
3 LSN a1- LSN a1- outgoing Stub 1 LSN a1-
4 LSN b1+ LSN b1+ outgoing Stub 1 LSN b1+
5 / 6 AUX2 + / - Auxiliary power supply*** Auxiliary power supply stub
2
7 LSN a2- LSN a2- incoming Stub 2 LSN a1-
8 LSN b2+ LSN b2+ incoming Stub 2 LSN b1+
*** Auxiliary power must only be returned to AUX2 in looped
isolators (ERT systems). [Suitable isolators include YBO-R/
SCI isolators]
System limits for each LSN 1500 A LSN improved Module
Note Current consumption of the connected devices
and cable length can be calculated with the
Fire System Designer (FSD).

It can only be plugged in on the left side of a PRD 0004

A panel rail and requires two slots!

EN 54-13, it is necessary to terminate every stub and T-
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 LSN 1500 A LSN improved Module 1500 mA
Note Ready for delivery on request.
1
Electrical systems
Input voltage 20 V DC to 30 V DC /
5 V DC 5 %
Output voltage:
LSN 30 0.85 V DC
Aux auxiliary power 28 1.0 V DC

Max. current consumption 4010 mA at 24 V DC
Nominal current consumption
Module 260 mA at 24 V DC
LSN 1.7 x current consumption of LSN elements
AUX 1.2 x Auxiliary power

LSN line current:
Standby Max. 750 mA, depending on configuration

and cable type
Alarm Max. 1500 mA, depending on configura-

tion and cable type,
Max. 300 mA at connection of classic LSN
elements
AUX auxiliary power
(28 V DC)
Max. 500 mA in an LSN loop (ERT system)
or 2 x max. 500 mA in 2 stubs
Mechanical systems
Operation/display elements 2 LEDs ( red = alarm, yellow = fault)
1 button (LED test)
Housing material ABS plastic, (UL94 V-0)
(5.0 x 7.6 x 2.4 in.)
System limits
Max. line length 3000 m, depending on configuration and
cable type
Number of elements Max. 127 classic LSN elements
Max. 254 LSN improved elements
ature
-5 C to 50 C (23 F to 122 F)
ture
-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F)
Permitted relative humidity 95 % , non-condensing
IEC 60529
IP 30
improved elements with a maximum line cur-
rent of 1500 mA, or with up to 127 classic LSN
elements, with a maximum line current of
300 mA
LSN 1500 A
Accessories
stubs or T-taps
FLM-420-EOL2W-W
1
FPE5000UGM Interface
Module
Features
Easy and redundant connection to superordinate
systems
MTS protocol
The Communication Module is used to connect the fire
panels FPA5000 and FPA1200 to a superordinate system
like the UGM 2020, FAT 2002/RE and FSM2000. The
module provides two bi-directional transmission paths.
System Overview
SDI
SDO
1
2
SDI
SDO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
Pos. Labeling Connection
1 SDI 1 + Transmission path 1 Data input +
2 SDI 1 - Data input -
3 SDO 1 + Data input +
4 SDO 1 - Data input -
5 SDI 2 + Transmission path 2 Data input +
6 SDI 2 - Data input -
7 SDO 2 + Data input +
8 SDO 2 - Data input -
Functions
Quant. Component
1 FPE-5000-UGM Interface Module
Electrical
Maximum current consumption
One transmission path ac-

tive
10 mA (at 24 V DC)
Both transmission paths ac-

tive
13 mA (at 24 V DC)
Maximum line length 1000 m
Maximum line resistance 70
Baud rate 9600 bit/s at 1000 m to 38400 bit/s at
200 m
1
Mechanics
Operating and display elements
4 Bi-colorLEDs Green = transmission / Yellow = fault
1 key switch LED test

Housing material ABS plastic (UL94 V0)
Housing color satin finish, anthracite, RAL 7016
Dimensions 110 x 90 x 60 mm
Weight 150 g
Permissible operating tempera-
ture
-5 C to 50 C
Permissible storage temperature -20 C to 60 C
Permissible relative humidity max. 95 %, non-condensing
(UGM 2020, FAT 2002/RE, FSM2000)
FPE-5000-UGM
1
CZM 0004 A 4 Zone
Conventional Module
Features
Connection of 2wire and 4wire conventional elements
The CZM 0004 A is used to connect existing conventional
peripherals and provides four monitored conventional lines.
System Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
C
Z
M
0
0
0
4
A
AU X1
+ -
O UT 1
+ -
I N1
+ -
AU X2
+ -
O UT 2
+ -
IN 2
+ -
AU X3
+ -
O UT 3
+ -
I N3
+ -
AU X4
+ -
O UT 4
+ -
IN 4
+ -
1 / 2 AUX1 + / - Additional power supply* zone 1
3 / 4 OUT1 - / + Zone 1 output low/output high
5 / 6 IN1 - / + Zone 1 input low/input high
21/ 22 OUT4 -/ + Zone 4 output low/output high
* +24 V DC, connectable
All additional voltage outputs (AUX 1AUX 4) can be

switched on and off simultaneously.
2-wire and 4-wire conventional components can be

connected.

1

EN 54-13, it is necessary to terminate every
conventional zone with EOL-modules.
Observe the maximum line resistance:

-
25 for conventional lines with FMC-300-RW or
automatic fire detectors
-
12 for conventional lines with FMC-120-DKM
manual call points.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 CZM 0004 A 4 Zone Conventional Module
Electrical
Input voltage 20 V DC to 30 V DC (min...max)
5 V DC 5%
Standby (all 4 zones) 65 mA (at 24 V DC)
Alarm (all 4 zones) 65 mA + 100 mA per zone (at 24 V DC)

Max. output voltage 20 V DC 5%
Max. output current 100 mA per zone 10%
Max. lead resistance 2 x 25 per zone
Mechanics
Operating/display elements 8 LEDs (4 x red, 4 x yellow)
4 keys
Housing material ABS plastic, Polylac PA-766 (UL94 V-0)
(5.0 x 3.8 x 2.4 in.)
Weight

ture
-5 C to 50 C (23 F to 122 F)
Permitted storage temperature -20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F)
IEC 60529
IP 30
lines
CZM 0004 A
1
IOS 0020 A 20 mA Commu-
nication Module
Features
Connection of peripherals with serial interface
The IOS 0020 A Communication Module has the following
interfaces:
An S20 interface
An RS232 interface
An S1 interface.
The voice alarm system Plena can be connected via RS232.
System Overview
3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2
20 21 22
IN
O
U
T
T
X
D
G
N
D
R
X
D
S1
-
RX
+ -
TX
+ -
AUX
+
IO
S
0
0
2
0
A
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
GND RXD0 TXD0
1 / 2 S1 IN/OUT S1 interface
3 / 4 TX - / + 20 mA interface
5 / 6 RX + / - 20 mA interface
7 / 8 AUX - / + Power supply, +24 V DC/max. 1.3 A
20 / 21 /22 RXD/TXD/GND RS232 interface
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 IOS 0020 A 20 mA Communication Module
Electrical
5 V DC 5%
Max. current consumption 15 mA (at 24 V DC)
Max. output current AUX 1.3 A at 24 V DC
Max. cable length
20 mA interface 1000 m (3280 ft.)
RS232 interface 3 m (10 ft.)

Mechanics
(5.0 x 3.8 x 2.4 in.)
Weight

1
ture
-5 C to 50 C (23 F to 122 F)
ture
-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F)
IEC 60529
IP 30
and S1
IOS 0020 A
1
IOS 0232 A RS232 Commu-
nication Module
Features
Connection of peripherals with RS232 serial interface
The RS232 Communication Module can be used to connect
two devices, e.g. voice alarm system Plena, a laptop or a
printer, via two independent serial interfaces.
System Overview
15 16 17 20 21 22
T
X
D
1
G
N
D
R
X
D
1
T
X
D
2
G
N
D
R
X
D
2
IO
S
0
2
3
2
A
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
GND RXD0 TXD0
15 / 16 / 17 RXD1/TXD1/GND RS232 interface 1
20 / 21 / 22 RXD2/TXD2/GND RS232 interface 2
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 IOS 0232 A RS232 Communication Module
Electrical
5 V DC 5%
Max. cable length 3 m (10 ft.) per interface
Mechanics
(5.0 x 3.8 x 2.4 in.)
Weight

ture
-5 C to 50 C (23 F to 122 F)
ture
-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F)
IEC 60529
IP 30
1
IOS 0232 A
1
ENO 0000 B Fire Service
Interface Module
Features
Connection of Fire Service Systems according to DIN
14675
The ENO 0000 B enables the connection of fire service
equipment in compliance with DIN 14675:
Transmission unit to fire service (AT 2000)
SD key deposit
Signal light (BEGA light, BL 200)
Monitoring of a release device
4 freely-programmable relays.
The ENO 0000 B module is only used in Germany.
System Overview
Pos. Descrip-
tion
Connector
1 A Ground
2 B Transmission unit control
3 C Feedback contact
4 E AWUG fault
5 NQuit Acknowledge
6 GND Ground
7 / 8 E + / - Transmission unit power supply
9 1 Monitoring of key deposit
10 Jumper from position 10 to 11 for the door release
magnet of a 12 V key deposit.
11 2 Ground
12 5 Door release magnet, 24 V, approx. 10 W
13 8 Lock monitoring
14 6/7 Ground
15 9 Heat system, 24 V, approx. 8 W
16 10 Ground
17 / 18 FSE + / - Monitoring of the release device
19 / 20 + / - Signal light, 24 V, approx. 10 W
21 - 32 1/2/3/4 Relays 1-4
For a fire system operation according to EN 54-2, the

transmission units (FMAAT2000GSM/-ISDN/-IP) must
be installed directly next to or within the fire panel. If
the installation is remote, the feedback line to the fire
panel must be monitored.
1
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 ENO 0000 B Fire Service Interface Module
2 Labeling strips
Electrical
5 V DC 5%
All relays triggered 60 mA (at 24 V DC)

Contact load relay 1 A / 30 V DC
Max. lead resistance transmis-
sion unit (E)
2 x 10
Max. cable length key deposit 10 m
Cable type key deposit
LiYY 10 x 0.5 mm
2
Mechanics
Housing material ABS plastic, Polylac PA766 (UL94 V0)
ture
-5 C to 50 C
ture
-20 C to 60 C
Permitted relative humidity 95 %, non-condensing
IEC 60529
IP 30
ENO 0000 B
Accessories
the ENO 0000 B.
CPA 0000 A
1
IOP 0008 A Input/Output
Module
Features
Interface for electrically isolated inputs and outputs
The IOP 0008 A Input/Output Module has eight
independent digital inputs and eight open collector outputs
for individual displays.
System Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1314 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
O
U
T
3
O
U
T
2
O
U
T
4
O
U
T
6
O
U
T
5
O
U
T
7
G
N
D
O
U
T
8
G
N
D
G
N
D
G
N
D
IN
1
IN
3
IN
2
IN
4
IN
6
IN
5
IN
7
G
N
D
IN
8
G
N
D
G
N
D
G
N
D
O
U
T
1
IO
P
0
0
0
8
A
Pos. Descrip-
tion
Connector
1-8 OUT1-
OUT8
8 outputs with a max. voltage of 35 V DC, nominal
700 mA
9-12 GND Ground
13-20 IN1-IN8 8 inputs with a max. voltage of 5 V DC at 0.1 mA per
input
21-24 GND Ground
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 IOP 0008 A Input/Output Module
Electrical
5 V DC 5%
Output current Max 1.5 A, nominal 700 mA (short-circuit
protected)
Max. cable length 3 m (10 ft.) per input/output
1
Mechanics
(5.0 x 3.8 x 2.4 in.)
Weight Approx. 150 g (5.3 ounces)
ture
-5 C to 50 C (23 F to 122 F)
ture
-20 C to 60C (-4 F to 140 F)
IEC 60529
IP 30
outputs
IOP 0008 A
1
Features
8 freely programmable relay outputs
The module has eight change-over contact relays (type C)
to provide potential-free output contacts.
Each of the eight relays has an NO (normally open) and an
NC (normally closed) contact.
The maximum relay contact load is 30 V DC/1 A.
System Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
N
O
5
N
C
5
C
5
N
O
1
N
C
1
C
1
N
O
6
N
C
6
C
6
N
O
2
N
C
2
C
2
N
O
7
N
C
7
C
7
N
O
3
N
C
3
C
3
N
O
8
N
C
8
C
8
N
O
4
N
C
4
C
4
R
M
L
0
0
0
8
A
1-3 NO1 / C1 / NC1 Relay 1
4-6 NO2 / C2 / NC2 Relay 2
7-9 NO3/C3/NC3 Relay 3
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 RML 0008 A Relay Module Low Voltage
1
Electrical
5 V DC 5%
All relays triggered 68 mA (at 24 V DC)

Max. contact load 1 A at 30 V DC
Mechanics
(5.0 x 3.8 x 2.4 in.)
ture
-5 C to 50 C (23 F to 122 F)
ture
-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F)
IEC 60529
IP 30
RML 0008 A
1
Features
Contact rating of 5 A
The module has two change-over contact relays (type C) for
monitored connection of external elements with feedback,
e. g.
Door retaining magnets
Fan
Smoke dampers.
Each relay has an NO (normally open) and an NC (normally
closed) contact and is protected by a 6.3 A fuse.
The maximum relay contact load is 5 A at 120 V/230 V AC
and 5 A at 30 V DC.
The Relay Module can also be used as an extinguishing
system interface in accordance with VdS 2496.
System Overview
1 2 3 10 11 12
15 16 21 22
N
C
1
N
O
1
C
1
N
C
2
N
O
2
C
2
FB1
+ -
FB2
+ -
R
M
H
0
0
0
2
A
1-3 NC1/C1/NO1 Relay 1
10-12 NC2/C2/NO2 Relay 2
15 / 16 FB1 + / - Feedback relay 1
21 / 22 FB2 + / - Feedback relay 2
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 RMH 0002 A Relay Module High Voltage
2 Labeling strips
Electrical
5 V DC 5%
Both relays triggered 50 mA (at 24 V DC)

Max. contact load 5 A at 120/230 V AC
5 A at 30 V DC
Feedback current Max. 4.5 mA per relay
Feedback voltage Max. 30 V DC
1
Maximum line restance of the
feedback lines
2 x 25
Fuses F1 = T 6.3 A, F2 = T 6.3 A
Mechanics
Operating/display elements 4 LEDs (2 x red, 2 x green)
2 keys
Housing material PPO Noryl
Dimensions Approx.127 x 96 x 60 mm
(5.0 x 3.8 x 2.4 in.)
ture
-5 C to 50 C (23 F to 122 F)
ture
-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F)
IEC 60529
IP 30
RMH 0002 A
1
NZM 0002 A Notification
Appliance Zone Module
Features
Monitored control of signaling devices by voltage
polarity reversal
The NZM 0002 A Notification Appliance Zone Module
provides two monitored primary lines. This enables the
connection of two separate notification appliance zone
lines.
Connection of:
Sirens
Strobes
Horns
The operating status of each zone is shown by a red and a
yellow status LED.
System Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1718 1920 24 23 22 21
O
U
T
G
N
D
I
N
G
N
D
SYNC DC BAT
+ - + -
OUT1
B A
IN1
B A
OUT2
B A
IN2
B A
N
Z
M
0
0
0
2
A
1 / 2 B OUT1/A OUT1 NAC zone 1
3 / 4 B IN1/A IN1
5 / 6 B OUT2/A OUT2 NAC zone 2
7 / 8 B IN2/A IN2
17 / 18 DC + / - External power supply via HPD 0000 A
Power distributor
19 / 20 BAT + / - 24 V DC input, battery voltage
21 / 22 SYNC GND/OUT Synchronization output
23 / 24 SYNC GND/IN Synchronization input
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 NZM 0002 A Notification Appliance Zone Module
2 Labelling strips
1
Electrical
5 V DC 5%
Standby (2 zones) 40 mA (at 24 V DC)
Alarm (2 zones) 65 mA (at 24 V DC)

Max. output voltage 29.5 V DC
Max. output current for
Power supply via rail 500 mA per notification appliance zone

line (in the event of an alarm)
External power supply 3 A per notification appliance zone line

(in the event of an alarm)
Max. cable length Dependent on type and number of con-

nected signaling devices
Mechanics
Operating/display elements 4 LEDs (2 x red, 2 x yellow)
1 key
Housing material ABS plastic, Polylac PA766 (UL94 V0)
(5.0 x 3.8 x 2.4 in.)
ture
-5 C to 50 C (23 F to 122 F)
ture
-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F)
IEC 60529
IP 30
Module
lines
NZM 0002 A
Accessories
NMC 0000 A
1
38 | Modular Panel | Panel Rails FPA-5000
Panel Rails
Features
Plug-and-play rails
Adequate for two or four modules
The PRS 0002 A Panel Rail Short and the PRD 0004 A Panel
Rail Long are plug-and-play rails made from glass-fiber-
reinforced plastic for two or four modules. The power
supply for both modules and all the data traffic between the
module and the Control Panel are achieved via the plug
contacts in the rail.
Functions
PRS 0002 A Panel Rail Short
Due to its hidden position behind the Operating and Display
Unit with Panel Controller, the PRS 0002 A Panel Rail Short
is intended for mounting of the following modules without
operating and display elements:
BCM-0000-B Battery Controller Module
IOS 0020 A and IOS 0232 A Communication Modules

The two modules on the short rail are supplied with voltage
(+5 V/GND) directly from the Panel Controller.
C
A
N
H
C
A
N
L
+
2
4
V
G
N
D
+
5
V
+
5
V
M
I
D
C
A
N
H
C
A
N
L
+
2
4
V
G
N
D
M
I
D
CANH
CANL
+24V
GND
+5V
MID
PRD 0004 A / PRS 0002 A
MPC
PRD 0004 A Panel Rail Long
The PRD 0004 A Panel Rail Long has four module slots.
The panel rails are supplied with voltage via the BCM-0000-
B Battery Controller Module and have an integrated DC/DC
voltage converter for the 5 V module operating voltage.
PRS 0002 A/
PRD 0004 A
RE
120W
C
A
N
H
C
A
N
L
+
2
4
V
G
N
D
+
5
V
M
I
D
C
A
N
H
C
A
N
L
+
2
4
V
G
N
D
M
I
D
CANH
CANL
+24V
GND
+5V
MID
A
Parts Included
Type Qty. Components
PRS 0002 A 1 Panel Rail Short, for 2 modules
PRD 0004 A 1
1
Panel Rail Long, for 4 modules
Data transmission cable
1
Modular Panel | Panel Rails FPA-5000 | 39
Electrical
Input voltage +5 V DC via MPC
+24 V DC via BCM-0000-B
Output voltage
PRS 0002 A +5 V DC via DC/DC converter

PRD 0004 A +5 V DC via BCM-0000-B

Mechanics
Material ABS plastic, Polylac PA-766 (UL94 V0)
Color Satin finish, anthracite, RAL 7016
Dimensions
PRS 0002 A Approx. 146 x 216 x 35 mm

(5.7 x 8.5 x 1.4 inches)
PRD 0004 A Approx. 146 x 396 x 35 mm

(5.7 x 15.6 x 1.4 inches)
Weight
PRS 0002 A Approx. 135 g (4.8 ounces)
PRD 0004 A Approx. 320 g (11.3 ounces)

ture
-5 C ... 50 C (23 F ... 122 F)
Permissible storage temperature -20 C ... 60 C (-4 F ... 140 F)
PRS 0002 A Panel Rail Short
for up to 2 modules
PRS 0002 A
PRD 0004 A Panel Rail Long
for up to 4 modules
PRD 0004 A
1
40 | Modular Panel | Panel Controller FPA-5000
Panel Controller
Features
Up to 32 Panel Controller or Remote Keypads can be
connected to a single network (from August 2009)
Ethernet interface for OPC connection
Ergonomic design
5.7touchscreen with 22 fixed keys for the standard
entries
11 LEDs for displaying the operating status of the
system
Simple user guidance thanks to easy menu structures
Large number of language variants and country-specific
designs
The Panel Controller is the central element of the system,
which shows all messages on the display. The complete
system is operated via a touch panel above the display. The
user-friendly user interface adapts to the various situations.
This allows correct operation that is simple, targeted and
intuitive.
The FSP-5000-RPS programming software enables
adaptation to country-specific circumstances.
System Overview
1 2 3 4
Pos. Description
1 Status LEDs
2 Key switch
3 LCD touch display
4 Membrane keys
Functions
Networking
Via CAN interfaces up to 32 Panel Controller and / or
Remote Keypads can be connected to a single network.
Depending on usage various panel controller and remote
keypads can be grouped or defined as network or a local
node. Within a group, conditions of panels can be shown
which also belong to the defined group. Independent of
groups from network nodes conditions of all panels can be
displayed and be edited. Local nodes display conditions of
the associated panel.
For networking via CAN1 and CAN2 interfaces the following
three connection topologies are possible:

Alarm indication
The indication element is a high-resolution LCD
touchscreen (320 x 240 px) with automatically activated
backlight. 11 LEDs provide continuous information about
the operating status of the control panel and / or system.
Additional LED annunciator modules, each containing 16
detection points, can be used to visually display alarms or
faults.
Operation / processing of messages
The operation of the panel controller and the processing of
all messages is done on the ergonomically-designed control
panel using the integrated LCD touchscreen. To that end,
there are permanently located keys on the right, bottom,
and upper edge of the display as well as variably located
virtual keys in the touch-screen area.
There is a key switch underneath the status LEDs; the key
switch has two programmable switch positions, e. g.:
For switching back and forth between day and night

operation
Local alarm ON / OFF (internal / external alarm)

1
Modular Panel | Panel Controller FPA-5000 | 41
Interfaces
To transmit the desired configuration to the panel
controller, an USB interface is available. Additionally, there
is an Ethernet interface to add for example the BIS software
to the local network.
Saving and printing messages
Messages and events are saved internally and can be viewed
on the display at any time. A log printer for printing
incoming messages can be connected.
Language variants
The language of the menu can be selected arbitrarily.
In accordance with EN 54 Part 2, panels with more than 512
LSN elements must be connected redundantly. To that end,
a second basic housing with a second Panel Controller is
used.
Cable Set CRP 0000 A is required for the redundant
connection.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 Panel Controller, user interface and labeling strips in the relevant
language, CD with FSP-5000-RPS programming software
Electrical
Operating voltage 20 V DC 30 V DC
Standby operation 120 mA @ 24 V DC
In the event of an alarm 205 mA @ 24 V DC

PRS 0002 A Power Supply
Operating voltage 5 V DC 4,5 %
Current consumption max. 500 mA

Max. cable length when networking 1000 m
depending on configuration, topology
and cable type
Mechanics
Display element 5,7LCD display
Operating element Touch screen
Permanent operating elements 22 keys
Permanent display elements 11 LEDs
Interfaces CAN1, CAN2, Ethernet, USB, RS232,
2 signal inputs
Dimensions (H x W x D) 190 mm x 404 mm x 60 mm
Active surface (H x W) 127,5 mm x 170 mm
Weight ca. 2 kg
Permissible operating temperature -5 C to 50 C
MPC-0000-B Panel Controller DE MPC-0000-B
MPC-2000-B Panel Controller ES MPC-2000-B
MPC-3000-B Panel Controller PL MPC 3000 B
MPC-4000-B Panel Controller DA MPC-4000-B
MPC-5000-B Panel Controller FR-NL MPC-5000-B
MPC-6000-B Panel Controller EL MPC-6000-B
MPC-7000-B Panel Controller RO-EN MPC-7000-B
MPC-8000-B Panel Controller RU MPC-8000-B
MPC-9000-B Panel Controller TR MPC-9000-B
MPC-1300-B Panel Controller EN MPC-1300-B
MPC-1400-B Panel Controller PT MPC-1400-B
MPC-1500-B Panel Controller CS MPC-1500-B
MPC-1600-B Panel Controller HU MPC-1600-B
MPC-1700-B Panel Controller IT-DE MPC-1700-B
Accessories
ADC 0064 A 64 Point Address Card ADC 0064 A
ADC-2048-A 2048 Point Address Card ADC-2048-A
ADC5000OPC License Key
enables reliable communication between the
BIS software and the fire panels FPA1200 or
FPA5000 or networks
ADC-5000-OPC
1
Address Cards
Features
Up to 64, 128, 512, 1024 or 2048 addresses on one card
Up to four cards in one control panel
A control panel can be equipped with up to four optional
Address Cards each containing 64, 128, 512, 1024 or 2048
addresses depending on requirements.
System Overview
When selecting the address cards, make sure that each

module, each supervised module input and each LSN
element is allocated to one detection point (one
address).
-
Example 1: The CZM 0004 A 4 Zone Conventional
Module is allocated to 4 detection points, one per
zone.
-
Example 2: The IOP 0008 A Input/Output Module is
allocated to up to 8 detection points, one for every
single supervised input.
Parts Included
Type Count Components
ADC 0064 A 1 SIM card with 64 addresses
ADC-2048-A 2048 Point Address Card ADC-2048-A
1
FMR-5000 Remote Keypad
Features
Identical user interface like panel controller
Convenient solution for remote operation of fire panel
Up to 32 Panel Controller or Remote Keypads in a
network of FPA5000 fire panels (by August 2009)
Surface and flush mounting possible
5.7touchscreen with 22 fixed keys for the standard
entries
11 LEDs for displaying the operating status of the
system
Simple user guidance thanks to easy menu structures
Large number of language variants and country-specific
designs
The FMR5000 Remote Keypad is a convenient solution for
the remote operation of the FPA1200 Fire Panel, the
FPA5000 Modular Fire Panel or a complete network. The
design of the user interface is identical with that of the
FPA1200 and FPA5000 Panel Controllers and therefore
enables an intuitive and quick operation.
In a network of FPA5000 fire panels, up to 32 Panel
Controllers and / or Remote Keypads can be connected.
The FPA1200 Fire Panel can be networked with up to three
FMR5000 Remote Keypads.
System Overview
Pos. Description
1 Status LEDs
2 Key switch
3 LCD touch display
4 Membrane keys
Functions
Networking
Via CAN interfaces up to 32 Panel Controllers and / or
Remote Keypads can be connected to a single FPA5000
network. Depending on usage various panel controller and
remote keypads can be grouped, defined as network or
local node. Within a group, conditions of panels can be
shown which also belong to the defined group.
Independent of groups, via network nodes conditions of all
panels can be displayed and be edited. Local nodes display
conditions of the associated panel.
For networking via CAN1 and CAN2 interfaces the following
three connection topologies are possible:

Alarm indication
The indication element is a high-resolution LCD
touchscreen (320 x 240 px) with automatically activated
backlight. 11 LEDs provide continuous information about
the operating status of the control panel and / or system.
Additional LED annunciator modules, each containing 16
detection points, can be used to visually display alarms or
faults.
1
Operation / processing of messages
all messages is done on the ergonomically-designed control
panel using the integrated LCD touchscreen. To that end,
there are permanently located keys on the right, bottom,
and upper edge of the display as well as variably located
virtual keys in the touch-screen area.
There is a key switch underneath the status LEDs; the key
switch has two programmable switch positions, e. g.:
Operation released / not released
For switching back and forth between day and night

operation
Interfaces
The USB interface enables the configuration of the
connected fire panel or the complete network.
Saving and printing messages
Messages and events are saved internally and can be viewed
on the display at any time. A log printer for printing
Language variants
The language of the menu can be selected arbitrarily.
Poland CNBOP 2663/2008 FMR-5000
Parts Included
Quant. Component
1 FMR-5000 Remote Keypad, user interface and labeling strips in
language of the country
1 Literature pack
Elektrical
Operating voltage 11 V DC to 30 V DC
Standby 130 mA @ 24 V DC
Alarm 225 mA @ 24 V DC
Max. resistance 18
Max. cable length when networking 1000 m
depending on configuration, topology
and cable type
Mechanical
Display element 5,7 LCD display
Fixed operating elements 22 keys
Fixed display elements 11 LEDs
Interfaces CAN1, CAN2, Ethernet, 100BaseTX,
USB, RS232
Dimensions (H x W x T) 280 mm x 340 mm x 87,2 mm
LCD display (H x W) 86 mm x 116 mm
Weight ca. 3 kg
Environmental
FMR-5000-00 Remote Keypad DE FMR-5000-00
FMR-5000-02 Remote Keypad ES FMR-5000-02
FMR-5000-03 Remote Keypad PL FMR-5000-03
FMR-5000-04 Remote Keypad DA FMR-5000-04
FMR-5000-05 Remote Keypad FR-NL FMR-5000-05
FMR-5000-06 Remote Keypad EL FMR-5000-06
FMR-5000-07 Remote Keypad RO-EN FMR-5000-07
FMR-5000-08 Remote Keypad RU FMR-5000-08
FMR-5000-09 Remote Keypad TR FMR-5000-09
FMR-5000-13 Remote Keypad EN FMR-5000-13
FMR-5000-14 Remote Keypad PT FMR-5000-14
FMR-5000-15 Remote Keypad CS FMR-5000-15
FMR-5000-16 Remote Keypad HU FMR-5000-16
FMR-5000-17 Remote Keypad IT-DE FMR-5000-17
1
ADC5000OPC License
Key
The ADC5000OPC License Key enables reliable
communication between the BIS software and the fire
panels FPA1200 or FPA5000 or networks.
For each OPC server only one license key is required. The
OPC server can monitor several fire panels or networks.
The OPC server software can be found on the
FSP5000RPS CD (2.0.49 and higher).
System Overview
Parts Included
Quant. Component
1 ADC5000OPC License Key
FPA5000 or networks
ADC-5000-OPC
1
46 | Modular Panel | Housings for Frame Installation FPA-5000
Housings for Frame Instal-
lation
Features
Surface-mount or installation in 19" racks
Modular system
Housings for Frame Installation are fitted in suitable
mounting frames and can be swiveled to the front for
installation and service. The mounting frames are screwed
to the wall surface and accommodate the pre-cabling.
As an alternative to the surface-mounted version,
installation in 19" racks with special installation kits is also
possible.
12 V/40 Ah batteries can be used in the frame installation
housing.
The modular system makes it easy to extend the facility.
Functions
Housing designs and combinations
Two Housings for Frame Installation are available as the
basic unit:
CPH 0006 A (for 6 modules) or
MPH 0010 A (for 10 modules)

These housings can accommodate an MPC operating and
display unit with panel controller.
Basic housings CPH 0006 A and MPH 0010 A can be
extended with the following equipment to meet individual
requirements:
EPH 0012 A Extension housing for an additional

12 modules, frame installation
Power supply housings PSF 0002 A or PMF 0004 for two

or four 12 V/40 Ah batteries respectively and an
additional power supply
USF 0000 A Universal housing small, frame installation.

Mounting frame
All mounting frames have integrated terminal blocks for the
mains supply, integrated junction boards, as well as
permanently-installed cable ducts to facilitate clear and tidy
cable routing.
Mounting frames are available in three sizes:
FBH 0000 A Mounting frame large
FMH 0000 A Mounting frame medium
FSH 0000 A Mounting frame small

The large mounting frame is also available in a design with
a distributor rail compliant with EN 500022 (not for use in
Germany):
FHS 0000 A Mounting frame large with distributor rail

The housings for frame installation require the following
mounting frames for surface-mounted version:
Housing type Mounting frame
CPH 0006 A FBH 0000 A/FHS 0000 A
MPH 0010 A FBH 0000 A/FHS 0000 A
EPH 0012 A FBH 0000 A/FHS 0000 A
PSF 0002 A FSH 0000 A
PMF 0004 A FMH 0000 A
USF 0000 A FSH 0000 A
Mounting plate
An HMP 0003 A Mounting plate can be mounted in large
mounting frames FBH 0000 A and FHS 0000 A; this
mounting plate can be individually equipped. The mounting
bore holes for the components must be drilled on-site by
the customer.
Equipment limits
Installation option and maximum number of:
Modules
Panel rails (short PRS 0002 A, long: PRD 0004 A)

Housing type Modules PRS 0002 A PRD 0004 A
CPH 0006 A 6 1 1
MPH 0010 A 10 1 2
EPH 0012 A 12 - 3
PSF 0002 A - - -
PMF 0004 A - - -
MPC operating and display unit with panel controller
UPS power supplies
Batteries
Housing type MPC UPS power sup-
plies
Batteries
CPH 0006 A 1 1 2 x 40 Ah
MPH 0010 A 1 - -
EPH 0012 A - - -
PSF 0002 A - 1 2 x 40 Ah
PMF 0004 A - 1 4 x 40 Ah
A power supply bracket for a UPS power supply is fitted ex-
works in housing units CPH 0006 A, PSF 0002 A and
PMF 0004 A.
1
Modular Panel | Housings for Frame Installation FPA-5000 | 47
The USF 0000 A comes with an HMP 0002 A Mounting plate
long and can be equipped according to individual
requirements.
Rack installation kit for 19" racks
There are special installation kits available for installation
in 19" racks or racks:
Housing type 19" Installation kit
CPH 0006 A FRB 0019 A
MPH 0010 A FRB 0019 A
EPH 0012 A FRB 0019 A
PSF 0002 A FRS 0019 A
PMF 0004 A FRM 0019 A
USF 0000 A FRS 0019 A
If 19" Rack Installation Kits are used, mounting frames are
not required.
Front doors
Alternatively, the housings can be equipped with
transparent front doors made from impact resistant plastic
with each door each having a lock on the left or right.
All mounting frames have an opening for cable bushings;

the opening is closed with an insert. Pre-formed cable
routes can be created from the insert.
At least 230 mm free space is required on the right next

to the last housing; this space is for swiveling out the
attached housing for connection, maintenance, and
service.
The Mounting Frame Large FBH 0000 A and Mounting

Frame Small FSH 0000 A are equipped with a earth bar
For the Mounting Frame Large FBH 0000 A the Earth Bar
FPO5000EB can be ordered as accessory if necessary.
Installation dimensions of CPH 0006 A, EPH 0012 A and
MPH 0010 A:
236
6
3
8 6
5
1
3
2
3
6
1
4
3
440 15,5
145 14 452,5 3 77
1
2
2
5
Installation dimensions of PMF 0002 A, PMF 0004 A and
FPP5000:
5
0
2
5
1
5
236
2
5
3
440 15,5
145 14 452,5 3 77
1
2
2
3
6
1
4
5
1
Installation dimensions of PSF 0002 A, USF 0000 A and
THP 2020 A:
5
0
2
2
8
0
3
440 15,5 236
1
2
2
5
145 14 452,5 3 77
2
3
6
1
4
5
Parts Included
CPH 0006 A 1
1
1
Housing, painted sheet steel
Power supply bracket
Cable set for battery connection
MPH 0010 A 1 Housing, painted sheet steel
EPH 0012 A 1 Housing, painted sheet steel
PSF 0002 A 1
1
1
PMF 0004 A 1
1
1
USF 0000 A 1
1
HMP 0002 A Mounting Plate Long
Mechanics
Housing material Sheet steel, painted
Housing color Slate gray, RAL 7015
Front: anthracite gray, RAL 7016
Dimensions
CPH 0006 A, MPH 0010 A and

EPH 0012 A
Approx. 638 x 440 x 236 mm
(approx. 25.1 x 17.2 x 9.3 in.)
PMF 0004 A Approx. 502 x 440 x 236 mm

(approx. 19.8 x 17.2 x 9.3 in.)
PSF 0002 A and USF 0000 A Approx. 267 x 440 x 236 mm

(approx. 10.5 x 17.2 x 9.3 in.)
Dimensions,
incl. mounting frame
CPH 0006 A, MPH 0010 A and

EPH 0012 A
Approx. 638 x 440 x 327 mm
(approx. 25.1 x 17.2 x 12.9 in.)
PMF 0004 A Approx. 502 x 440 x 327 mm

(approx. 19.8 x 17.2 x 12.9 in.)
PSF 0002 A and USF 0000 A Approx. 267 x 440 x 327 mm

(approx. 10.5 x 17.2 x 12.9 in.)
Weight
CPH 0006 A and MPH 0010 A Approx. 12.5 kg

(approx. 440 ounces)
EPH 0012 A Approx. 13.2 kg

PMF 0004 A Approx. 11.4 kg

PSF 0002 A and USF 0000 A Approx. 6.4 kg

CPH 0006 A Modular Panel Housing for
6 Modules, Frame Installation
CPH 0006 A
MPH 0010
EPH 0012 A Extension Housing for
EPH 0012 A
Installation
comes with mounting plate
USF 0000 A
Installation
PSF 0002 A
PMF 0004 A Power Supply Big, Frame
Installation
PMF 0004 A
Accessories
FBH 0000 A Mounting Frame Large FBH 0000 A
FMH 0000 A Mounting Frame Medium FMH 0000 A
FSH 0000 A Mounting Frame Small FSH 0000 A
Distributor Rail
as per EN 500022
FHS 0000 A
HMP 0003 A Mounting Plate for Mounting
Frame
HMP 0003 A
RLE 0000 A Junction Board EU
Comes with 2 DSUB connectors, 9pin
RLE 0000 A
FRB 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit, Large
Used for Modular Panel Housings, Frame In-
stallation, CPH 0006 A, MPH 0010 A and
EPH 0012 A
FRB 0019 A
FRM 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit,
Medium
Used for the PMF 0004 A Power Supply Medi-
um, Frame Installation
FRM 0019 A
FRS 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit, Small
Used for Frame Installation Housings
PSF 0002 A and USF 0000 A
FRS 0019 A
FDT 0000 A Front Door Transparent
Lock right side
FDT 0000 A
Lock left side
FDT 0003 A
FDP 0001 A
1
CPH 0006 A Modular Panel
Housing for 6 Modules,
Frame Installation
The CPH 0006 A can accommodate an MPC Operating and
Display Unit with Panel Controller, up to six modules, two
12 V/40 Ah batteries, and a Power Supply. The Power
Supply Bracket is fitted ex-works.
The modular configuration means easy extension.
System Overview
Netzteil
-
-
7
8
10
11
2
3
5
6
4
1
9
Pos. Description
1 Mounting frame
2 Housing
3 MPC Operating and Display Unit with Panel Controller
4 Modules 3-6
5 Space for 2 batteries
6 Front Door Transparent (optional)
7 Junction Board (optional)
8 Panel Rail for modules 1-2 (behind the MPC)
9 Panel Rail for modules 3-6
Pos. Description
10 Power Supply Bracket for 1 Power Supply
11 2 x 12 V/40 Ah batteries
The following are required for the CPH 0006 A Modular

Panel Housing, Frame Installation:
-
An FBH 0000 A Mounting Frame Large
or alternatively
-
An FRB 0019 A Rack Installation Kit for installation
in a 19" rack.
A Power Supply Bracket for a UPS Power Supply is

fitted ex-works.
Can be equipped with:

-
1 MPC Operating and Display Unit with Panel
Controller
-
1 PRS 0002 A Panel Rail Short, for 2 modules
-
1 PRD 0004 A Panel Rail Long, for 4 modules
-
1 UPS Power Supply
-
2 x 12 V/40 Ah batteries
Can be extended with:

-
FDT 0000 A Front Door Transparent, lock right side
-
FDT 0003 Front Door Transparent, lock left side
Parts Included
Pos. Description
1 Housing, painted sheet steel
1 Power Supply Bracket for 1 UPS Power Supply
1 Battery pole connection cable for frame installation housing
1 Supplementary package
CPH 0006 A Modular Panel Housing for
CPH 0006 A
1
MPH 0010 A Modular Panel
Frame Installation
The MPH 0010 A can accommodate an MPC Operating and
Display Unit with Panel Controller as well as up to
10 modules.
Batteries and Power Supplies must be installed in a
separate Power Supply housing.
System Overview
10
8
11
12
9
13
2
4
5
6
3
1
7
Pos. Description
1 Mounting Frame
2 Housing
3 MPC Operating and Display Unit with Panel Controller
4 Modules 3-6
5 Modules 7-10
6 Power Supply (in a separate housing)
Pos. Description
8 Junction Board (optional)
9 Modules 1-2 (behind the MPC)
(in a separate Power Supply housing)
The following are required for the MPH 0010 A Modular

Panel Housing, Frame Installation:
-
or alternatively
-
in a 19" rack.

-
Controller
-
-
2 PRD 0004 A Panel Rails Long, each for 4 modules

-
-
Parts Included
Pos. Description
1 Housing
MPH 0010
1
EPH 0012 A Extension
Frame Installation
System Overview
7
8
1
2
4
5
6
3
Pos. Description
1 Mounting Frame
2 Housing
3 Modules 1-4
4 Modules 5-8
5 Modules 9-12
The transparent front door is optional.
The following are required for the EPH 0012 A Extension

Housing, Frame Installation:
-
or alternatively
-
in a 19" rack.

-

-
-
FDT 0003 A Front Door Transparent, lock left side
Parts Included
Pos. Description
1 Housing
1 CAN bus connection cable, cable length 190 cm
EPH 0012 A Extension Housing for
EPH 0012 A
1
USF 0000 A Universal
Housing Small, Frame
Installation
The USF 0000 A Universal Housing Small, Frame Installation
has an HMP 0002 A Mounting Plate that is fitted ex-works;
the Mounting Plate can be equipped according to individual
requirements. The Mounting Plate does not have any
mounting bore holes.
The following are required for the USF 0000 A Universal

Housing Small, Frame Installation:
-
An FSH 0000 A Mounting Frame Small
or alternatively
-
An FRS 0019 A Rack Installation Kit for installation
in a 19" rack.
Parts Included
Pos. Description
1 Housing
1 HMP 0003 A Mounting Plate for Frame Installation
Installation
comes with mounting plate
USF 0000 A
PSF 0002 A Power Supply
Small, Frame Installation
System Overview
1
2
3
4
Pos. Description
1 Mounting Frame
2 Housing
3 Space for 2 x 12 V/40 Ah batteries and 1 UPS Power Supply
The following are required for the PSF 0002 A Power

Supply Small, Frame Installation:
-
An FSH 0000 A Mounting Frame Small
or alternatively
-
An FRS 0019 A Rack Installation Kit for installation
in a 19" rack.
Parts Included
Pos. Description
1 Housing
Installation
PSF 0002 A
1
PMF 0004 A Power Supply
Big, Frame Installation
System Overview
1
2
3
4
5
4
Pos. Description
1 Mounting Frame
2 Housing
3 Space for 4 x 12 V/40 Ah batteries and 1 UPS Power Supply
The following are required for the PMF 0004 A Power

Supply Small, Frame Installation:
-
An FMH 0000 A Mounting Frame Medium
or alternatively
-
An FRM 0019 A Rack Installation Kit for installation
in a 19" rack.
Parts Included
Pos. Description
1 Housing
1 Power Supply Bracket incl. cable set for 1 UPS
Power Supply
PMF 0004 A Power Supply Big, Frame
Installation
PMF 0004 A
1
54 | Modular Panel | Accessories - Frame Installation FPA-5000
FBH 0000 A Mounting
Frame Large
The large mounting frame is required for the frame
installation housings:
- CPH 0006 A
- MPH 0010 A
- EPH 0012 A
Parts Included
Pos. Description
1 Mounting Frame, Large
1 FPO-5000-EB Earth Bar
Mechanics
Material Plastic, ABS
Color Anthracite gray, RAL 7016
(approx. 25.1 x 17.7 x 3.4 in.)
FBH 0000 A Mounting Frame Large FBH 0000 A
FMH 0000 A Mounting
Frame Medium
The medium mounting frame is required for the PMF 0004 A
Power Supply Big, Frame Installation.
Mechanics
(approx. 19.8 x 17.7 x 3.4 in.)
FMH 0000 A Mounting Frame Medium FMH 0000 A
Accessories
FPO-5000-EB Earth Bar
For housing earth connection
FPO-5000-EB
1
Modular Panel | Accessories - Frame Installation FPA-5000 | 55
FSH 0000 A Mounting
Frame Small
The small mounting frame is required for the frame
installation housings:
- PSF 0002 A Power Supply, Frame Installation
- USF 0000 A Universal Housing Small, Frame Installation.
Mechanics
(approx. 10.5 x 17.7 x 3.4 in.)
FSH 0000 A Mounting Frame Small FSH 0000 A
FHS 0000 A Mounting
Frame Large with Distrib-
utor Rail
The large mounting frame is equipped with a distributor rail
in accordance with EN 500022 for attaching series
terminals.
The large mounting frame can be used as an alternative to
FBH 0000 A for the following frame installation housings:
- CPH 0006 A
- MPH 0010 A
- EPH 0012 A.
Parts Included
Pos. Description
1 Mounting Frame Large with Distributor Rail
1 FPO5000EB Earth Bar
Mechanics
(approx. 25.1 x 17.7 x 3.4 in.)
Distributor Rail
as per EN 500022
FHS 0000 A
1
RLE 0000 A Junction Board
EU
The RLE 0000 A Junction Board can be used for the
following applications:
Possibility for cable running
Possibility to disconnect cables for technical

measurements
Possibility to connect a laptop for parameter setting of

the system
The Junction Board can also be installed in the frame
installation housing to facilitate connection according to
country-specific conditions (e. g. based on British
standards).
RLE 0000 A Junction Board EU
RLE 0000 A
HMP 0003 A Mounting
Plate for Mounting Frame
The HMP 0003 A Mounting Plate can be mounted in large
mounting frames FBH 0000 A and FHS 0000 A; this
mounting plate can be individually equipped. The mounting
the customer.
Mechanics
Material Sheet steel
Dimensions Approx. 282 x 130 x 7.5 mm
(approx. 11.1 x 5.1 x 0.3 in.)
HMP 0003 A Mounting Plate for Mounting
Frame
HMP 0003 A
1
FRB 0019 A 19" Rack
Installation Kit, Large
FRB 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit, Large
Used for Modular Panel Housings, Frame In-
stallation, CPH 0006 A, MPH 0010 A and
EPH 0012 A
FRB 0019 A
FRM 0019 A 19" Rack
Installation Kit, Medium
FRM 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit,
Medium
Used for the PMF 0004 A Power Supply Medi-
um, Frame Installation
FRM 0019 A
1
FRS 0019 A 19" Rack Instal-
lation Kit, Small
FRS 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit, Small
Used for Frame Installation Housings
PSF 0002 A and USF 0000 A
FRS 0019 A
FDT 0000 A Front Door
Transparent
Mechanics
Material Polycarbonate
Color Transparent
(approx. 23.8 x 16.9 x 0.39 in.)
Lock right side
FDT 0000 A
1
Transparent
Mechanics
Color Transparent
(approx. 23.8 x 16.9 x 0.39 in.)
Lock left side
FDT 0003 A
1
60 | Modular Panel | Housings for Wall Mounting FPA-5000
Housings for Wall
Mounting
Features
Surface-mount, flush-mount or installation in 19" racks
Modular system
Wall-mount housings are available in various designs for all
conceivable applications. They can be installed as surface-
mounted or flush-mounted variants, with variable
installation depths up to wall-flush, as well as in 19" racks.
The modular system makes it easy to extend the facility.
Functions
Housing designs and combinations
Two wall-mount housings are available as the basic unit:
HCP 0006 A (for 6 modules) or
HBC 0010 A (for 10 modules)

These housings can accommodate an MPC Operating and
Display Unit with Panel Controller as the central element of
the control panel.
Basic housings HCP 0006 A and HBC 0010 A can be
extended with the following equipment to meet individual
requirements:
HBE 0012 A Modular Extension Housing for an

additional 12 modules, 2 x 12 V/28 Ah batteries
PSS 0002 A or PSB 0004 A Power Supply Housings for

additional power supplies and 12 V/28 Ah batteries
DIB 0000 A Distribution Box, Frame Installation.

Equipment limits
Modules
Panel rails (small: PRS 0002 A, large: PRD 0004 A)

HCP 0006 A 6 1 1
HBC 0010 A 10 1 2
HBE 0012 A 12 - 3
PSS 0002 A - - -
PSB 0004 A - - -
DIB 0000 A - - -
MPC Operating and Display Unit with Panel Controller
UPS Power Supplies
Batteries
Housing type MPC Power supplies Batteries
HCP 0006 A 1 1 2 x 28 Ah
HBC 0010 A 1 1 2 x 28 Ah
HBE 0012 A - 1 2 x 28 Ah
PSS 0002 A - 1 2 x 28 Ah
PSB 0004 A - 1 4 x 28 Ah
DIB 0000 A - - -
The DIB 0000 A Distribution Box, Frame Installation, is
equipped with a distributor rail and is used to install
terminal strips.
Installation types
Various types of installation are possible:
Surface-mounted
Flush-mounted with variable installation depths (up to

wall-flush)
Installation in 19" racks.

With surface-mounted installation, the housings are
mounted directly on the wall. All other types of installation
require special mounting kits.
The housings have pre-formed cable bushings.
Only the 12 V/28 Ah batteries can be integrated in the wall-
mount housing.
Installation in 19" racks.
Each wall-mount housing requires an FRK 0019 A
Installation kit.
Mounting plates
Mounting plates are available for wall-mount housings in the
following designs:
-
HMP 0001 A Mounting Plate Short
-
HMP 0002 A Mounting Plate Long
The plates can be equipped to meet individual
requirements.
The mounting bore holes for the components must be
drilled on-site by the customer.
Front doors
The housings can also be equipped with transparent front
doors. The housings are made from impact-resistant plastic
and are available in two sizes with each having a lock on the
left or right.
All housings have pre-formed cable bushings with the

three most common diameters (22 mm, 35 mm,
44 mm).
The openings are designed for metal pipes with fittings.

1
Modular Panel | Housings for Wall Mounting FPA-5000 | 61
The pre-formed openings for the cable route must be

created carefully.
In order to flush-mount the wall-mount housing, the

carrier sheet is first mounted in the recess. The housing
is screwed onto the carrier sheet. The sheet acts is a
cover for the rear of the housing and also forms part of
the corresponding installation kits.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 Housing, painted sheet steel
Mechanics
Dimensions
HCP 0006 A Approx. 638 x 440 x 149 mm

(approx. 25.1 x 17.2 x 5.87 in.)
HBC 0010 A and HBE 0012 A Approx. 840 x 440 x 149 mm

(approx. 33.1 x 17.2 x 5.87 in.)
PSB 0004 A Approx. 502 x 440 x 149 mm

(approx. 19.8 x 17.2 x 5.87 in.)
PSS 0002 A and DIB 0000 A Approx. 267 x 440 x 149 mm

(approx. 10.5 x 17.2 x 5.87 in.)
Weight
HCP 0006 A Approx. 12.5 kg

HBC 0010 A and HBE 0012 A Approx. 17 kg

PSB 0004 A Approx. 11.4 kg

PSS 0002 A and DIB 0000 A Approx. 6.4 kg

HCP 0006 A Modular Panel Housing for
6 Modules
HCP 0006 A
10 Modules
HBC 0010 A
12 Modules
HBE 0012 A
PSS 0002 A Power Supply Small PSS 0002 A
PSB 0004 A Power Supply PSB 0004 A
DIB 0000 A Distribution Box DIB 0000 A
Accessories
RLU 0000 A Junction Board
RLU 0000 A
HMP 0001 A Mounting Plate Short HMP 0001 A
HMP 0002 A Mounting Plate Long HMP 0002 A
FRK 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit
For wall-mount housing
FRK 0019 A
Lock right side
FDT 0000 A
Lock left side
FDT 0003 A
FDT 0001 A Large Front Door Transparent
Lock right side
FDT 0001 A
Lock left side
FDT 0002 A
1
HCP 0006 A Modular Panel
Housing for 6 Modules
The HCP 0006 A can accommodate an MPC Operating and
Display Unit with Panel Controller, up to six modules, as
well as batteries and Power Supplies.
System Overview
Netzteil
6
5
9
7
8
10
11
1
2
3
4
Pos. Description
1 Housing
2 MPC Operating and Display Unit
3 Modules 3-6
6 HPD 0000 A Power Distributor (optional)
7 Modules 1-2
10 Power Supply

-
Controller
-
-
1 PRD 0004 A Panel Rail Long, for 4 modules
-
HPD 0000 A Power Distributor
-
1 FPO5000PSBCH Power Supply Bracket for
panel housings
-

-
-
Parts Included
Pos. Description
1 Housing
HCP 0006 A Modular Panel Housing for
6 Modules
HCP 0006 A
1
HBC 0010 A Modular Panel
Housing for 10 Modules
The HBC 0010 A can accommodate an MPC Operating and
Display Unit with Panel Controller, up to ten modules, as
well as batteries and Power Supplies.
System Overview
to N AC 1 to N AC 3 to N AC 7 to N AC 9 to NAC 5
to N AC 2 to N AC 4 to N AC 8 to N AC 10 to NAC 6
from UPS 2 from UPS 3 from UPS 5 from UPS 6 from UPS 4
to BCM 1 to BCM 2
from Ba tt 1 B ( parallel)
from Batt 1 A
from Ba tt 3
10A
25A
25 A
10 A 10 A 10 A 10A
10
8
9
1
2
4
5
7
3
11
12
13
6
Pos. Description
1 Housing
2 MPC Operating and Display Unit
3 Modules 3-6
4 Modules 7-10
7 HPD 0000 A Power Distributor (optional)
8 Modules 1-2
Pos. Description
12 Power Supply

-
Controller
-
-
-
HPD 0000 A Power Distributor
-
Panel Housings
-

-
FDT 0001 A Large Front Door Transparent, lock right
side
-
FDT 0002 A Large Front Door Transparent, lock left
side
Parts Included
Pos. Description
1 Housing
10 Modules
HBC 0010 A
1
HBE 0012 A Modular Exten-
sion Housing for
12 Modules
The HBE 0012 A can accommodate up to 12 modules as well
as batteries and Power Supplies.
System Overview
8
9
7
1
2
4
5
6
3
11
10
Pos. Description
1 Housing
2 Modules 1-4
3 Modules 5-8
4 Modules 9-12
5 Space for 2 batteries or 1 Power Distributor
Pos. Description
10 Power Supply
11 2 x 12 V/28 Ah batteries or alternatively
1 Power Distributor

-
-
Panel Housings
-
2 x 12 V/28 Ah batteries or
alternatively 1 HPD 0000 A Power Distributor

-
FDT 0001 A Large Front Door Transparent, lock right
side
-
FDT 0002 A Large Front Door Transparent, lock left
side
Parts Included
Pos. Description
1 Housing
1 CAN bus connection cable, cable length 190 cm
12 Modules
HBE 0012 A
1
PSS 0002 A Power Supply
Small
The PSS 0002 A is a Power Supply housing that can be
flexibly equipped.
System Overview
1
2
Pos. Description
1 Housing
2 Housing without front panel
Equipment variants:
-
2 x 12 V/28 Ah batteries and 1 Power Supply
FPO5000PSB1 between the batteries
-
1 HMP 0002 A Mounting Plate Long for individual
equipping.
Note With the HMP 0002 A Mounting Plate, the
mounting bore holes for the components must
be drilled on-site by the customer.
Parts Included
Pos. Description
1 Housing
PSS 0002 A Power Supply Small PSS 0002 A
1
PSB 0004 A Power Supply
The PSB 0004 A Power Supply housing has enough space
for up to four 12 V/28 Ah batteries. Alternatively, a Power
Supply Bracket and a Power Distributor and/or a Power
Supply Bracket and a Mounting Plate can be installed
instead of the two upper batteries.
System Overview
1
2
Pos. Description
1 Housing
2 Housing without front panel
Equipment variants:
-
4 x 12 V/28 Ah batteries and 1 FPO5000PSB1
Power Supply Bracket
-
Power Supply Bracket
-
2 x 12 V/28 Ah batteries and
1 FPO5000PSB1Power Supply Bracket and
1 HPD 0000 A Power Distributor
-
Power Supply Bracket and 1 HMP 0001 A Mounting
Plate Short
Note With the HMP 0001 A Mounting Plate, the
mounting bore holes for the components must
be drilled on-site by the customer.
Parts Included
Pos. Description
1 Housing
PSB 0004 A Power Supply PSB 0004 A
1
DIB 0000 A Distribution
Box
The DIB 0000 A Distribution Box is equipped with a
distributor rail compliant with EN 500022 and is used to
install series terminals.
System Overview
Parts Included
Pos. Description
1 Housing with distributor rail installed compliant with EN 500022
DIB 0000 A Distribution Box DIB 0000 A
1
68 | Modular Panel | Accessories - Wall Mounting FPA-5000
RLU 0000 A
HMP 0001 A Mounting
Plate Short
The HMP 0001 A Mounting Plate Short can be installed in
the PSB 0004 A Power Supply Big and can be individually
equipped to meet requirements. The mounting bore holes
for the components must be drilled on-site by the customer.
Mechanics
(approx. 7.9 x 7.7 x 0.55 in.)
HMP 0001 A Mounting Plate Short HMP 0001 A
1
Modular Panel | Accessories - Wall Mounting FPA-5000 | 69
HMP 0002 A Mounting
Plate Long
The HMP 0002 A Mounting Plate Long can be installed in
the PSS 0002 A Power Supply housing and can be
individually equipped to meet requirements. The mounting
the customer.
Mechanics
approx. 15.5 x 8.4 x 0.55 in.)
HMP 0002 A Mounting Plate Long HMP 0002 A
FRK 0019 A 19" Rack
Installation Kit
FRK 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit
For wall-mount housing
FRK 0019 A
1
70 | Modular Panel | Accessories - Wall Mounting FPA-5000
Transparent
Mechanics
Color Transparent
(approx. 23.8 x 16.9 x 0.39 in.)
Lock right side
FDT 0000 A
FDT 0001 A Large Front
Door Transparent
Mechanics
Color Transparent
(approx. 31.8 x 16.9 x 0.39 in.)
Lock right side
FDT 0001 A
1
Modular Panel | Accessories - Wall Mounting FPA-5000 | 71
FDT 0002 A Large Front
Door Transparent
Mechanics
Color Transparent
(approx. 31.8 x 16.9 x 0.39 in.)
Lock left side
FDT 0002 A
Transparent
Mechanics
Color Transparent
(approx. 23.8 x 16.9 x 0.39 in.)
Lock left side
FDT 0003 A
1
72 | Modular Panel | Power Supplies FPA-5000
Power Supply Brackets
The Power Supply Brackets are installed in wall-mount
housings and accommodate one Power Supply. The Power
Supply Unit is immediately ready for operation via the pre-
wired plug connection.
The brackets are made of glass-fiber-reinforced plastic and
have a thermal sensor as well as a T10A mains fuse.
FPO-5000-PSB-CH Power Supply Bracket
For the Modular Panel Housings:

-
HCP 0006 A
-
HBC 0010 A
-
HBE 0012 A
FPO-5000-PSB1 Power Supply Bracket
For Power Supply Housing, wall mounting:

-
PSS 0002 A
-
PSB 0004 A
The Power Supply Bracket is mounted in the middle

right between a pair of batteries.
Overview
Housing FPO-5000-PSB-CH FPO-5000-PSB1
HCP 0006 A x -
HBC 0010 A x -
HBE 0012 A x -
PSS 0002 A - x
PSB 0004 A - x
x = Installation possible
- = Installation not possible
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 Power Supply Bracket
Mechanics
Material PA6 Plastic, Grilon BS V0 (UL94 V0)
Color Satin finish, anthracite, RAL 7016
Weight
FPO-5000-PSB-CH Approx. 550 g (19.4 ounces)
FPO-5000-PSB1 Approx. 395 g (13.9 ounces)

ture
-5 C ... 50 C (23 F ... 122 F)
Permissible storage temperature -20 C ... 60 C (-4 F...140 F)
FPO-5000-PSB1 Power Supply Bracket
for PSS 0002 A and PSB 0004 A
FPO-5000-PSB1
FPO-5000-PSB-CH Power Supply Bracket
for HCP 0006 A, HBC 0010 A and HBE 0012 A
FPO-5000-PSB-CH
1
Modular Panel | Power Supplies FPA-5000 | 73
UPS 2416 A Universal
Power Supply
The UPS Power Supply Unit is a plug-and-play power supply
for the entire power supply to the control panel.
System Overview
1 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LED
1-3 ACL/ACN/G Mains supply
4 / 5 DC+ / DC- 27 V DC output pos./neg.
6 FAULT Mains fault
7 / 8 RTH+ / RTH- Thermal sensor pos./neg.
Functions
The Power Supply is protected against pole reversal and
overvoltage.
The output voltage is monitored and regulated via the
thermal sensor. If there is a fault, the FAULT output drops
to 0 V.
A green LED on the Universal Power Supply indicates
operativeness.
The Power Supply Unit is inserted into a Power Supply

Bracket and is thus immediately ready for operation.
Parts Included
UPS 2416 A 1 Universal Power Supply 24 V/5 A
1
74 | Modular Panel | Power Supplies FPA-5000
Electrical
Input voltage 100 V AC ... 240 V AC
Input frequency range 50 Hz ... 60 Hz
Efficiency > 85 %
Back-up time > 16 ms bei 115 V AC
Output voltage 26 V DC ... 29 V DC (temperature-depend-
ant)
Nominal 26.8 V DC at 40C
Max. output current 6 A
Max. power 160 W (permanent)
Mechanics
Cooling Ventilation without ventilator
Housing material Aluminum, anodized
Housing color Matt black
(7.9 x 3.9 x 1.6 in.)
ture
-5 C ... 50 C (23 F ... 122 F)
ture
-20 C ... 60 C (-4 F ... 140F)
Permitted relative humidity 95 %, non-condensing
UPS 2416 A Universal Power Supply
plug-and-play power supply for the entire pow-
er supply to the control panel.
UPS 2416 A
Accessories
length 150 cm
CPB 0000 A
1
Modular Panel | Cable Sets FPA-5000 | 75
Cables
Functions
There are various types of cables and cable sets available
for connecting the central components:
Cable set Connection from ... ... to
CPR 0001 A MPC Panel Controller RLE 0000 A Junction
Board EU/RLU 0000 A
Junction Board US
CRP 0000 A MPC Panel Controller MPC Panel Controller
(redundant)
CBB 0000 A
1)
BCM-0000-B Battery Controller
Module
Battery pair
CPB 0000 A BCM-0000-B Battery controller
module
UPS Power Supply
CPP 0000 A HPD 0000 A Power Distributor UPS Power Supply
PDC 0000 A
1)
HPD 0000 A Power Distributor BCM-0000-B Battery
Controller Module and
battery pair
CPA 0000 A MPC Panel Controller /
ENO 0000 B Fire Service Inter-
face Module
AT 2000 Transmission
Unit
1) Required if the power supply is in a separate Power Supply
Housing
Cable sets CBB 0000 A and PDC 0000 A are required if the
power supply is located in a separate Power Supply
Housing. These sets have a longer connection cable to the
battery than the standard cable sets supplied with the unit.
Russia GOST POCC DE.C313B06299
CPR 0001 A Printer Cable
To connect the MPC Panel Controller - Junction
Board, cable length 100 cm
CPR 0001 A
CRP 0000 A Cable Set Redundant Panel
Controller
used to redundantly connect one Panel Con-
troller to an additional MPC Panel Controller
CRP 0000 A
Controller Module
CBB 0000 A
length 150 cm
CPB 0000 A
CPP 0000 A Cable HPD/UPS
Used to connect an HPD 0000 A Power Dis-
tributor to a UPS Power Supply, cable length
120 cm
CPP 0000 A
the ENO 0000 B.
CPA 0000 A
NMC 0000 A
1
76 | Modular Panel | Cable Sets FPA-5000
THP 2020 A Thermal
Printer
The THP 2020 A Thermal Printer comes in a frame
installation housing. It is connected to the S20 interface of
the IOS 0020 A Communication Module.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 Thermal Printer incl. connection cable
1 USF 0000 A Universal Housing Small, Frame Installation.
1 Connection cable for the printer interface module
Note The Thermal Printer requires either an
FSH 0000 A Mounting Frame Small (for
surface-mounted installation) or an FRS 0002 A
19" Rack Installation Kit, for Small Frame
Installation Housing (for installation in a
19" rack).
The CPR 0001 A Printer Cable is not necessary.
THP 2020 A Thermal Printer
comes standard with frame-mount housing.
Additionally required: FSH 0000 A Mounting
Frame Small (surface-mounting) or
FRS 0002 A 19" Rack Installation Kit Small.
THP 2020 A
Accessories
CPR 0001 A Printer Cable
To connect the MPC Panel Controller - Junction
Board, cable length 100 cm
CPR 0001 A
1
Modular Panel | Cable Sets FPA-5000 | 77
PSL 0001 A Labelling
Strips, Small
4.998.143.523
The PSL 0001 A Labelling Strips can only be used for the
ANI 0016 A Annunciator Module.
The strips can be printed individually with a customary laser
printer. A dot file is available on the CD that came with the
MPC Panel Controller.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
20 Each sheet has 10 strips, printable
PSL 0001 A
PSK 0001 A Labelling
Strips, Wide
4.998.143.521
The PSK 0001 A Labelling Strips for Modules are suitable in
the following functional modules:
BCM0000B, LSN 0300 A, LSN 1500 A, CZM 0004 A,
NZM0002 A, RMH 0002 A, CTM 0002 A and ENO 0000 B.
The strips can be printed individually with a customary laser
printer. A dot file is available on the CD that came with the
MPC Panel Controller.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
20 Each sheet has 6 strips, printable,
LSN 0300 A, LSN 1500 A, CZM 0004 A,
ENO 0000 B
PSK 0001 A
1
78 | Modular Panel | Cable Sets FPA-5000
FDP 0001 A Dummy Cover
Plate
The FDP 0001 A Dummy Cover Plate is used to cover
available module slots. It is placed in the corresponding
window in the front cover of the housing.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 FDP 0001 A Dummy Cover Plate
FDP 0001 A
1
Modular Panel | Accessories - FPA-5000 | 79
FSM2000 Fire Monitoring
System
Features
Easy installation and operation
Importing floor plans from AutoCAD
Zoom and pan
Automatic allocation of detection points in floor plan
Comprehensive event logging
Up to four panels with 2000 detection points at
maximum can be connected
Can be connected with FPA5000, FPA1200,
UEZ 2000 LSN, BZ 500 LSN
Available in German and English
The FSM-2000 Fire Monitoring System is a graphical user
interface for displaying and monitoring small to medium fire
alarm systems with up to 2000 detection points. It is
designed for four panels of the FPA5000, FPA1200,
UEZ 2000 LSN or BZ 500 LSN at maximum.
Functions
Installation and Operation
A wizard guides you through the installation as well as the
configuration in a few steps. Logically arranged graphics
and icons allow to capture events precisely and to initiate
appropriate measures.
Importing Floor Plans of AutoCAD
You can import floor plans of AutoCAD as dwf-file. The
software automatically allocates the detector list of the fire
panel to the floor plan.
Authorizations
You can set up as many operators as required and classify
them according to their tasks into one of the three
authorization groups: Operator, installer or administrator.
A maximum of two operators can be logged on to the system
at the same time.
Zoom and Pan
These two functions offer a comfortable navigation in the
floor plan. With the zoom function it is possible to increase
or minimize specific areas. With the pan function the floor
plan can be moved in any direction.
Event Logging
In the event log all procedures and actions are recorded.
You can generate statistics, make backups, print the event
log and search according to various criteria.
Connectivity
You can connect up to 2000 detection points and four
panels to the FSM-2000. It is working with the fire panels
FPA5000, FPA1200, UEZ 2000 LSN and BZ 500 LSN.
Hardware Preconditions:
USB port
CD-ROM
3.5 disk drive
4 COM ports
RAM 1024 MB (server), 512 MB (client)
Hard drive memory of 10 GB
Network card 100 Mbit

Software Preconditions:
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows 2003 Server

(German and English operating system)
Internet Explorer version 5.0 or 6.0
MSDE 2000
Microsoft IIS 5.0 (Windows 2000, Windows XP),

Microsoft IIS 6.0 (Windows 20003 Server)
Parts Included
Quant. Component
1 CD for Installation
1 USB-Dongle
1 Floppy-disk with the file Dongle.crp
1
80 | Modular Panel | Accessories - FPA-5000
FSM2000 Fire Monitoring System
Additionally order:
- Interface Converter OVS
- Connection Cable DSUB 9F-9M
- IOS 0020 A 20 mA Communication Module
(FPA5000/FPA1200) or SM 20 Interface
Module (UEZ 2000 LSN / BZ 500 LSN)
FSM-2000
Accessories
and S1
IOS 0020 A
Connection Cable DSUB 9F-9M DB EK 822 9F-9M
1
LSN Panels
2
Accessories - BZ 500 LSN 85
Accessories - UEZ 2000 LSN 98
82 | LSN Panels | FPA-1200 Fire Panel
FPA-1200 Fire Panel
Features
Easy upgrade to 2 loops by second LSN 0300 A module
Connection of up to 254 elements (127 per loop)
Remote operation by up to 3 Remote Keypads
Accommodates up to 6 functional modules for easy
adaptation to different local requirements
Auto-detection of modules
Plug-in of modules during operation
Serial interface to Bosch Voice Evacuation System
(EVAC)
Using the well-known LSN bus technology, the FPA-1200
Fire Panel offers efficient protection for small and medium-
sized objects and is the ideal solution for 1- and-2-loop
applications. It comes as standard with housing, controller,
functional modules, power supply and additional
accessories according to the country-specific
requirements. It is ready-to-go after installation and
configuration.
The configuration of the FPA-1200 is set using the
FSP-5000-RPS programming software (included in the
delivery) on a laptop connected to the panel.
An Ethernet interface allows for the connection to a
Building Management System (BIS Bosch Building
Integration System) via an OPC server.
Another serial interface provides the option to use the
FPA-1200 with the new Bosch Voice Evacuation System
(EVAC).
The FPA-1200 can also be connected to the Bosch
UGM-2020 Universal Security System (requires an
FPE-5000-UGM Interface Module), and thus, be integrated
into a large network system.
System Overview
N I
T U O
N I
T U O
# 0 *
8 9
5 6
2 3
7
4
1
?
PQRS TUV WXYZ
GHI JKI MNO
ABC DEF
F i r e
Test
City Tie
City Tie Fault
Ground Fault
Battery Fault
Power
Trouble
Signal Silence
Bypassed
Supervisory
NETZEIN
NETZSTROM Strung
BATTERIE1
Strung
BATTERIE2 Strung
FAULT MAIN +- BAT1 +- BAT2 +- BAT1 +- +- FAULT AC FAULT
AUX3 +- AUX4 +- AUX2 +- AUX1 +- AUX5 +- AUX6 +-
BCM0000A
LSN 0300 A
AU X 1 + - L S N 1 a -b +AU X 2 + - L S N 2 a -b +
B
C
G
F
E
D
A
A
Pos. Description
A Functional Modules
B Panel Controller
C Panel Housing
D Panel Rail Long
E Power Supply
F Power Supply Bracket
G Panel Rail Short
Functions
Panel controller
The Panel Controller is the core of the system and shows
all messages on the 5.7 touch display. 11 LEDs provide
continuous information about the operating status of the
control panel and / or system.
all messages are performed on the LCD touch display as
well. Messages and events are saved internally and can be
viewed on the display at any time. A log printer for printing
The configuration is set and transmitted using the
FSP-5000-RPS programming software on a laptop
connected to the USB interface of the panel controller.
Modules
The functional modules are autonomous, encapsulated
units that can be inserted into any control panel slot using
"plug-and-play" technology. Thus, the power supply and the
data traffic to the control panel are indicated automatically
without any additional settings. The module is automatically
identified by the control panel and is run in default
operating mode.
The wiring of peripherals is connected by pluggable screw
terminals.
2
LSN Panels | FPA-1200 Fire Panel | 83
After the replacement of a module, only the terminals need
to be reinserted; extensive rewiring is no longer required.
The following modules are included in the standard
package. Additional modules for special applications can be
ordered separately.
Module Description
BCM-0000-B Battery Controller Module
module that controls batteries and power sup-

ply
LSN 0300 A LSN Module 300 mA

elements, maximum line current 300 mA
RML 0008 A
(Poland only)
Relay Module
with 8 relays for low voltage applications

Europe CE FPA-1200
CPD 0786-CPD-20819 FPA 1200
Upgrade to 2 loops requires second LSN 0300 A

Functional Module
Max. 2 LSN 0300 A Modules allowed
Up to 127 LSN elements on each loop
Max. 6 functional modules in total

Parts Included
Quant. Component
1 FPA-1200-MPC Panel Controller
1 LSN 0300 A Module 300 mA
1 BCM 0000 B Battery Controller Module
1 PRS 0002 A Panel Rail Short
1 PRD 0004 A Panel Rail Long
1 FPO-5000-PSB-CH Power Supply Bracket
1 UPS 2416 A Universal Power Supply
1 HCP 0006 A Panel Housing
3 FDP 0001 A Dummy Cover Plate
1 RML 0008 A Relay Module (Poland only)
1 CD with FSP-5000-RPS Programming Software
Electrical
Mechanics
Display element 5.7LCD display
Interfaces
Ethernet
USB
RS232
Signal inputs 2
(25.1 x 17.2 x 5.87 inch)
Weight Approx. 20 kg (44 lb)
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, BE
lettering and user documentation in Dutch and
French
FPA-1200-BE
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, CZ
lettering and user documentation in Czech
FPA-1200-CZ
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, DE
lettering and user documentation in German
FPA-1200-DE
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, DK
lettering and user documentation in Danish
FPA-1200-DK
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, ES
lettering and user documentation in Spanish
FPA-1200-ES
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, GR
lettering and user documentation in Greek
FPA-1200-GR
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, HU
lettering and user documentation in Hungarian
FPA-1200-HU
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, IT
lettering and user documentation in Italian and
German
FPA-1200-IT
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, PL
lettering and user documentation in Polish
FPA-1200-PL
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, PT
lettering and user documentation in Portu-
guese
FPA-1200-PT
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, NL
lettering and user documentation in Dutch
FPA-1200-NL
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, RO
lettering and user documentation in Romanian
and English
FPA-1200-RO
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, RU
lettering and user documentation in Russian
FPA-1200-RU
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, TR
lettering and user documentation in Turkish
FPA-1200-TR
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, ZA
lettering and user documentation in English
FPA-1200-ZA
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, APR
FPA-1200-APR
FPA-1200 Fire Panel, Export
FPA-1200-Export
2
84 | LSN Panels | FPA-1200 Fire Panel
Accessories
BCM-0000-B
ANI 0016 A
LSN 0300 A
lines
CZM 0004 A
and S1
IOS 0020 A
IOS 0232 A
ENO 0000 B
outputs
IOP 0008 A
RML 0008 A
RMH 0002 A
Module
lines
NZM 0002 A
(UGM 2020, FAT 2002/RE, FSM2000)
FPE-5000-UGM
PSL 0001 A
LSN 0300 A, LSN 1500 A, CZM 0004 A,
ENO 0000 B
PSK 0001 A
stubs or T-taps
FLM-420-EOL2W-W
2-Wire
ventional lines
FLM-320-EOL2W
FPA5000 or networks
ADC-5000-OPC
THP 2020 A Thermal Printer
comes standard with frame-mount housing.
Additionally required: FSH 0000 A Mounting
Frame Small (surface-mounting) or
FRS 0002 A 19" Rack Installation Kit Small.
THP 2020 A
the ENO 0000 B.
CPA 0000 A
2
LSN Panels | Accessories - BZ 500 LSN | 85
ERWE 10 voltage converter
Generates +28 V at max. 600 mA for the LSN expansion
module control outputs.
Required for connecting the following expansion modules:
NBK 100 LSN
NTK 100 LSN
NSB 100 LSN

Can be plugged into the NEV 300 LSN connector board
ERWE 10 voltage converter
For connecting NBK 100 LSN, NTK 100 LSN,
NSB 100 LSN, MSS 401, ERT 100,
FK 100 LSN, can be plugged into the
NEV 300 LSN connector board
ERWE 10
2
86 | LSN Panels | Accessories - BZ 500 LSN
ERT100 Module for Loop
System Power Supply
Features
Low voltage sensor at 26.2 V (in accordance with
VdS 2110) for interruption free power supply of the
sounder MSS 401 LSN in case of activation
Connection of up to 25 signaling devices of the type
MSS 401 LSN per ERT loop, depending upon cable
length and cable diameter
Alarm signaling in accordance with sample guideline
for cable equipment (MLAR) without E30 cable
Connection of up to 25 isolators per ERT100 loop
Monitoring of two loops per ERT100 Module possible.
The ERT100 Module is designed for retrofitting the fire
panel with the loop system power supply.
Functions
The ERT100 Module monitors the supply voltage of
MSS 401 LSN signaling devices in loop lines, and in
combination with isolators (type YBOR/SCI) makes it
possible to maintain the power supply of the unaffected fire
sectors in the event of a short-circuit or wire interruption.
Two loop lines can be monitored per ERT100 Module.
Individual malfunctions are displayed with an LED per loop
on the ERT100 Module as well as in the form of clear text
on the fire panel. Once the short circuit has been rectified,
the elements automatically reestablish contact.
BMZ
1
2
Pos. Description
1 Fire sector
2 Isolator
Isolators are configured in such a way that the fire sectors
or, insofar as these are smaller, alarm sectors are confined.
This configuration means that in the event of a short circuit,
all elements are kept supplied with voltage before and after
the separating isolators. No isolator is used between fire
panel and the first or last signaling device. This means that
n isolators are required for n fire sectors.
Pos. Description
1 Range in [m]
2 Number of detector base sounders MSS 401 LSN
A wire gauge of 0.8 mm corresponds to a wire diameter of 0.5 mm
2
.
The range is dependent upon the wire gauge and the
number of sounders MSS 401 LSN.
Europe CE ERT 100
If multi-core cable is used, the additional detector base

MSC 420 may be necessary.
2
BZ 500 LSN:
For each ERT loop, a fuse of 630 mA (slow-burn) is

necessary. It is recommended that a fuse distributor
SIV 28 V (article no. F.01U.500.442) be used.
The BZ 500 LSN can supply a ERT loop with voltage. In

the case of two ERT loops or more, a supplementary
power supply is required.
UEZ 2000 LSN:

necessary. With more than four ERT loops, a fuse
distributor SIV 28 V (item no. F.01U.500.442) must be
used.
The UEZ 2000 B can supply three ERT loops with

voltage. In the case of four ERT loops or more, a
supplementary power supply is required.
Electrical
Input voltage +28 V DC
Max. output voltage +28 V DC
Current consumption in standby mode 20 mA
Current cut-off outputs < 600 mA
Voltage control 26.2 V
Transmission line malfunction output Open collector, 100 mA
Transmission line reset input Internal pull-up, switch after 0 V
Mechanics
Dimensions 56 x 95 mm
Protection class as per EN 60529 IP 30
Permissible operating temperature -5 C . . . + 45 C
Permissible storage temperature -25 C . . . + 70 C
Further characteristics
Malfunction detection/display in ac-
cordance with EN 542
< 100 s
ERT100 Module for Loop System Power
Supply
Module for retrofitting the fire panel with the
loop system power supply
BS ERT 100
2
Isolator Type YBOR/SCI
Features
Positive isolator, recognizes wire interruption and
short circuit
Unattended
Isolation displayed through status LED on isolator
The isolators type YBOR/SCI are used in combination with
an ERT100 Module for the loop system power supply, and
enable the power supply to be maintained to the unaffected
fire sectors in the event of a short circuit or wire
interruption in loops.
Functions
the separating isolators.
During isolation, the LED on the isolator is illuminated.
Once the short circuit has been rectified, the elements
return automatically to normal operating condition and
restore the connection.
No isolator is used between fire panel and the first or last
signaling device. This means that n isolators are required
for n fire sectors.
Complies with EN 5417:2005
Europe CPD 0832-CPD-0963 YBO-R/SCI
Germany VdS G 204049 YBO-R/SCI
Operating voltage 17 - 41 V DC
Current consumption in standby
mode
50 A
Current consumption in the event of
short circuit
< 10 mA
Max. current consumption in the
event of short circuit
1 A
Max. wire diameter
2.5 mm
2
( 1.8 mm)
Permitted operating temperature -10 C . . . + 50 C
Permitted rel. humidity 95% (without condensation)
Housing Surface-mount, ivory colored
Dimensions (including cover) 100 mm, 13 mm high
Weight 85 g
Positive isolator, recognizes wire interruption
and short circuit
ERT-Isolator
2
SIV 28 Fuse Distributor
28 V
For monitored fusing of units connected to BZ 500 LSN /
UEZ 2000 LSN, max. 5 fuses.
SIV 28 Fuse Distributor 28 V
Fusing for units connected to BZ 500 LSN /
UEZ 2000 LSN, max. 5 fuses
SIV 28
ERLE 10 Line Extension
The kit extends the BZ 500 LSN by one zone (loop) with
max. 1000 m cable length.
ERLE 10 Line Extension
for the BZ 500 LSN, zone (loop) with max.
1000 m cable length
ERLE 10
2
ERSE 10 Interface Exten-
sion
The kit extends the BZ 500 LSN by two serial interfaces.
Configuration of extensions on the reverse side of the
operating panel
ATE 100 LSN
ERLE 10
ERSE 10
ZALE 10
ERSE 10 Interface Extension
(2 x serial)
ERSE 10
SM 20 Interface Module
20 mA interface
Maximum range of 1000 m

The SM 20 is required for connection of DR 500 T/AV,
BE 500, UGM 2020 or RUBIN.
The ANNE 10 has three slots for the SM 20 or SM 24.
The UEZ 2000 LSN can be extended with up to five SM 20s.
For connecting DR 500 T/AV, BE 500,
UGM 2020 or RUBIN
SM 20
2
V24 interface for control panel networking in SRT network
in combination with fiber optic cable (LWL), connection of
peripheral equipment or a modem.
V24 interface for control panel networking in
SRT network, for connecting peripheral equip-
ment or a modem
SM 24
BS ATE 100 LSN Primary
Extension Kit, Red
Kit with 32 red LEDs for primary expansion of a foreign-
language BZ 500 LSN (or the German-language BZ 500 LSN
without alarm display, item no. 3.002.102.560) for the
alarm display (alarm indication) of up to 32 detector zones.
Europe CE BS ATE / ATG / ATB 100 LSN
BS ATE 100 LSN Primary Extension Kit, Red
with 32 red LEDs for primary expansion of a
foreign-language BZ 500 LSN
BS ATE 100 LSN
2
ATE 100 LSN red Extension
Kit, Red
Kit with 32 red LEDs for extension of an existing alarm
display (alarm indication).
This means the alarm indication can comprise a total of
64 detector zones.
ATE 100 LSN red Extension Kit, Red
with 32 LEDs (red) for extension of an available
alarm display
ATE 100 LSN red
ATE 100 LSN ye Extension
Kit, Yellow
Kit with 32 yellow LEDs for extension of an existing alarm
display (alarm indication).
The kit enables faults in up to 32 detector groups to be
indicated.
Configuration of extensions
ZALE 10
ATE 100
1
3 2
Pos. Description
1 Mounting plate for the operating panel
2 Plastic membrane keypad
3 Membrane for the parallel display
ATE 100 LSN ye Extension Kit, Yellow
with 32 LEDs (yellow) for extension of an ex-
isting alarm display
ATE 100 LSN ye
2
Key Switch
Up to two key switches can be deployed on the operating
panel of the fire panel.
The function is freely programmable, e. g. day/night
operation.
Key Switch
for the BZ 500 LSN operating panel
BZ500-KEY-
SWITCH
TRN Panel Relay Module
Panel Relay Module TRN with two relays, each relay with a
double-throw contact for potential-free outputs.
The AVM 100 can be extended with up to six TRNs.
two relays, each relay with a double-throw con-
tact for potential-free outputs
TRN
2
RTP Panel Relay Module
Panel Relay Module RTP with four relays, each relay with a
double-throw contact for potential-free outputs, up to six
RTPs can be plugged into AVM.
four relays, each relay with a double-throw
contact for potential -free outputs
RTP
BS NRKN Network Relay
Card
Two relays for potential-free outputs, each relay with a
double-throw contact 220 V AC
BS NRKN Network Relay Card
two relays for potential-free outputs, each re-
lay with a double-throw contact 220 V AC
BS NRK-N
2
MOD 300 Modem
For connecting control panels to the UGM 2020, modem
incl. serial interface for data transmission in telephone
networks.
The modem is approved for operation in post office
networks. For this purpose an interface module SM 24 is
required.
MOD 300 Modem
for connecting control panels to the
UGM 2020, incl. serial interface for data trans-
mission in telephone networks
MOD 300
Options Plate
Essential requirements for the installation of an AT 2000!
If all mounting plates on the ANNE 10 are occupied, the
following extensions can be used with the Options Plate:
-
ICPBSTRSP
-
BS NRK-N
-
MOD 300
-
BS NTK 100/BZ500, to realize switching addresses
in the BZ 500 LSN
-
BS NSB 100/BZ500, for monitored activation of
signaling devices or extinguishing systems from the
fire panel
-
BS NBK 100/BZ500, each for connecting two GLT
primary lines
-
ICPLSA20 Connection Strip
Up to four interface kits are deployable.
2
Configuration of extensions on option plate
MOD 300
NTK 100 NSB 100
MOD 300
NTK 100
NRK-N
TRSP
AT 2000
NRK-N
L
S
A
-
P
l
u
s

2
0

D
A

L
S
A
-
P
l
u
s

2
0

D
A

Options Plate
required for the installation of an AT 2000
BZ-500-PLATE
Mounting Kit 19" for
BZ 500 LSN
For installing the BZ 500 LSN in a 19" frame
The Mounting Kit 19 requires 13 height units = 578 mm.
Mounting Kit 19" for BZ 500 LSN BZ-500-19"-KIT
2
DR 500 T/AV Tabletop
Printer
Thermal paper printer with roll-up equipment, can be used
as tabletop model or for wall mounting
An interface module SM 20 is required for connection to the
BZ 500 LSN.
Europe CE DR 2020 / 2000 / 500 T
DR 500 T/AV Tabletop Printer
Thermal paper printer with roll-up equipment,
for BZ 500 LSN, interface module SM 20 is
required
DR 500 T/AV
Service Switch for Extin-
guishing Systems
Key switch for deactivating extinguishing systems for
maintenance purposes
Service Switch for Extinguishing Systems
for deactivating extinguishing systems for
maintenance purposes
FME-KL-EXT
2
98 | LSN Panels | Accessories - UEZ 2000 LSN
LVM 100 Line Extension
Module
For additional connection of up to 4 loop or 8 stub lines
UEZ 2000 LSN: Can be expanded with 1 LVM
UEZ 2000/6 LSN: Can be expanded with 1 LVM
UEZ 2000/1 LSN: Cannot be expanded.
LVM 100 Line Extension Module
Additional connection of max. 4 loop or 8 stub
lines, UEZ 2000 LSN and UEZ 2000/6 LSN can
be expanded with 1 LVM
LVM 100
2
LSN Panels | Accessories - UEZ 2000 LSN | 99
ERT100 Module for Loop
System Power Supply
Features
Low voltage sensor at 26.2 V (in accordance with
VdS 2110) for interruption free power supply of the
sounder MSS 401 LSN in case of activation
Connection of up to 25 signaling devices of the type
MSS 401 LSN per ERT loop, depending upon cable
length and cable diameter
Alarm signaling in accordance with sample guideline
for cable equipment (MLAR) without E30 cable
Connection of up to 25 isolators per ERT100 loop
Monitoring of two loops per ERT100 Module possible.
The ERT100 Module is designed for retrofitting the fire
panel with the loop system power supply.
Functions
The ERT100 Module monitors the supply voltage of
MSS 401 LSN signaling devices in loop lines, and in
combination with isolators (type YBOR/SCI) makes it
possible to maintain the power supply of the unaffected fire
sectors in the event of a short-circuit or wire interruption.
Two loop lines can be monitored per ERT100 Module.
Individual malfunctions are displayed with an LED per loop
on the ERT100 Module as well as in the form of clear text
on the fire panel. Once the short circuit has been rectified,
the elements automatically reestablish contact.
BMZ
1
2
Pos. Description
1 Fire sector
2 Isolator
the separating isolators. No isolator is used between fire
panel and the first or last signaling device. This means that
n isolators are required for n fire sectors.
Pos. Description
1 Range in [m]
2 Number of detector base sounders MSS 401 LSN
A wire gauge of 0.8 mm corresponds to a wire diameter of 0.5 mm
2
.
The range is dependent upon the wire gauge and the
number of sounders MSS 401 LSN.
Europe CE ERT 100
If multi-core cable is used, the additional detector base

MSC 420 may be necessary.
2
BZ 500 LSN:

necessary. It is recommended that a fuse distributor
SIV 28 V (article no. F.01U.500.442) be used.
The BZ 500 LSN can supply a ERT loop with voltage. In

the case of two ERT loops or more, a supplementary
power supply is required.
UEZ 2000 LSN:

necessary. With more than four ERT loops, a fuse
distributor SIV 28 V (item no. F.01U.500.442) must be
used.
The UEZ 2000 B can supply three ERT loops with

voltage. In the case of four ERT loops or more, a
supplementary power supply is required.
Electrical
Input voltage +28 V DC
Max. output voltage +28 V DC
Current consumption in standby mode 20 mA
Current cut-off outputs < 600 mA
Voltage control 26.2 V
Transmission line malfunction output Open collector, 100 mA
Transmission line reset input Internal pull-up, switch after 0 V
Mechanics
Permissible operating temperature -5 C . . . + 45 C
Permissible storage temperature -25 C . . . + 70 C
Malfunction detection/display in ac-
cordance with EN 542
< 100 s
ERT100 Module for Loop System Power
Supply
Module for retrofitting the fire panel with the
loop system power supply
BS ERT 100
20 mA interface
Maximum range of 1000 m

The SM 20 is required for connection of DR 500 T/AV,
BE 500, UGM 2020 or RUBIN.
The ANNE 10 has three slots for the SM 20 or SM 24.
The UEZ 2000 LSN can be extended with up to five SM 20s.
For connecting DR 500 T/AV, BE 500,
UGM 2020 or RUBIN
SM 20
2
V24 interface for control panel networking in SRT network
in combination with fiber optic cable (LWL), connection of
peripheral equipment or a modem.
V24 interface for control panel networking in
SRT network, for connecting peripheral equip-
ment or a modem
SM 24
MOD 300 Modem
For connecting control panels to the UGM 2020, modem
incl. serial interface for data transmission in telephone
networks.
The modem is approved for operation in post office
networks. For this purpose an interface module SM 24 is
required.
MOD 300 Modem
for connecting control panels to the
UGM 2020, incl. serial interface for data trans-
mission in telephone networks
MOD 300
2
Panel Relay Module TRN with two relays, each relay with a
double-throw contact for potential-free outputs.
The AVM 100 can be extended with up to six TRNs.
two relays, each relay with a double-throw con-
tact for potential-free outputs
TRN
Panel Relay Module RTP with four relays, each relay with a
double-throw contact for potential-free outputs, up to six
RTPs can be plugged into AVM.
four relays, each relay with a double-throw
contact for potential -free outputs
RTP
2
Features
Positive isolator, recognizes wire interruption and
short circuit
Unattended
Isolation displayed through status LED on isolator
The isolators type YBOR/SCI are used in combination with
an ERT100 Module for the loop system power supply, and
enable the power supply to be maintained to the unaffected
fire sectors in the event of a short circuit or wire
interruption in loops.
Functions
the separating isolators.
During isolation, the LED on the isolator is illuminated.
Once the short circuit has been rectified, the elements
return automatically to normal operating condition and
restore the connection.
No isolator is used between fire panel and the first or last
signaling device. This means that n isolators are required
for n fire sectors.
Complies with EN 5417:2005
Europe CPD 0832-CPD-0963 YBO-R/SCI
Germany VdS G 204049 YBO-R/SCI
Operating voltage 17 - 41 V DC
Current consumption in standby
mode
50 A
Current consumption in the event of
short circuit
< 10 mA
Max. current consumption in the
event of short circuit
1 A
Max. wire diameter
2.5 mm
2
( 1.8 mm)
Permitted operating temperature -10 C . . . + 50 C
Permitted rel. humidity 95% (without condensation)
Housing Surface-mount, ivory colored
Dimensions (including cover) 100 mm, 13 mm high
Weight 85 g
Positive isolator, recognizes wire interruption
and short circuit
ERT-Isolator
2
SIV 28 Fuse Distributor
28 V
For monitored fusing of units connected to BZ 500 LSN /
UEZ 2000 LSN, max. 5 fuses.
SIV 28 Fuse Distributor 28 V
Fusing for units connected to BZ 500 LSN /
UEZ 2000 LSN, max. 5 fuses
SIV 28
2
DR 2020 T/AV Log Printer
with Roll-up Equipment
For installation in the display carrier
Note The Log Printer must already be taken into
account when ordering. Installation of the
printer can only occur in the factory,
subsequent installation on location not
possible.
Europe CE DR 2020 / 2000 / 500 T
Electrical
Operating voltage 10.5 V DC . . . 29 V DC
Current consumption 600 mA at 12 V
Power supply From the control panel
Fuse T1A
Mechanics
Dimensions (H x W x D) 130 x 160 x 230 mm
Color Anthracite, RAL 7016
Weight Approx. 2 kg
ture
0 C. . . 50 C
Permitted relative humidity 93 %, at + 40C
Classes of equipment as per
EN 60950
Class II equipment
EN 60529
IP 30
Contamination level 2 (as per EN 60950)
Environmental class as per
VdS 2110
II
Special features
Construction type Thermal printer
Printout Alphanumeric
Character height 2.7 mm 0.2 mm
Number of lines per printout Max. 3 lines, of these
1 line standard output
2 lines additional information

Number of characters / lines Max. 40 characters
Print speed At least 5 lines/sec
Paper type Thermoprint paper rolls
Paper width 58 mm +0/-1 mm
Interface Parallel
Baud rate 2400 bit/sec, 9600 bit/sec (standard)
Data format 8 bits, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit, no parity bit,
ASCII characters
Monitoring
Paper end (signaling of at least

500 print lines before the end)
Cover tamper contact

EMC interference immunity EN 50130-4
EMC emitted interference EN 61000-6-3
DR 2020 T/AV Log Printer with Roll-up
Equipment
Installation of the printer can only occur in the
factory, subsequent installation on location
not possible
DR 2020 T/AV
2
DR 2020 T Log Printer
without Roll-up Equipment
Like product ID 4.998.105.681, however without roll-up
equipment.
Europe CE DR 2020 / 2000 / 500 T
See model with roll-up equipment
DR 2020 T Log Printer without Roll-up
Equipment
like product ID 4.998.105.681, however
without roll-up equipment
DR 2020 T
2
Conventional Panels
3
108 | Conventional Panels | Conventional Panels
FP Conventional Fire
Panels
Features
Simple operation with clearly-structured operating
panel and membrane keypad
For two, four or six detector groups, each connecting
up to 30 detectors.
Alarm and fault display by multicolour LEDs,
customized for each detector group
Internal buzzer for acoustic alarm and fault display
Separate function control for fire panel and for each
individual detector zone
Robust sheet steel housing
The FP Conventional Fire Panel, using trusted DC line
techniques, is the ideal solution for small and medium-sized
objects when modern bus technology can be done without.
System Overview
M1 M2 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
M9 M10
BZ1
Fuse 1/ F/ 1A
Fuse 2/ F/ 2A
3
3
V
C
A
3
3
V
C
A
ALARM AV=FAULT ZONE6 ZONE5 ZONE4 ZONE3 ZONE1 L6 / EX ZONE5 ZONE4 ZONE3 ZONE1 24 V VALV SIR INI ZONE2 ZONE2 PREAL
+ - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - AV AL AV AL AV AL AV AL AV AL AVAL NANC C NANC C NANCC
B+ B- B/2
Anlage Summer
Revision
Alarm
Voralarm
Strung
abgeschaltet
Revision
Codebetrieb
Betrieb
Strung
Netz/Batterie
Systemstrung
Alarm
Strung
Abgeschaltet
Revision
Revision -1
Abschalten
1 2 3 4 5 6
Betriebsart
Signalgeber
Melder-
gruppe
N PH
Fuse 0.315 3 4
1
2
5
7
8
6
Meldergruppe
Melder-
gruppe
Melder-
gruppe
Melder-
gruppe
Melder-
gruppe
Melder-
gruppe
Anlage
rcksetzen abschalten abschalten Ein / Aus
Alarm
Strung
Abgeschaltet
Revision
Revision -2
Abschalten
Alarm
Strung
Abgeschaltet
Revision
Revision -3
Abschalten
Alarm
Strung
Abgeschaltet
Revision
Revision -4
Abschalten
Alarm
Strung
Abgeschaltet
Revision
Revision
Abschalten
Alarm
Strung
Abgeschaltet
Revision
Revision
Abschalten
Pos. Designation
1 Fuses F1 and F2
2 Terminal blocks M9 and M10 for mains and battery power.
3 Mains connection clamp block
4 Fuse F3
5 Operating panel (in corresponding national language)
6 Control panel housing
7 Internal buzzer
8 Clamp blocks M1 - 8 for detector and sensor lines
Functions
The fire panels FP 102/104/106PA have a pre alarm
function, and can be made dependent on the activation of
two detectors.
The fire panels FP 102/104/1062SO have an English
operating panel (country-specific customization possible),
a second sensor lead, although no pre alarm.
In the case of versions with pre alarms (PA control panels),
three delay times can be selected: 30, 60 or 120 s.
In the event of an alarm being triggered, a controllable
signaling device (siren) can be switched on or off at any
time. The sounder can also be activated if the fire panel is
not in alarm status.
Reset of the fire panel after a fault is automatically carried
out once the reason for the fault has been dealt with.
Operating levels
The fire panels have three different operating levels:
Access to level 0 is possible without code entry. Four-digit
access codes are required to access operating level 1 and 2.
The access codes are set at the works and cannot be
amended.
A test of various functions can be carried out at each
operating level.
The level 0 test checks the functioning of the LEDs and

the buzzer.
3
Conventional Panels | Conventional Panels | 109
The test at level 1 puts all detector zones

simultaneously into revision operation, whereby the fire
panel must be reset following the triggering of a
detector.
The level 2 test allows certain detector groups to be

selected for testing, the other groups remaining in
normal mode.
Programming
The PA fire panels can be used to program each individual
detector zone either for one-detector or for two-detector
dependency. Independent of the programming of the
individual detector zones, all detector zones can be
switched simultaneously to single detector dependency.
The switching does not affect the respective programming
of the individual detector zones.
Europe CE FP 102-PA
FP 104-PA
FP 106-PA
FP 102-2SO
FP 104-2SO
FP 106-2SO
The fire panel must be mounted in a dry, maintained

interior room, environmental conditions (see Technical
Data) being taken into account.
Attach the fire panels to the wall in such a way that the
operating panel is at eye level.
To enable the front door to be removed, at least 50 mm

of free space must be left on the left-hand side of the
control panel.
For optimum battery life, the fire panel should only be

operated in locations having normal room
temperatures.
The appropriate requirements stipulated by the local

authorities (e. g. fire service) are to be conformed to.
Special features
Number of detector zones
FP 102-PA / FP 102-2SO 2
FP 104-PA / FP 104-2SO 4
FP 106-PA / FP 106-2SO 6
Connectable detectors Max. 30 per detector zone
Electrical
Power supply voltage 230 V AC +/- 10%
Power supply current 300 mA
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Power supply output voltage 28V DC
Power supply output current Max. 1,800 mA
Current consumption in stand-by mode
FP 102-PA / FP 102-2SO 100 mA
FP 104-PA / FP 104-2SO 120 mA
FP 106-PA / FP 106-2SO 140 mA

Current consumption in alarm mode
FP 102-PA / FP 102-2SO 1,400 mA
FP 104-PA / FP 104-2SO 1,600 mA
FP 106-PA / FP 106-2SO 1,800 mA

Fuses
Power supply T 315 mA
Battery power supply F 2 A
Primary line output F 1 A

Battery power supply
Battery type and amount Gel-accumulator, 2 units (con-
nected in series)
Battery capacity 12 V / 7.2 Ah
Battery charge voltage 27.4 V DC
Battery charge current 500 mA
Back-up time
FP 102-PA / FP 102-2SO Max. 70 h in stand-by mode

Max. 4 h in event of alarm


Primary line features
Stand-by voltage
Zones 20 V DC (+5% / -10%)
Signaling device lines 24 V DC (5%)

Current consumption
In standby mode Approx. 5 mA (1%)
In alarm mode Approx. 102 mA (1%)

Terminator resistance R
E
(when con-
nected to Bosch detectors)
3.92 k W
Maximum line resistance 100 (per primary line)
Mechanics
Dimensions (W x H x D) 350 x 340 x 90 mm
Weight
Without batteries 3.5 kg
With 2 batteries (12V/7.2Ah) 7.9 kg

Housing color Light-gray, RAL 9002
3
110 | Conventional Panels | Conventional Panels
Environmental Considerations
Classes of equipment as per EN 60950 Class II equipment
Permissible operating temperature 0 C . . . +40 C
Permissible storage temperature -40 C . . . +70 C
FP 102PA Conventional Fire Panel
For two detector zones, up to 60 detectors,
with pre-alarm, two-detector dependency pos-
sible
FP-102-PA
For four detector zones, up to 120 detectors,
with pre-alarm, two detector dependency pos-
sible
FP 104-PA
for six detector zones, up to 180 detectors,
with pre-alarm, two detector dependency pos-
sible
FP 106-PA
FP 1022SO Conventional Fire Panel
for two detector zones, up to 60 detectors,
without pre-alarm, two signaling device out-
puts
FP 102-2SO
for four detector zones, up to 120 detectors,
puts
FP 104-2SO
for six detector zones, up to 180 detectors,
puts
FP 106-2SO
Accessories
Gel Battery 12 V / 7.2 Ah
(DU = 1 unit)
IPP-12V-7.2Ah
3
Display Panels
4
LSN Display Panels 112
112 | Display Panels | LSN Display Panels
BAT 100 LSN Display Panel
Features
Upgradeable with up to three ATG 100 LSN kits
32, 64 or 96 red or yellow display LEDs
Monitored data communication control panel - display
panel
Maintenance of function on the LSN loop via two
integrated isolators in the event of wire interruptions
or short-circuits
The BAT 100 LSN display panel is a universally usable
remote parallel display with up to 96 LEDs (e.g. for a
maximum of 96 detector zones).
System Overview
2
3
4
1
BAT 100 LSN
1
Item Description
BAT 100 LSN, display without hood
1 Lower part of housing
2 ATG with 32 LEDs
3 Keys for "LED test" or "buzzer off"
4 Tamper contact
Functions
The BAT 100 LSN display panel handles the display of faults
and/or alarms for detectors or detector zones.
Up to three ATG 100 LSN kits can be installed in the
BAT 100 LSN housing. An ATG 100 LSN includes 32 red
LEDs for alarm indications or 32 yellow LEDs for fault
indications. Mixed equipment (red and yellow LEDs) of the
display panel with different ATG 100 LSNs is possible. LED
displays can be labeled using a printer.
The panel has a buzzer and a reset button for the buzzer. If
there is no alarm, the reset button for the LED test can be
used.
The ATG 100 LSN kits have integrated isolators for
maintaining the function of the elements on the LSN loop in
the event of wire interruptions or short-circuits.
ATG 100 LSN and ATB 100 LSN complied
EN54-17:2005
EN54-18:2005
Europe CE BAT 100 LSN
BS ATE / ATG / ATB 100 LSN
CPD 0786-CPD-20596 ATG100_ATB 100
Germany VdS G 298030 BAT 100 LSN
G 297040 ATG 100
Hungary TMT TMT-89/12/2004.pdf BAT 100
BAT 100 LSN Display Panels can be incorporated at any

point on LSN loops or LSN stubs.
If a BAT 100 LSN is installed in addition to a BE 500

Remote Operating Panel, the BAT 100 LSN should be
positioned directly adjacent to the BE 500.
4
Display Panels | LSN Display Panels | 113
Planning example
BZ 500 LSN
FBF *
E
Sirene
YZ
-/:
BE 500 BAT 100 LSN
(230 V)
E
Sirene
YZ
-/:
SM 20
LT
* Fire department control panel (in Germany only)
Parts Included
Qty. Component
1 BAT 100 LSN display panel
Electrics
ATG 100 LSN module
Operating voltage
LSN part +12 VDC to +30 V DC
Other functions +8 V DC to +30 V DC

Current consumption of LSN part 3 mA
Power intake of other functions All 32 LEDs on: max. 160 mA
All 32 LEDs off: max. 6 mA
Mechanics
BAT 100 LSN housing
Material Plastic, ABS Terluran
Color Light gray, RAL 9002
Weight Approx. 1 kg
Permissible operating temperature -5 C to +50 C
Permissible storage temperature -20 C to +60 C
Special features
LED flash frequency 0.8 Hz
LED colors Red, yellow
BAT 100 LSN Display Panel
Kit for display panel with 32 red LEDs
BAT 100
Accessories
ATG 100 LSN red LED Kit, Red
Kit for display panel with 32 red LEDs
ATG 100 LSN red
ATG 100 LSN ye LED Kit, Yellow
Kit for display panel with 32 yellow LEDs
ATG 100 LSN ye
ATG10016red16ye LED Kit, Red/Yellow
Kit for display panel with 16 red and 16 yellow
LEDs
ATG100-16red-16y
e
Labeling Strips
PU = 10 units
BAT100-LABELS
ATB 100 LSN for Incorporation into Location
Map Panels
ATB 100 LSN
4
Power Supplies and
Batteries
5
Power Supplies 116
116 | Power Supplies and Batteries | Power Supplies
Power Supply Unit Kit
12 V/5.4 A
Power Supply Unit for universal utilization
Power Supply Unit Kit 12 V/5.4 A
for universal utilization
FPP-BS-12V5A
5
Power Supplies and Batteries | Power Supplies | 117
FPP5000 External Power
Supply Unit Kit 24 V/6 A
Features
Charging process controlled by temperature and time
Voltage outputs each electronically fused and
connectable in parallel
Can hold two batteries
The FPP5000 External Power Supply Unit Kit is designed
for universal power supply, and has space for two 12 V/
45 Ah batteries. This is configured using components of the
Modular Fire Panel FPA5000.
System Overview
2
1
4
3
Pos. Description
1 Power Supply Housing, Frame Installation, medium PMF 0002 A
2 Mount for 1 Panel Rail Short PRS 0002 A to hold 1 Battery Con-
troller Module BCM0000B
3 Power Supply Bracket for 1 UPS 2416 A Universal Power Supply
24 V/6 A
4 Space for 2 batteries12 V/45 Ah
The Power Supply Housing is positioned on a Mounting Frame
Medium FMH 0000 A (not shown).
Functions
In the case of the FPP5000 Power Supply Unit, the Panel
Rail made of glass fiber reinforced plastic is fitted a
BCM0000B Battery Controller Module.
The Power Supply Unit is inserted into the Power Supply
Bracket, and is immediately operational via the pre-wired
plug-and-socket connections.
The bracket is equipped with a thermal sensor.
The Universal Power Supply UPS 2416 A is protected
against excess voltage and reversed polarity. The output
voltage is monitored and controlled externally. The output
FAULT signals that a malfunction has occurred. The green
onboard LED shows that the unit is operational.
The BCM0000B Battery Controller Module monitors the
power supply and controls the charging of the batteries (2 x
12 V / 45 Ah), subject to temperature parameters and set
times.
Each voltage output is electronically fused. All voltage
outputs can be connected in parallel.
Complies with:
EN 54-4:1997/A1:2002
EN 54-17:2005
Europe CE FPP-5000 Energieversorgung
CPD 0786-CPD-20357 FPP-5000
Germany VdS G 205050 FPP-5000
Bulgaria GD FSPP POPSd 61 FPP-5000
5
Installation dimensions
5
0
2
5
1
5
236
2
5
3
440 15,5
145 14 452,5 3 77
1
2
2
3
6
1
4
5
Parts Included
Amount Components
1 PMF 0002 A Power Supply Housing Frame Installation medium,
with Power Supply Bracket
1 FMH 0000 A Mounting Frame Medium
1 UPS 2416 A Universal Power Supply 24 V/6 A
1 PRS 0002 A Panel Rail Short
1 BCM0000B Battery Controller Module
1 CPB 0000 A Cable Set BCM/UPS
1 CBB 0000 A Cable Set BCM/Battery
1 Battery pole connection cable for Frame Installation Housing
Note Optional: Earth Bar FPO5000EB
Electrical
Input voltage range 100 V AC to 240 V AC
Input frequency range 50 Hz to 60 Hz
Efficiency 85%
Bridging time > 100 ms at 230 V AC
Output voltage
Mains supply 26 to 29 V DC (dependent on temp.)
Mains supply nominal 26.8 V DC (at 40 C)
Battery supply 21 to 23 V DC
Max. output current 6 A
Max. output 160 W (permanent)
Capacity of the fault outputs
BAT FAULT, AC FAULT, and
collective fault
0 V / 0 to 20 mA
Voltage outputs
2 switch outputs +24 V / 2.8 A (20.4-30 V), battery buffered

Mechanics
Dimensions (installed) Approx. 502 x 450 x 327 mm
(approx. 19.8 x 17.7 x 12.9 in.)
EN 60950
Class I equipment
ture
-5 C to 50 C (23 F to 122 F)
Permissible storage temperature -20 C to 60 C (-4F to 140 F)
Relative humidity Max. 95% non-condensing
Cooling Ventilation without ventilator
FPP5000 External Power Supply Unit Kit
24 V/6 A
FPP 5000
5
Power Supplies and Batteries | Power Supplies | 119
FPP5000TI Trouble Inter-
face for FPP5000
Features
Installation and auto-detection by simply inserting the
modul into the Panel Rail
Fault message transfer of mains fault signal and battery
fault signal via Local SecurityNetwork LSN.
The FPP5000TI is an extension for the FPP5000 External
Power Supply Unit Kit 24 V/6 A. It provides the fault
message transfer of the mains fault signal and the battery
fault signal to the fire panel via the Local SecurityNetwork
LSN. The two fault messages are provided by the
corresponding outputs at the BCM 0000 A Battery
Controller Module. The module is directly connected to the
LSN data bus and is also power supplied via the LSN data
bus line.
Functions
1 2 3 4
11
5 6 7 8 9 10
12 13 14
Pos. Labelling Connection
1 AUX1 - Auxiliary power supply incoming (support
points to loop through)
2 AUX1 +
3 LSN1 a1 - LSN incoming
4 LSN1 b1 +
5 SHIELD Shield wire
6 SHIELD
7 AUX2 - Auxiliary power supply outgoing (support
points to loop through)
8 AUX2 +
9 LSN1 a2 - LSN outgoing
10 LSN1 b2 +
11 AC FAULT - Mains fault input
12 AC FAULT +
13 BATT FAULT - Battery fault input
14 BATT FAULT +
Electrical
Input voltage (min - max) 15 V DC to +33 V DC
Maximum current consumption 1.15 mA at 24 V DC (from LSN)
5
Mechanical
Address setting Via eight DIP switches
Housing material and color ABS plastic, (UL94 V-0), semi-gloss
anthracite, RAL 7016
Dimensions (W x H x L) Approx. 127 x 96 x 60 mm
(approx. 5.0 x 3.8 x 2.4 inches)
Protection type as per IEC 60529 IP 20
Permissible operating temp. -5 C to 50 C (23 F to 122 F)
Permissible storage temp. -20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F)
Relative humidity Max. 95% noncondensing
FPP5000TI Trouble Interface for
FPP5000
FPP-5000-TI
Converter Kit 24 V/28 V/
35 V
Voltage Converter for UEV 1000 and UZG 1000 to convert
12 V to 24 V, 28 V or 35 V
Note Installation in the UZG 1000 is possible only in
conjunction with the Power Supply Unit Kit
12 V / 5,4 A.
Converter Kit 24 V/28 V/35 V
for UEV 1000, UZG 1000 (Power Supply Unit
Kit 12 V/5,4 A required)
FMX-
BSW-24V28V35V
5
Automatic Fire Detectors
6
LSN Detectors 122
Accessories - Series 500 LSN and 520 LSN 133
Accessories - Series 420 LSN improved
version 140
LSN RF Fire Detection Systems 152
Accessories - LSN RF Fire Detection
System 157
Conventional Detectors 159
Accessories - DO1101A-Ex 188
Specialty Detectors 192
122 | Automatic Fire Detectors | LSN Detectors
FAP520 Automatic Fire
Detectors LSN improved
version
Features
Modern, ultra-flat design
Smooth, easily-cleaned detector surface
Innovative fastening mechanism
High reliability
Maintains LSN loop functions in the event of wire
interruption or short-circuit thanks to two integrated
isolators
Extended system parameters of improved LSN
technology
The FAP520 Automatic Fire Detectors combine the
advantages of the improved LSN technology with the
aesthetic benefits of flush-mounted installation and the
option to choose the color. The detectors are specially
designed for connection to the Local SecurityNetwork LSN
improved version with the significantly extended system
parameters.
The FAP520 is available as a scattered light smoke detector
or as a multi-sensor detector with an additional gas sensor.
The respective versions of the detectors are available in
white or transparent with color toning inserts.
Functions
The smooth, flush-installation surface means the FAP520
Fire Detectors can be installed in areas with high aesthetic
requirements. In addition, the detectors are suitable for
areas with heightened dust exposure.
The detectors and trim rings in the "transparent with color
inserts" version are supplied complete with reversible
printed color ring sets, offering a choice of 16 colors for
individual color matching.
Sensor technology and signal processing
All detectors in the FAP520 Series are equipped with two
optical sensors and a pollution sensor. The FAPOC520
multisensor detector contains a gas sensor as an additional
detection channel.
The individual sensors can be programmed with RPS or
WinPara software via the LSN network. All sensor signals
are constantly analyzed by the internal signal evaluation
electronics and are linked with each other through
algorithms.
By linking the optical sensors and the gas sensor, the OC
detector can also be used in places where the work carried
out gives rise to small amounts of smoke, steam or dust. The
alarm will only be triggered automatically if the signal
combination corresponds with the characteristic diagram
of the installation location that was selected during
configuring. Consequently, a very high reliability against
false alarms is obtained.
When 50% of the alarm threshold is reached, a pre alarm is
signaled (displayed in the event database of the fire panel).
Optical sensor (smoke sensor)
The optical sensor (1) operates according to the scattered
light method.
The LEDs (3) transmit light at a defined angle into the
scattered light area (7).
2 3
7
In case of fire, the light is scattered by the smoke particles
and strikes the photo diodes (2), which transform the
quantity of light into a proportional electrical signal.
6
Automatic Fire Detectors | LSN Detectors | 123
1
1
2
3
3
2
4
5
6
Interference effects from daylight and commercial lighting
sources are filtered out with an optical daylight filter and by
the use of electronic filtering and phase-locked rectification
(ambient light stability: glare test DIN EN 547).
The various light-emitting and photo diodes of the sensor
are individually controlled by the detector electronics.
Consequently, signal combinations are produced that are
independent of each other and ideally suitable for the
detection of smoke, which makes it possible to differentiate
between smoke and interference agents (insects, objects).
In addition, the time characteristics and the correlation of
the optical sensor signals for the fire or interference
detection are evaluated.
Moreover, plausibility checking of the various signals makes
it possible to detect errors in the analysis electronics and
the LEDs.
Chemical sensor (CO gas sensor)
The gas sensor (4) detects mainly the carbon monoxide
(CO) that is produced by a fire, but it also detects hydrogen
(H) and nitrogen monoxide (NO).
The basic measuring principle is CO oxidation on an
electrode and the measurable current that arises from this.
The sensor signal value is proportional to the concentration
of gas.
The gas sensor delivers additional information to effectively
suppress deceptive values.
The CO sensor is monitored by measuring the internal
capacity. If the capacity lies outside the permitted range, an
error message is output on the fire panel. In this case, the
detector continues to operate purely as a scattered light
smoke detector.
Depending on the service life of the gas sensor, the
FAPOC 520 Fire Detector switches off the C sensors after
five years of operation. The detector will continue to
function as an O detector. The detector should then be
exchanged immediately in order to be able to keep using
the higher reliability of detection of the OC detector.
Pollution sensor
The contamination level on the detector surface is
continually measured by the pollution sensor (6); the result
is evaluated and indicated in three stages on the fire panel.
Contamination of the detector surface leads to active
adaptation of the threshold (drift compensation) and to a
fault indication in the case of heavy contamination.
Improved LSN features
The 520 Series Fire Detectors offer all the features of the
improved LSN technology:
Flexible network structures, including "T-tapping"

without additional elements
Up to 254 LSN improved elements per loop or stub line
Automatic or manual detector addressing selectable via

rotary switch, in each case with or without auto-
detection
Power supply for connected elements via LSN bus up to

300 mA
Unscreened fire detection cable can be used
Cable length up to 1000 m
Downwards compatibility to existing LSN systems and

control panels.
In addition, the FAP520 Fire Detectors offer all the
established benefits of LSN technology. The following data
can be read out for each configured detector:
Serial number
Contamination level of the optical section,
Operating hours
Current analog values.

In the event of an alarm, individual detector identification
is transmitted to the fire panel.
The sensor is self-monitoring. The following errors are
indicated on the fire panel:
Failure of the evaluation electronics or one of the LEDs

on the optical sensor
Heavy contamination (instead of false alarm)
Failure of the CO sensor (in the case of FAPOC 520).

Further performance characteristics
Various operating states are indicated on the detector by
means of a clearly visible two-color LED. In the event of an
alarm, the LED flashes red.
The control of an external detector alarm display is
possible.
Preservation of the LSN loop function is guaranteed in the
event of wire interruption or short circuit by means of
integrated isolators.
The innovative detector locking, which operates on the
ballpoint-pen principle, provides fast and simple insertion
and replacement of the detector. We recommend the
specially developed FAA500RTL exchanger device,
especially in the case of high installation heights.
To allow convenient detector testing, the FAA500TTL test
adapter with magnet and additional service accessories is
available. The magnet triggers a reed contact, which sets
the detector in test mode.
Complies with
EN54-7:2000/A1:2002/A2:2006
EN54-17:2005
6
Europe CE FAP-520 / FAA-500-R
CPD 0786-CPD-20201 FAP-O 520 / 520-P
0786-CPD-20202 FAP-OC 520 / 520-P
Germany VdS G 205125 FAP-O 520/520-P
G 205119 FAP-OC 520/520-P
Poland CNBOP 2565/2007 FAP-O 520, FAP-O 520-P
2566/2007 FAP-OC 520, FAP-OC 520-P
Hungary TMT TMT-20/2006 FAP-O 520, FAP-O 520-P
TMT-21/2006 FAP-OC 520, FAP-OC 520-
P
Can be connected to the fire panels FPA5000 and

FPA1200 with the improved LSN system parameters
in "Classic Mode" can be connected to the LSN fire

panels BZ 500 LSN, UEZ 2000 LSN, UGM 2020 and to
other panels or their receiver modules with identical
connection conditions, although with the previous LSN
system parameters
The detectors and detector bases can be used together

with the Rotaris lamp by Philips.
The detectors must be installed exclusively in the

FAA500 LSN Bases provided. In addition, the detector
base must be installed in an FAA500BB Ceiling Mount
Back Box or in an FAA500SB Surface Mount Back Box.
Note For flush ceiling mounting with FAA500BB:
The false ceiling may have a maximum
thickness of 32 mm. Above the false ceiling, a
free height of at least 110 mm is required.
The detectors are not intended for outdoor use.
A hemispherical space with a radius of 50 cm must

remain free below the detectors.
1
5
0

c
m
2
3
1 Detector
2 Ceiling
3 Hemispherical space below the detector
Care must be taken to ensure that neither people, large

animals, plants, swinging doors nor any objects intrude
into this area and that no parts of the detector surface
become covered.
The detectors may only be installed in a position which

is out of arm's reach. We therefore recommend a
minimum installation height of 2.70 m.
The detectors may not be installed in rooms in which

data is transmitted by means of high-intensity infrared
light (e g. in rooms with IR systems for interpreters).
The detectors must be mounted so that they are not

exposed to any direct sunlight.
A minimum distance of 50 cm from lamps must be

maintained. The detectors may not be mounted in a
cone of light from lamps.
The bases are equipped as standard with a spring which

is suitable for installation of the detector in false
ceilings. When the detector is installed in concrete or
wooden ceilings, these need to be replaced by the
stronger springs FAA500SPRING with red markings.
Maximum permitted air speed: 20 m/s

observed during the planning phase.
Installation/configuration notes in accordance with VdS/
VDE
The FAPOC 520, like the FAPO 520, is planned

according to the guidelines for optical detectors (see
DIN VDE 0833 Part 2 and VDS 2095).
Parts Included
Detector type Qty. Components
FAP-O 520 1 Optical Smoke Detector, White
FAP-O 520-P 1 Optical Smoke Detector, Transparent with Col-
or Inserts
FAP-OC 520 1 Multisensor Detector Optical/Chemical, White
FAP-OC 520-P 1 Multisensor Detector Optical/Chemical, Trans-
parent with Color Inserts
Electrical
Current consumption < 3.26 mA
Alarm output Per data word by two-wire signal line
Indicator output Open collector connects 0 V over 1.5 k
through, max. 15 mA
Mechanics
Dimensions
Detector 113 x 55 mm
Detector with Tim Ring 150 x 55 mm
Detector with Trim Ring,

Base and Ceiling Mount
Back Box
150 x 110 mm
Housing material Polycarbonate
Color
Detector housing Signal white, RAL 9003
Detector front plate

FAPO 520/ FAPOC 520
signal white matt
Detector front plate

FAPO 520P/
FAPOC 520P
transparent/silver-gray
Weight Without / with packaging
FAP-OC 520(-P) 180 g / 370 g
FAP-O 520(-P) 170 g / 360 g
Trim Ring 30 g / 60 g
6
ture
FAP-O 520 (-P) -20 C to +65 C
FAP-OC 520 (-P) -10 C to +50 C

Permissible relative humidity 95% (non-condensing)
Permissible air speed 20 m/s
EN 60529
FAP-O 520 (-P) IP 53
FAP-OC 520 (-P) IP 33

Planning
Monitoring area
Max. 120 m
2
(Heed local guidelines!)
Maximum installation height 16 m (Heed local guidelines!)
Minimum installation height Out of arm's reach
Minimum installation height recommend-
ed by BOSCH: 2.70 m
Minimum distance to lamps 0.5 m
For flush ceiling mounting with
FAA-500-BB
Thickness of the false ceil-

ing
Max. 32 mm
Required bored hole 130 mm (-1 mm to +5 mm)
Installation depth 110 mm

Note: Above the false ceiling, a free height
of at least 110 mm is required.
Detection principle
FAP-O 520(-P) Scattered light measurement
FAP-OC 520(-P) Combination of scattered light measure-

ment and combustion gas measurement
Response sensitivity
FAP-O 520(-P) < 0.18 dB/m (EN 54-7)
FAP-OC 520(-P) Optical section: < 0.36 dB/m (EN 547)

Gas sensor section: in ppm range
Individual display Two-color LED,
red (alarm), green (test mode)
FAPO 520 Optical Smoke Detector, White FAP-O 520
FAPO 520P Optical Smoke Detector,
Transparent with Color Inserts
FAP-O 520-P
FAPOC 520 Multisensor Detector Optical/
Chemical, White
FAP-OC 520
FAPOC 520P Multisensor Detector
Optical/Chemical, Transparent with Color
Inserts
FAP-OC 520-P
Accessories
FAA500TR-W Trim Ring, White
for 500 and 520 Series Fire Detectors
FAA-500-TR-W
FAA500TRP Trim Ring, Transparent with
Color Inserts
FAA-500-TR-P
FAA500 LSN Base
for installation of the FAP520 Fire Detector
FAA-500
FAA500R LSN Base with Relay
Only used in conjunction with the 5000 Series
Modular Fire Panel.
FAA-500-R
FAA500GB LSN Base for GB FAA-500-GB
FAA500RGB LSN Base with Relay for GB
Modular Fire Panel.
FAA-500-R-GB
FAA500BB Ceiling Mount Back Box
for ceiling flush installation in false ceilings
when mounting 500 and 520 Series Bases and
Fire Detectors
FAA-500-BB
FAA500CB Built-in Housing for Concrete
Ceilings
FAA-500-CB
FAA500SB Surface Mount Back Box FAA-500-SB
FAA500SB-H Surface Mount Back Box
with Damp Room Seal
FAA-500-SB-H
FAA500SPRING for Concrete/Wooden
Ceilings
(DU = 10 units)
FAA-500-SPRING
6
FAP520 Automatic Fire Detectors LSN improved version

FAP-O 520 FAP-O 520-P FAP-OC 520 FAP-OC 520-P
Detector type optical optical optical/chemical optical/chemical
Operating voltage 15 V DC . . . 33 V DC 15 V DC . . . 33 V DC 15 V DC . . . 33 V DC 15 V DC . . . 33 V DC
Current consumption < 3.26 mA < 3.26 mA < 3.26 mA < 3.26 mA
Protection category IP 53 IP 53 IP 33 IP 33
Permissible operating tem-
perature
-20 C . . . +65 C -20 C . . . +65 C -10 C . . . +50 C -10 C . . . +50 C
Monitoring area max. 120 m max. 120 m max. 120 m max. 120 m
Maximum installation
height
16 m 16 m 16 m 16 m
Color white transparent with color
inserts
white transparent with color
inserts
6
FAP420/FAH420 Auto-
matic Fire Detectors LSN
improved version
Features
Combination of optical, thermal and chemical sensors
with intelligent evaluation electronics.
Detector properties adapted to cater for room usage
Drift compensation in optical and gas measurement
section
isolators
Extended system parameters of improved LSN
technology
The 420 Series Automatic Fire Detectors combine the
advantages of the improved LSN technology with the
performance characteristics of the proven MAGIC.SENS
Fire Detectors, which are distinguished by superb accuracy
as well as detection speed and precision. These have been
specially designed for connection to the Local
SecurityNetwork LSN improved version with the
significantly improved system parameters. Integrated
turning switches ensure easy addressing of detectors,
either automatically or manually, as well as with or without
autodetection.
System Overview
Operating mode Detector type
FAP-
OTC 420
FAP-OT 420 FAP-
O 420(KKW
)
FAH-
T 420(KKW)
Combined x x - -
Optical x x x -
Thermo-max. x x - x
Thermal
differential
x x - x
Chemical
(+ optical)
x - - -
Functions
The individual sensors can be configured via the LSN
network manually or using a timer.
All sensor signals are analyzed continually by the internal
evaluation electronics and are linked with each other via an
inbuilt microprocessor. The link between the sensors
means that the combined detectors can also be used where
light smoke, steam or dust must be expected during the
course of normal operation.
Only if the signal combination corresponds to that for the
programming of the selected usage site field code will the
alarm be triggered automatically. This results in a higher
level of security against false alarms.
In addition, the time curve for fire and malfunction
detection sensor signals is also analyzed, resulting in
increased reliability of detection for each individual sensor.
In the case of the optical and chemical sensor, the response
threshold (drift compensation) is actively adjusted. Manual
or time-controlled switch-off of individual sensors is
required for adjustment to extreme interference factors.
The optical sensor uses the scattered-light method.
An LED transmits light to the measuring chamber, where it
is absorbed by the labyrinth structure. In the event of a fire,
smoke enters the measuring chamber and the smoke
particles scatter the light from the LED. The amount of light
hitting the photo diode is converted into a proportional
electrical signal.
Thermal sensor (temperature sensor)
A thermistor in a resistance network is used as a thermal
sensor, from which an analog-digital converter measures
the temperature-dependent voltage at regular intervals.
Depending on the specified detector class, the temperature
sensor triggers the alarm status when the maximum
temperature of 54 C or 69 C is exceeded (thermal
maximum), or if the temperature rises by a defined amount
within a specified time (thermal differential).
6
The main function of the gas sensor is to detect carbon
monoxide (CO) generated as a result of a fire, but it will also
detect hydrogen (H) and nitrous monoxide (NO). The
sensor signal value is proportional to the concentration of
gas. The gas sensor delivers additional information to
effectively suppress deceptive values.
FAPOTC 420 detector switches off the C sensors after five
years of operation. The detector will continue to function as
an OT detector. The detector should then be exchanged
immediately in order to be able to keep using the higher
reliability of detection of the OTC detector.
The 420 Series Fire Detectors offer all the features of the
improved LSN technology:
Flexible network structures, including "Ttapping"


detection

300 mA
Unscreened fire detection cable can be used

central units
LSN features
Operating data display
In addition, the FAP/FAH-420 detectors offer all the
established benefits of LSN technology. RPS or WinPara
software can be used to change the detection
characteristics of the respective room utilization. In
addition, each configured detector, with the exception of
the KKW types, can provide the following data:
Serial number,
Contamination level of the optical section,
Operating hours,
Current analog values.

Analog values are:
Optical system values: current measured value of the

scattered light sensor; the measuring range is linear and
covers from 170 (new) to 700 (dirty).
Contamination: the contamination value shows how

much the current contamination value has increased
relative to the original condition.
CO value: display of the current measured value

(max. 550).
Self-monitoring of sensor technology
The sensor is self-monitoring. The following errors are
indicated on the fire panel:
Fault indication in the event of the failure of the

detector electronics
Continuous display of contamination level during

service
Fault indication if heavy contamination is detected (in

place of false alarms)
In the event of wire interruption or short-circuit, integrated
dividing elements maintain the functional security of the
LSN loop.
The detectors have a dust-repellent labyrinth and cap
construction.
The detector alarm indication takes the form of a red
flashing LED that is easily visible 360.
It is possible to activate a remote external detector alarm
display.
The stable and robust detector base no longer has to be
directed due to the centralized position of the individual
display.
The integrated strain relief for interfloor cables prevents the
removal of cables from the terminal after installation. The
terminals for cable cross-sections up to 2.5 mm
2
are very
easily accessible.
The detector bases have a mechanical removal lock (can be
activated/deactivated).
The detectors comply with:
Europe CE FAP-/FAH-420 / FAA-MSR420 / FAA-MS-
R-SP
FAP- / FAH-420 KKW
CPD 0786-CPD-20129 FAH-T 420
0786-CPD-20128 FAH-T 420 KKW
0786-CPD-20117 FAP-O 420
0786-CPD-20125 FAP-O 420 KKW
0786-CPD-20118 FAP-OT 420
0786-CPD-20119 FAP-OT 420
0786-CPD-20120 FAP-OTC 420
0786-CPD-20121 FAP-OTC 420
Germany VdS G 205080 FAP-OTC 420
G 205081 FAP-OT 420
G 205082 FAP-O 420
G 205083 FAH-T 420
G 205088 FAP-O 420 KKW
G 205089 FAH-T 420 KKW
Turkey TSE 14.10.01/TSE-6990 Detectors
6
Hungary TMT TMT-19/2006 FAP-OT 420, FAP-OT 420
KKW, FAP-OTC 420
TMT-17/2006 FAP-O 420, FAP-O 420
KKW
TMT-18/2006 FAH-T 420, FAH-T 420
KKW
Detector type EN54-5:2000/
A1:2002
EN54-7:2000/
A1:2002/
A2:2006
EN54-17:2005
FAP-OTC 420
FAP-OT 420
FAP-O 420
FAH-T 420
FAP-O 420 KKW
FAH-T 420 KKW
For connection to the fire panels FPA5000 and

FPA1200 with the improved LSN system parameters
in "Classic Mode" can be connected to the LSN fire

panels BZ 500 LSN, UEZ 2000 LSN, UGM 2020 and to
other panels or their receiver modules with identical
connection conditions, although with the previous LSN
system parameters
During planning works, it is essential to adhere to

national standards and guidelines.
VDE
The FAPOTC 420, and FAPOT 420 types are planned in

accordance with the guidelines for optical detectors if
operated as optical detectors or as combined optical/
thermal detectors (see DIN VDE 0833 Part 2 and
VDS 2095)
If occasional disconnection of the optical unit

(scattered light sensor) is required, planning must be
based on the guidelines for heat detectors (see
DIN VDE 0833 Part 2 and VDS 2095)
When planning fire barriers according to DIBt, note that

the FAHT 420 (KKW)must be configured in accordance
with class A1R.
Parts Included
FAP-OTC 420 1 Multisensor Detector Optical/Thermal/
Chemical
FAP-OT 420 1 Multisensor Detector Optical/Thermal
FAP-O 420 1 Optical Smoke Detector
FAH-T 420 1 Heat Detector (Thermal Differential/Ther-
mal Maximum)
FAP-O 420 KKW 1 Optical Smoke Detector *
FAH-T 420 KKW 1 Heat Detector (Thermal Differential/Ther-
mal Maximum) *
* For use in areas with increased radioactive radiation
Electrical
Alarm output Per data word by two-wire signal line
Indicator output Open collector connects 0 V over
1.5 k through, max. 15 mA
Mechanics
Dimensions
Without base 99.5 x 52 mm
With base 120 x 63.5 mm

Housing
Material Plastic, ABS (Novodur)
Color White, similar to RAL 9010,

matt finish
Weight Without / With packaging
FAP-OTC 420 Approx. 80 g / approx. 125 g
FAP-OT 420, FAPO 420,

FAPO 420 KKW,
FAHT 420 and
FAHT 420 KKW
Approx. 75 g / approx. 115 g
ture
FAP-OTC 420 -10 C to +50 C
FAP-OT 420 -20 C to +50 C
FAP-O 420 /
FAPO 420 KKW
-20 C to +65 C
FAH-T 420 /
FAHT 420 KKW
-20 C to +50 C
Permissible air speed 20 m/s.
Protection class as per EN 60529 IP 40,
IP 43 detector base with damp room seal
6
Planning
Monitoring area
FAP-OTC 420,
FAPOT 420, FAPO 420,
FAPO 420 KKW
Max. 120 m
2
FAH-T 420,
FAHT 420 KKW
Max. 40 m
2
FAPOTC 420,
FAPOT 420, FAPO 420,
FAPO 420 KKW
Max. 16 m (Heed local guidelines!)
FAH-T 420,
FAHT 420 KKW
Max. 7.5 m (Heed local guidelines!)
Optical part In accordance with EN 54 T7 (program-

mable)
Thermal maximum part > 54 C / >69 C
Thermal differential part A1R / A2R / BR, in line with prEN 545
(programmable)
Gas sensor In ppm range

Individual display LED red
Color code
FAP-OTC 420 Yellow loop
FAP-OT 420 Black loop
FAP-O 420,
FAPO 420 KKW
No marking
FAH-T 420,
FAHT 420 KKW
Red loop
FAPOTC 420 Multisensor Detector Optical/
Thermal/Chemical
FAP-OTC 420
FAPOT 420 Multisensor Detector Optical/
Thermal
FAP-OT 420
FAPO 420 Optical Smoke Detector FAP-O 420
FAHT 420 Heat Detector
thermal differential/thermal maximum
FAH-T 420
FAP-OT 420 KKW multisensor detector
optical/thermal
FAP-OT420-KKW
FAPO 420 KKW Optical Smoke Detector
for use in areas with increased radioactive ra-
diation
FAP-O420-KKW
FAHT 420 KKW Heat Detector
thermal differential/thermal maximum, for use
in areas with increased radioactive radiation
FAH-T420-KKW
Accessories
MS 400 Detector Base
for surface-mounted and flush-mounted cable
feed
MS 400
MSF 400 Detector Base with Damp Room
Seal
feed
MSF 400
MSC 420 Additional Base with Damp Room
Seal
for surface-mounted cable feed
MSC 420
FAAMSR 420 Detector Base with Relay FAA-MSR 420
FAAMS 420RSP Detector Base with Relay
and Spring
for use in Great Britain
FAA-MS 420-R-SP
MS 420 LSN Detector Base with Spring
MS 420
SSK 400 Protective Dust Cover
(packing unit = 10 units)
SSK 400
TP4 400 Support Plate for Detector
Identification
TP4 400
Identification
TP8 400
SK 400 Protective Basket SK 400
MH 400 Detector Heating Element MH 400
MK 400 Detector Console
Console for DIBt compliant mounting of detec-
tors above doors etc., including detector base
MK 400
Mounting Bracket for Fire Detectors on
False Floor Stilts
FMX-DET-MB
MPA External Detector Alarm Display
according to DIN 14623
MPA
6
FAP-420/FAH-420 Automatic Fire Detectors LSN improved version

FAP-O 420 FAP-O420-KKW FAH-T 420
Detector type optical optical thermal differential/thermal
maximum
Operating voltage 15 V DC . . . 33 V DC 15 V DC . . . 33 V DC 15 V DC . . . 33 V DC
Current consumption < 0.51 mA < 0.51 mA < 0.51 mA
Protection category IP 40, IP 43 with MSF 400 IP 40, IP 43 with MSF 400 IP 40, IP 43 with MSF 400
ture
-20 C . . . +65 C -20 C . . . +65 C -20 C . . . +50 C
Monitoring area max. 120 m max. 120 m max. 40 m
Maximum installation height 16 m 16 m 7.5 m
Use in areas with increased radio-
active radiation

Color code no marking no marking red loop
6
FAP-420/FAH-420 Automatic Fire Detectors LSN improved version

FAH-T420-KKW FAP-OT 420 FAP-OTC 420
Detector type thermal differential/thermal
maximum
optical/thermal optical/thermal/chemical
ture
-20 C . . . +50 C -20 C . . . +50 C -10 C . . . +50 C
Maximum installation height 7.5 m 16 m 16 m
Use in areas with increased radio-
active radiation

Color code red loop black loop yellow loop
6
Automatic Fire Detectors | Accessories - Series 500 LSN and 520 LSN | 133
FAA500TR-W Trim Ring,
White
White Trim Ring for 500 und 520 Series Fire Detectors
FAA-500-TR-W
FAA500TRP Trim Ring,
Transparent with Color
Inserts
Trim Ring for the "transparent with color inserts" Fire
Detectors in the 500 and 520 Series
Color Inserts
FAA-500-TR-P
6
134 | Automatic Fire Detectors | Accessories - Series 500 LSN and 520 LSN
FAA500 LSN Base
FAA500 LSN Bases are required for installing FAP520 Fire
Detectors.
Functions
The screw-type terminals guarantee a secure electrical
connection through the clamped contacts when mounting
the FAP520 Fire Detector.
The Bases are provided with three holders for cable ties.
Connections Power supply (0 V, + V)
LSN (a-in/out, b-in, b-out)
C point
Shielding
Cable cross section
0.3 mm
2
3.3 mm
2
Dimensions 145.6 x 63.5 mm
Housing color Signal white, RAL 9003
Weight 185 g/270 g (without/with packaging)
FAA500 LSN Base
for installation of the FAP520 Fire Detector
FAA-500
6
FAA500R LSN Base with
Relay
FAA500R LSN Bases with Relay are used for installing the
FAP520 Fire Detectors in special applications, e. g. control
of an emergency door in accordance with DIBt.
Note FAA500 R Bases can only be used in
conjunction with the 5000 Series Modular Fire
Panel.
Europe CE FAP-520 / FAA-500-R
C point
Shielding
Relay (NO, NC, COM)
Power intake 0.2 mA
Relay contact load 1 A, 30 V DC
Cable cross section
0.3 mm
2
3.3 mm
2
FAA500R LSN Base with Relay
Modular Fire Panel.
FAA-500-R
6
FAA500GB LSN Base for
GB
FAA500GB LSN Bases for GB are required for installing the
FAP520 Fire Detectors in Great Britain. They are provided
with integrated jumper elements that preserve the loop
function if the detector is removed.
Special feature Jumper elements to preserve the loop
function if the detector is removed
C point
Shielding
Cable cross section
0.3 mm
2
3.3 mm
2
FAA500GB LSN Base for GB FAA-500-GB
FAA500RGB LSN Base
with Relay for GB
The FAA500RGB LSN Base with Relay for GB has
integrated jumper elements for use with FAP520 Fire
Detectors in Great Britain. It also has a relay for special
applications, e. g. control of an emergency door in
accordance with DIBt.
Jumper elements ensure that the loop function is preserved
if the detector is removed.
Note FAA500RGB Bases can only be used in
conjunction with the 5000 Series Modular Fire
Panel.
Special feature Jumper elements to preserve the loop
function if the detector is removed
C point
Shielding
Relay (NO, NC, COM)
Power intake 0.2 mA
Relay contact load 1 A, 30 V DC
Cable cross section
0.3 mm
2
3.3 mm
2
FAA500RGB LSN Base with Relay for GB
Modular Fire Panel.
FAA-500-R-GB
6
FAA500BB Ceiling Mount
Back Box
The FAA500BB Ceiling Mount Back Box is necessary for
flush ceiling installation in false ceilings when mounting 500
and 520 Series Bases and Fire Detectors.
Mounting dimensions
Maximum thickness of the false

ceiling
32 mm
Mounting height 11 cm
Required bore hole 130 mm (-1 mm/+5 mm)

Max. cable diameter 1.4 cm
Housing color White
Weight (without/with packaging) 100 g/200 g
Fire Detectors
FAA-500-BB
FAA500CB Built-in
Housing for Concrete Ceil-
ings
FAA500CB Built-in Housings are used to install 500 and
520 Series Fire Detectors in concrete ceilings. These make
it possible to position cable ducts with ease and precision.
A Ceiling Mount Back Box is installed in the Built-in Housing
which receives the base and the detector.
System Overview
1
202
ca. 150
75
226
226
Pos. Description
1 Front part
Ceilings
FAA-500-CB
6
FAA500SB Surface Mount
Back Box
For special applications where it is not possible to flush-
mount the 500 and 520 Series Fire Detectors in a ceiling,
Surface Mount Back Boxes are available.
This is used as an alternative to the Ceiling Mount Back Box.
The Surface Mount Back Boxes are designed for flush-
mounted cable feed and surface-mounted cable feed with
cable protection conduits.
Functions
The inputs for surface-mounted cable feed are pre-
punched. For flush-mounted cable feed, two inlets are
provided in the base:
Each 20 mm (0.75 inch) for PG 13.5 threads
Each 25 mm (1.0 inch) for 3/4'' cable protection conduit

In the case of cable feed via PG 13.5 threads, cables with
diameters of up to 1.2 cm can be used.
The base is fitted using screws at four attachment points.
Dimensions 150 mm x 80 mm
Housing material Polycarbonate (PC-FR)
Housing color White (RAL 9003)
Weight Approx. 195 g/300 g (without/with pack-
aging)
FAA500SB-H Surface
Mount Back Box with
Damp Room Seal
The FAA500SBH has an additional seal for damp rooms.
Functions

Weight (without/with packag-
ing)
Approx. 225 g/330 g
6
with Damp Room Seal
FAA-500-SB-H
FAA500SPRING for
Concrete/Wooden Ceilings
DU = 10 units
The bases of the 500 Series are fitted with spring as
standard. This is suitable for installing the detector in false
ceilings.
When the detector is installed in concrete or wooden
ceilings, these need to be replaced by the stronger FAA-500-
SPRING springs with red markings.
Ceilings
(DU = 10 units)
FAA-500-SPRING
6
140 | Automatic Fire Detectors | Accessories - Series 420 LSN improved version
The detector head is installed in the Detector Base MS 400.
The base is suitable for surface-mounted cable feeds as well
as for flush-mounted cable feeds, and has separate
attachment points for ceiling mount/flush-mounted back
boxes. In addition, it fits all standard bore patterns.
The Detector Base made of white ABS plastic (Novodur,
color similar to RAL 9010) has a matt finish and seven
terminal screws to connect the detector and its features to
the fire panel.
Contacts connected to the terminals guarantee a secure
electric connection when the detector module is installed.
Cables up to 2.5 mm
2
in diameter can be used.
To protect against unauthorized removal, the detector head
can be secured with a variable locking.
Installation information for 400/420 Series Detector
Bases
The drill holes marked with an "X" may only be used to

mount the base to flush-mounted back boxes.
Keep shielded auxiliary wire as short as possible, and

make sure this is insulated.
100
1
4
2
2
.
7
7
,
8
120
+
V
0
V
b
1
b
2
a
a
2
1
/
c
X
X
c
a
.

5
5
Connections Power supply (0 V, +V)
LSN (a1/a2, b1, b2)
C-point
Shielding
Housing material ABS (Novodur)
Housing color Similar to RAL 9010
Dimensions 120 x 22.7 mm
Weight 72 g
feed
MS 400
6
Automatic Fire Detectors | Accessories - Series 420 LSN improved version | 141
MSF 400 Detector Base
with Damp Room Seal
The MSF 400 Detector Base is available for use of the
detector in a humid environment.
With the integrated seal made of TPE, the detector base
MSF 400 protects the detector effectively against the entry
of condensation water.
Installation information for damp room seal
Do not cut into the damp room seal on the cable feeds.
Instead, pierce these using a pointed implement, and
then draw the cable through.
LSN (a1/a2, b1, b2)
C-point
Shielding
Housing
Base material ABS (Novodur)
Seal material TPE
Base color Similar to RAL 9010

Weight 90 g
Seal
feed
MSF 400
6
MS 420 LSN Detector Base
with Spring
The MS 420 LSN is a detector base designed for use in Great
Britain
This can be used to mount the MAGIC.SENS LSN Detector
as well as detectors from the 420 Series, and has integrated
jumper elements that preserve the loop function if the
detector is removed.
LSN (a1/a2, b1, b2)
C-point
Shielding
Housing color Similar RAL 9010
Weight 72 g
MS 420 LSN Detector Base with Spring
MS 420
6
FAAMSR 420 Detector
Base with Relay
The FAAMSR 420 is a detector base with a change-over
relay (Form C).
Note FAAMSR 420 relay bases can only be used in
conjunction with improved LSN technology
(fire panels FPA5000 and FPA1200).
The maximum contact load of the relay is 1 A @ 30 V DC.
R-SP
LSN (a1/a2, b1, b2)
C-point
Shielding
Relay (NO, C, NC)
Relay contact load capacity 1 A @ 30 V DC
Weight 82 g
FAAMSR 420 Detector Base with Relay FAA-MSR 420
6
FAAMS 420RSP Detector
Base with Relay and Spring
The FAAMS 420RSP is a relay base for use in Great Britain.
It is equipped with a change-over relay (form C) for DIBt
connections as well as with integrated jumper elements
that preserve the loop function if the detector is removed.
Note FAAMS 420RSP relay bases can only be used
in conjunction with improved LSN technology
(fire panels FPA5000 and FPA1200).
The maximum contact load of the relay is 1 A @ 30 V DC.
R-SP
LSN (a1/a2, b1, b2)
C-point
Shielding
Relay (NO, C, NC)
Relay contact load 1 A @ 30 V DC
Weight 82 g
FAAMS 420RSP Detector Base with Relay
and Spring
FAA-MS 420-R-SP
6
MSC 420 Additional Base
with Damp Room Seal
The Additional Base MSC 420 was conceived specially for
surface-mounted cable feeds with cable protection
conduits and has 2 opposing pre-cut inlets of 20 mm
diameter and 2 additional opposing and prepared inlets for
up to 28 mm diameter.
To protect against condensation water penetration, a seal
made of TPE is situated on the base of the MSC 420.
Seal material TPE
Weight 74 g
Seal
MSC 420
6
MPA External Detector
Alarm Display according to
DIN 14623
The External Detector Alarm Display is required if the
detector is not directly visible or has been mounted in false
ceilings or false floors. The External Detector Alarm Display
should be mounted in corridors or access pathways to the
corresponding building sections or rooms.
The transparent red alarm display conforms to DIN 14623.
Europe CE MPA
Germany VdS G 294052 MPA
PTB 01 ATEX 2163 X OTC/OC 310/410, OT/
O/T 300/400, DKM/SKM 120, DM/SM
210, MPA
Poland CNBOP 2095/2006 MPA
Note If unshielded cables are used, the cable length
between a LSN detector and an External
Detector Alarm Display is restricted to a
maximum of 3 m.
If shielded cables are used, make sure that the
total cable length does not exceed 500 m
(= sum of all cables to the External Detector
Alarm Display within one loop or stub).
Operating voltage 9 V DC . . . 30 V DC
Current consumption for display
T.2 Approx. 2 mA
T.3 Limited to approx. 13 mA
T.4 Limited to 20 mA maximum

Display medium 1 LED via a light guide
Permissible wire gauge 0.6 mm ... 0.8 mm
Weight 65 g
MPA
6
FAA420RI Remote Indi-
cator
The FAA420RI is an external detector alarm display and is
required if the detector is not directly visible or has been
mounted in false ceilings or false floors. The external
detector alarm display should be mounted in corridors or
access pathways of the corresponding building sections or
rooms.
Europe CE FAA-420-RI
between an LSN detector and an external
detector alarm display is restricted to a
maximum of 3 m.
(= sum of all cables to the external detector
alarm display within one loop or stub).
Maximum current consumption 20 mA
Display medium 2 LEDs
Permissible wire gauge 0.6 mm 2.0 mm
Weight 45 g
FAA420RI Remote Indicator FAA-420-RI
6
Mounting Bracket for Fire
Detectors on False Floor
Stilts
Mounting Bracket to mount the detector in floor cavities.
The detector base is not included in the scope of delivery.
False Floor Stilts
FMX-DET-MB
Console for DIBt compliant mounting of detectors above
doors etc.
The detector base is included in the scope of delivery.
Planning notes
Dimensions (L x B x H): 185 x 129 x 29 mm (without base)
MK 400
6
MH 400 Detector Heating
Element
The Detector Heating Element MH 400 is deployed at
locations where the functional safety of the detector might
be impaired by condensation (dew), e. g. in warehouses
which are briefly opened in order to allow vehicles to enter
and leave.
The integrated 1 k resistor has a nominal performance

of 3 W. With a looped-through 28 V power supply
(monitored), up to 10 Detector Heating Elements
MH 400 can be deployed per loop.
External power supply (not monitored) is possible.
The supply voltage may not be permitted to fall below

23 V.
SK 400 Protective Basket
In the case of installation of the detector e. g. in a sports
hall, the Protective Basket prevents balls or other sports
equipment hitting and possibly damaging the detector.
The robust Protective Basket consists of 5 mm round steel,
and is painted aluminum gray (RAL 9007).
Diameter (max.): 148 mm
Height: 75 mm
6
SSK 400 Protective Dust
Cover
Packing unit = 10 units
The Protective Dust Cover SSK 400 protects a mounted
detector base with or without detector head against dirt
during building work.
The Protective Dust Cover made of polypropylene (PP) is
pushed onto the installed detector base.
SSK 400
TP4 400 Support Plate for
Detector Identification
15 / 4
The Support Plate, made of ABS plastic (Novodur, color
similar to RAL 9010) and 1.8 mm thick, is clamped between
the detector base and the ceiling.
This is designed for an installation height of up to 4 m and
is configured for a self-adhesive label with dimensions of up
to 65 x 34 mm.
Note Labels by Zweckform have proven practical.
The self-adhesive labels are made of white
polyester film and can be labeled with a laser
printer or copier.
Identification
TP4 400
6
15 / 4
to 97 x 44 mm.
printer or copier.
Identification
TP8 400
6
152 | Automatic Fire Detectors | LSN RF Fire Detection Systems
LSN RF Fire Detection
System
Features
Highly efficient thanks to simple installation, flexible
expandability and automatic configuration
High level of transmission and functional reliability
Transmission path monitoring
Optical RF Smoke Detector with outstanding
interference immunity
Up to 30 Optical RF Smoke Detectors or up to 10 RF
Manual Call Points per RF Expansion Module can be
connected
isolators
The LSN RF Fire Detection System operates in the new
868870 MHz SRD (Short Range Devices) band, released
exclusively for security technology. The SRD band does not
interfere with long-range industrial, scientific and medical
applications with high transmission power.
System Overview
LSN RF Fire Detection System
Local Security Network
LSN
FK 100 LSN
FK 100 LSN
DOW 1171
SMF121
12345 67 89 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
3 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
FK 100 LSN RF Expansion Module
b LSN1 b LSN2
LSN LSN
a LSN1 a LSN2
+U
0V
+U
0V
4
1
2
3
5
6 7
9
8
SPU6001
2
3
10
Pos. Description
1 FET switch
2 Receiving data
3 Transmitting data
4 Microprocessor for data processing/data transfer
5 Voltage supply
6 Reed contact
7 LEDs
8 Tamper contact
9 Monitoring of external voltage supply
10 SPU6001 Radio module
6
Automatic Fire Detectors | LSN RF Fire Detection Systems | 153
Functions
The LSN RF Fire Detection System (the radio cell) consists
of an FK 100 LSN RF Expansion Module and up to
30 DOW 1171 Optical RF Smoke Detectors or up to 10
SMF121 RF Manual Call Points. The RF Expansion Module
is installed as an LSN element in a loop or stub line and is
the interface between the RF Smoke Detectors and the fire
panel.
The information transfer between the detector and the
Expansion Module is bi-directional. If a base channel is
occupied by an external system, this is recognized
immediately and the radio cell switches to a secondary
channel to guarantee alarm transmission.
The LSN part in the RF Expansion Module is supplied with
voltage via the LSN cable. The radio module connected
requires a separate power supply.
The integrated microcontroller drives interfaces and user
elements and is responsible for data transfer between the
RF Smoke Detector and the fire panel.
The FK 100 LSN has a tamper contact, a reed switch for
manually activating the configuration mode and three LEDs
for displaying the operating status.
The RF Expansion Module meets the standard regulations
and guidelines for security systems: EN 54; DIN VDE 0833;
VdS.
DOW 1171 Optical RF Smoke Detector
The battery-powered, configurable RF Smoke Detector
operates using the reliable scattered light principle with
side scattering. In conjunction with the modern detection
algorithm it achieves uniform response behavior, while
providing outstanding interference immunity. The same
radio module is integrated into the detector and the RF
Expansion Module for bidirectional information transfer.
SMF121 RF Manual Call Point
The SMF121 RF Manual Call Point is used to trigger an alarm
in the event of a fire or other emergency. Via a wireless
connection, the SMF121 and the required SMF6120 RF
Base (battery-powered) easily connect to the FK 100 LSN
RF Expansion Module.
The FK 100 LSN complies with
EN54-17:2005
EN54-18:2005
The DOW 1171 complies with:
EN54-7:2000/A1:2002
The radio module used in the FK 100 LSN RF Expansion
Module, the DOW 1171 Optical RF Smoke Detector and in
the SMF6120 RF Base is certified in the following countries
(radio licensing in line with ANNEX4, Directive 99/5EC
Radio recognition, CE 0123 (!)):
Austria (A), Belgium (B), Croatia (HR), Denmark (DK),
Germany (D), Italy (I), Luxembourg (L), The Netherlands
(NL), Norway (N), Portugal (P), Spain (E), Slovakia (SK),
Slovenia (SLO), Sweden (S), Switzerland (CH), Great
Britain (GB).
Europe CE FK 100 LSN
DOW 1171
CPD 0786-CPD-20089 DOW 1171
0786-CPD-20336 FK 100 LSN
Germany VdS G 203016 FK 100 LSN
G 200112 DOW 1171
POCC DE.C313.B06297
Boundary values
Up to 30 DOW 1171 Optical RF Smoke Detectors can be

connected per FK 100 LSN RF Expansion Module.
A maximum of 127 LSN elements is allowed per LSN

processing assembly. Each RF Expansion Module and
each RF Smoke Detector or RF Manual Call Point is
counted as an LSN element, e. g. with the maximum
number of smoke detectors:
1 FK 100 LSN + 30 DOW 1171 = 31 LSN elements.
When several FK 100 LSNs are installed in the same

area, a minimum distance of 2 m must be maintained
between the individual RF Expansion Modules.
In addition, the maximum distance of 40 m and an

attenuation of 90 dB must be adhered to between the
RF Expansion Modules and the RF Smoke Detectors
(see Planning a Radio Cell).
16 radio channels are available. The RF Expansion

Modules automatically search for a free channel within
the permitted range. The basic radio channels can be
displayed using WinPara or FSP-5000-RPS.
This means that a maximum of 16 RF Expansion
Modules (recommended is a maximum of 10) may be
installed within one area (max. distance 40 m/max.
attenuation 90 dB). The installation of additional RF
Expansion Modules has to be checked on a case-by-
case basis depending on whether the radio range does
affect that of the first RF Expansion Module group
(with a max. of 16 RF Expansion Modules).
The RF Expansion Modules and the RF Smoke Detectors

must not be installed in a metal cabinet.
The necessary room for servicing (e. g. replacing

batteries) and repair must be taken into account.
Connection and Power Supply
An FK 100 LSN must not be connected to an

NAK 100 LSN Branch Interface.
A separate power supply is necessary for the module,

the microprocessor and the peripherals.
Power is supplied to the LSN components in the

FK 100 LSN via two wires in the LSN line.
6
The wire pair of the separate power supply can be

looped through to provide power to the downstream
LSN elements.
Note If the power supply to the FK 100 LSN is
disconnected, the batteries must be removed
from the RF Smoke Detectors!
Accessories
If wall structures or other structural properties of a

building are not known, field strength measurements
are taken using the DZW 1171 wireless test unit to
ensure more reliable planning.
The Radiospy software with field strength measurement

unit is a convenient tool for checking the planning for a
radio cell and displaying it graphically using a PC/
laptop.
The DBZ 1193A detector identification for the

DOW 1171 is a polycarbonate holder with cover for
holding an identifier plate.
The exchanger device ensures convenient detector

replacement for the DOW 1171 RF Smoke Detector.
For commissioning a wireless system without a fire

panel (FACP), a magnet is needed to activate the reed
contact in the RF Expansion Module.
FK 100 LSN device construction
6
7
9
8
11
10
Betrieb
Strung
Alarm
100
3
5
,
7
1
3
5
20
4
1
2
3
5
3
3
7
,
4
Pos. Description
1 Cover with embedded fibre-optic cables
2 Lower part of housing
3 Pre-prepared inputs/outputs for surface-mounting cable ducts
4 Cover screw
5 Optical fibers for LED display indicating operating state
6 Reed contact
7 Radio module
8 Interface board
9 Tamper contact
10 LED display indicating operating state
11 Terminal block
Planning a wireless cell
The range that can be achieved by a radio system in a

building is generally dependent on the reflection and
absorption responses of the materials used and on the
design of the ceilings and walls!
Line of sight visibility between the wireless components

is not necessary.
The RF Expansion Module should always be positioned

right between the RF Smoke Detectors/Manual Call
Points. Since radio propagation is spherical, the
connection is not restricted to a single floor.
To determine the actual attenuation at the installation

site, the attenuation given by distance must be added
to the attenuation values of each construction
element (walls, ceilings). The total attenuation of the
transmission path must not exceed 90 dB.
The limiting values and calculation examples apply both

to the RF Expansion Module - RF Smoke Detector radio
link and to the RF Expansion Module RF Expansion
Module radio link.
Attenuation of the transmission path from distance with
line of sight
In buildings, doubling of the distance between RF

Expansion Module and RF detector raises the
attenuation figure by 16 to 17 dB.
Distance [m] 5 10 15 20 25 30 40
Attenuation [dB] 40 57 67 74 79 83 90
Attenuation from construction elements in buildings
Construction element Attenuation values
Room dividers very low 1 dB
Dry brick walls or concrete walls/ceilings low 6 dB
Limestone brick average -10 dB
Limestone building blocks average -10 dB
Wood framed or wood panelled walls average -10 dB
Damp brick walls average -10 dB
Coated plasterboard, double walls high 15 dB
Steel-reinforced concrete high -30 dB
Thick damp brick walls very high 40 dB
Calculation example
The FK 100 LSN RF Expansion Module is mounted under a
reinforced concrete ceiling. The dividing walls are made
from concrete.
SMF121
4
4 m
Pos. Description
1-3 Transmission paths, see calculation example
A Reinforced concrete ceiling
B Concrete wall
Transmission Path 1:
5 m distance + reinforced concrete ceiling = 40 dB + 30 dB
= 70 dB
6
Automatic Fire Detectors | LSN RF Fire Detection Systems | 155
15 m distance + reinforced concrete ceiling + concrete wall
= 67 dB + 30 dB + 6 dB = 103 dB
10 m distance + concrete wall = 57 dB + 6 dB = 63 dB
4 m distance = 35 dB
Transmission paths 1, 3 and 4 can be operated:
total attenuation < 90 dB.
The detector for transmission path 2 can no longer be
reached:
total attenuation 103 dB > 90 dB permissible total
attenuation.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 FK 100 LSN RF Expansion Module, incl. connection terminals
Qty. Components
1 Optical RF Smoke Detector
2 9 V lithium battery
1 Detector base
Qty. Components
1 SMF121 RF Manual Call Point
Note With the SMF121 RF Manual Call Point, one
SMF6120 RF Base as well as two HFMBAT
Lithium Batteries 3.6 V have to be ordered in
addition.
Electrical
Operating voltage
LSN components +10 V +33 V DC
Other components +20 V +30 V DC

Current consumption
LSN components 6 mA
Other components < 20 mA

Mechanical
Dimensions (W x H x D) 135 x 100 x 35.7mm
Housing material Plastic ABS, Terluran
Color Light gray, RAL 9002
Ambient conditions
Permissible operating temperature -10 C. +55 C
Planning
Maximum range in buildings 40 m
Max. number of FK 100 LSN 16
Max. number of DOW 1171 30 per FK 100 LSN
Max. number of SMF121 10 per FK 100 LSN
Special features
Frequency range 868 to 870 MHz (SRD band)
Channel spacing 25 kHz
Transmitting power Max. 5 mW
DOW 1171 RF Smoke Detector
Electrical
Voltage supply Two 9 V lithium batteries
Battery life cycle Approx. 5 years
Average current consumption 0.07 mA
Mechanical
Dimensions (W x H x D) 119 x 73mm
Housing material Plastic PC/ABS
Housing color White, similar to RAL 9002
Ambient conditions
Protection class according to
EN 60529
IP 44
ture
-10 C +55 C
Permitted relative humidity < 95% at T < 34 C
Planning
Range in buildings 40 m
Maximum number of DOW 1171 30 per FK 100 LSN
Special features
Detection principle Scattered light measurement
SMF121 RF Manual Call Point with SMF6120 RF Base
Electrical
Voltage supply Two 3.6 V lithium batteries
Battery life cycle Approx. 5 years
Current consumption 0.06 mA
Mechanical
Dimensions (W x H x D)
SMF121 125 mm x 125 mm x 36,5 mm
SMF6120 116,3 mm x 116,3 mm x 42 mm
SMF121 incl. SMF6120 125 mm x 125 mm x 56,5 mm

Housing material ABS
LED red
Housing color red, RAL 3000
6
Weight
SMF121 ca. 200 g
SMF6120 ca. 185 g
HFM-BAT ca. 20 g
Ambient conditions
Permissible operating temperature -10 C 55 C
Permitted relative humidity Max. 95 %
Protection class according to
EN 60529
IP 43
Planning
Max. range in buildings 30 m
Max. number of SMF121 10 per FK 100 LSN
FK 100 LSN RF Expansion Module FK 100 LSN RF
DOW 1171 Optical RF Smoke Detector DOW1171 RF
DZW 1171 Radio Test Unit DZW 1171
Radio Spy 1 Field Strength Measuring Unit
and Software
RADIO SPY 1
DBZ 1193A Detector identification DOW1171-ident
Exchanger Device for DO1101AEx and
DOW 1171
fits only on Siemens service poles
FAA-RTL-SIEMENS
Lithium Block Battery 9 V for Optical RF
Smoke Detector DOW 1171
DU = 1 unit
IPP-9V-Block
For RF Manual Call Point please order sepa-
rately:
1 x SMF6120 RF Base
2 x HFMBAT Lithium Battery 3.6 V for
SMF6120
SMF121
SMF6120 RF Base SMF6120
HFMBAT Lithium Battery 3.6 V for
SMF6120
HFM-BAT
6
Automatic Fire Detectors | Accessories - LSN RF Fire Detection System | 157
DZW 1171 Radio Test Unit
Field strength measuring device for planning and checking
the maximum reach of a RF Fire Detection System in
unknown building structures.
Device A is fixed in position at the predetermined
installation location of the RF Interface Module. Device B is
taken to the intended place of installation of the RF Smoke
Detector DOW 1171 and checks whether the permitted
attenuation of the radio signal is not exceeded.
DZW 1171 Radio Test Unit DZW 1171
Radio Spy 1 Field Strength
Measuring Unit and Soft-
ware
Field Strength Measuring Unit and Software, for easy PC-
based planning and graphic representation of a RF Fire
Detection System.
The Radio Spy 1 functions in a manner similar to the Radio
Test Unit, although the field strength and configuration of
the RF Fire Detection System are shown graphically on the
screen.
Radio Spy 1 Field Strength Measuring Unit
and Software
RADIO SPY 1
6
158 | Automatic Fire Detectors | Accessories - LSN RF Fire Detection System
DBZ 1193A Detector iden-
tification
DBZ 1193A
Holder made of polycarbonate with hinged lid, for safe
insertion of a identifier plate size 58 mm x 19 mm
DBZ 1193A Detector identification DOW1171-ident
Exchanger device for the
DOW 1171 RF smoke
detector
Note The detector exchanger fits only on Siemens
service poles.
The service pole is not included in the scope of
delivery.
Exchanger device for the DOW 1171 RF
smoke detector
for Siemens service poles
FAA-RTL-Siemens
6
Automatic Fire Detectors | Conventional Detectors | 159
FCP500 Conventional
Automatic Fire Detectors
Features
Modern, ultra-flat design
Matches the surrounding decor by using color toning
inserts
Smooth, easily-cleaned detector surface
Innovative fastening mechanism
High reliability
FCP500 Conventional Automatic Fire Detectors satisfy the
most demanding aesthetic requirements owing to their flat
design, which offers flush ceiling mounting and the option
of color matching.
The FCP500 is available as a scattered light smoke detector
or as a multi-sensor detector with an additional gas sensor.
The respective versions of the detectors are available in
white or transparent with color inserts.
Functions
The smooth, flush-installation surface means the FCP500
detectors can be installed in areas with high aesthetic
requirements. In addition, the fire detectors are suitable for
areas with heightened dust exposure.
The detectors and trim rings in the "transparent with color
inserts" version are always supplied complete with
reversible printed color rings, which offer a choice of
16 colors for individual color matching.
All detectors in the FCP500 series are equipped with two
optical sensors and a pollution sensor. The FCPOC 500
multisensor detector contains a gas sensor as an additional
detection channel.
All sensor signals are constantly analyzed by the internal
signal evaluation electronics and are linked with each other
through algorithms.
By linking the optical sensors and the gas sensor, the OC
detector can also be used in places where the work carried
out gives rise to small amounts of smoke, steam or dust. The
alarm will only be triggered automatically if the signal
combination corresponds with the detectors characteristic
diagram. Consequently, a very high reliability against false
alarms is obtained.
The optical sensor (1) operates according to the scattered
light method. The LEDs (3) transmit light at a defined angle
into the scattered light area (7).
2 3
7
In case of fire, the light is scattered by the smoke particles
and strikes the photo diodes (2), which transform the
quantity of light into a proportional electrical signal.
1
1
2
3
3
2
4
5
6
6
160 | Automatic Fire Detectors | Conventional Detectors
Interference effects from daylight and commercial lighting
sources are filtered out with an optical daylight filter and by
the use of electronic filtering and phase-locked rectification
(ambient light stability: glare test DIN EN 547).
The various light-emitting and photo diodes of the sensor
are individually controlled by the detector electronics.
Consequently, signal combinations are produced that are
independent of each other and ideally suitable for the
detection of smoke, which makes it possible to differentiate
between smoke and interference agents (insects, objects).
In addition, the time characteristics and the correlation of
the optical sensor signals for the fire or interference
detection are evaluated.
Moreover, plausibility checking of the various signals makes
it possible to detect errors in the analysis electronics and
the LEDs.
The gas sensor (4) detects mainly the carbon monoxide
(CO) that is produced by a fire, but it also detects hydrogen
(H) and nitrogen monoxide (NO).
The basic measuring principle is CO oxidation on an
electrode and the measurable current that arises from this.
The sensor signal value is proportional to the concentration
of gas.
The gas sensor delivers additional information to effectively
suppress deceptive values.
FCPOC 500 detector switches off the C sensors after five
years of operation. The detector will continue to function as
an O detector. The detector should then be exchanged
reliability of detection of the OC detector.
Pollution sensor
The contamination level on the detector surface is
continually measured by the pollution sensor (6); the result
is evaluated and indicated.
Contamination of the detector surface leads to active
adaptation of the threshold value (closed-circuit value
correction).
Various operating states are indicated on the detector by
means of a clearly visible two-color LED. In the event of an
alarm, the LED flashes red.
The innovative detector locking, which operates on the
ballpoint-pen principle, provides fast and simple insertion
and replacement of the detector. We recommend the
specially developed FAA500RTL exchanger device,
especially in the case of high installation heights.
To allow convenient detector testing, the FAA500TTL test
adapter with magnet and additional service accessories is
available.
Comply with:
EN54-7:2000/A1:2002/A2:2006
Europe CE FCP-500
CPD 0786-CPD-20203 FCP-O 500 / 500-P
0786-CPD-20204 FCP-OC500 / 500-P
Germany VdS G 205124 FCP-O 500/500-P
G 205118 FCP-OC 500/500-P
Belgium BOSEC TCC2-K658 FCP-O 500, FCP-O 500-P,
FCA-500-EU, FCA-500-E-EU
Russia GOST POCC DE.C313.B06297
Can be connected to:

-
Conventional Fire Panel BZ 1012/1016/1024/1060
-
Universal Fire Panel UEZ 1000
-
Universal Fire Panel UGM 2020
-
Other panels or their receiver modules with
identical connection conditions
-
UEZ 2000 LSN, BZ 500 LSN, FPA5000 and
FPA1200 via appropriate interfaces
The detectors and detector bases can be used together

with the Rotaris lamp by Philips.
The FCPOC 500, like the FCPO 500, is planned

according to the guidelines for optical detectors (see
DIN VDE 0833 Part 2 and VDS 2095).
The detectors must be installed exclusively in the

FCA500 bases provided. In addition, the detector base
must be installed in an FAA500BB ceiling mount back
box or in FAA500SB surface mount back box.
Note For flush ceiling mounting with FAA500BB:
The false ceiling may have a maximum
thickness of
Note 32 mm. Above the false ceiling, a free height of
at least 110 mm is required.
FCP500 detectors are not intended for outdoor use.
A hemispherical space with a radius of 50 cm must

remain free below the detectors.
1
5
0

c
m
2
3
1 Detector
2 Ceiling
3 hemispherical space below the detector
Care must be taken to ensure that neither people, larger

animals, plants nor any objects intrude into this area
and that no parts of the detector surface become
covered.
The detectors may only be installed in a position which

is out of arm's reach. We therefore recommend a
minimum installation height of 2.70 m.
6
The detectors may not be installed in rooms in which

data is transmitted by means of high-intensity infra-red
light (e. g. in rooms with IR systems for interpreters).
The detectors must be mounted so that they are not

exposed to any direct sunlight.
A minimum distance of 50 cm from lamps must be

maintained. The detectors may not be mounted in a
cone of light from lamps.
The bases are equipped as standard with a spring which

is suitable for installation of the detector in false
ceilings. When the detector is installed in concrete or
wooden ceilings, these need to be replaced by the
stronger springs FAA500SPRING with red markings.
Maximum permitted air speed: 20 m/s

Parts Included
FCP-O 500 1 Optical Smoke Detector, White
FCP-O 500-P 1 Optical Smoke Detector, Transparent with
Color Inserts
FCP-OC 500 1 Multisensor Detector Optical/Chemical,
White
FCP-OC 500-P 1 Multisensor Detector Optical/Chemical,
Electrical
Operating voltage 8.5 V DC bis 33 V DC
Standby current
FCA-500-EU 3 mA
FCA-500-E-EU 24 mA
Alarm current 47 mA
Fault current
FCA-500-EU 52 mA
FCA-500-E-EU 58 mA
Alarm resistance 0 (UL application) or 680
Fault relay output NC / C
Indicator output Relay connects 0 V over 1.5 k
Mechanics
Individual display Two-color LED,
red (alarm), green (test mode)
Dimensions
Detector 113 x 55 mm
Detector with trim ring 150 x 55 mm
Detector with cover, base and
ceiling mount back box
150 x 110 mm
Front plate color
FCPO 500/ FCPOC 500 Signal white matt
FCPO 500P/ FCPOC 500P Transparent/silver-gray
FCP-OC 500(-P) 180 g / 370 g
FCP-O 500(-P) 170 g / 360 g
Trim Ring 30 g / 60 g
EN 60529
FCPO 500 (P) IP 53
FCPOC 500 (P) IP 33
ature
FCPO 500 (P) -20 C bis +65 C
FCPOC 500 (P) -10 C bis +50 C
Planning
Monitoring area
Max. 120 m
2
Maximum installation height Max. 16 m
Minimum installation height Out of arm's reach
Minimum installation height recommended
by BOSCH: 2.70 m
In the case of flush ceiling
mounting with ceiling mount
back box
Thickness of the false ceiling Max. 32 mm
Required bored hole 130 mm (-1 mm bis +5 mm)
Installation depth 110 mm
Note: Above the false ceiling, a free height
of at least 110 mm is required.
Minimum distance to lamps 0.5 m
Special features
Detection principle
FCPO 500 (P) Scattered light measurement
FCPOC 500 (P) Combination of scattered light measurement

and combustion gas measurement
Features
All FCP500 detec-

tors
Contamination detection
Drift compensation (optical section)
In addition, for
FCPOC 500(-P)
Drift compensation in the gas sensor section
FCPO 500 (P) < 0.18 dB/m ( EN 547)
FCPOC 500 (P) Optical section: < 0.36 dB/m (EN 547)
Gas sensor section: in ppm range
6
FCPO 500 Optical Smoke Detector, White FCP-O 500
FCPO 500P Optical Smoke Detector,
FCP-O 500-P
FCPOC 500 Multisensor Detector Optical/
Chemical, White
FCP-OC 500
FCPOC 500P Multisensor Detector
Optical/Chemical, Transparent with Color
Inserts
FCP-OC 500-P
Accessories
FAA-500-TR-W
Color Inserts
FAA-500-TR-P
FCA500EU Conventional Base
for the FCP-500 Series detectors
FCA-500-EU
FCA500EEU Conventional Base EOL
for the FCP500 Series detectors, with inte-
grated EOL resistor
FCA-500-E-EU
Fire Detectors
FAA-500-BB
Ceilings
FAA-500-CB
with Damp Room Seal
FAA-500-SB-H
Ceilings
(DU = 10 units)
FAA-500-SPRING
6
FCP-500 Conventional Automatic Fire Detectors

FCP-O 500 FCP-O 500-P FCP-OC 500 FCP-OC 500-P
Detector type optical optical optical/chemical optical/chemical
Operating voltage 8.5 V DC . . . 33 V DC 8.5 V DC . . . 33 V DC 8.5 V DC . . . 33 V DC 8.5 V DC . . . 33 V DC
Current consumption
- Standby current FCA-500-EU: 3 mA
FCA-500-E-EU: 24 mA
FCA-500-EU: 3 mA
FCA-500-E-EU: 24 mA
FCA-500-EU: 3 mA
FCA-500-E-EU: 24 mA
FCA-500-EU: 3 mA
FCA-500-E-EU: 24 mA
- Alarm current 47 mA 47 mA 47 mA 47 mA
- Fault current FCA-500-EU: 52 mA
FCA-500-E-EU: 58 mA
FCA-500-EU: 52 mA
FCA-500-E-EU: 58 mA
FCA-500-EU: 52 mA
FCA-500-E-EU: 58 mA
FCA-500-EU: 52 mA
FCA-500-E-EU: 58 mA
perature
-20 C . . . +65 C -20 C . . . +65 C -10 C . . . +50 C -10 C . . . +50 C
Monitoring area max. 120 m max. 120 m max. 120 m max. 120 m
Maximum installation
height
16 m 16 m 16 m 16 m
Color white transparent with color
inserts
white transparent with color
inserts
6
FCP320/FCH320 Conven-
tional Automatic Fire
Detectors
Features
High reliability of detection thanks to evaluation
electronics
Active adjustment of the threshold (drift
compensation) if the optical sensor becomes dirty
Activation of a remote external detector alarm display
possible
Mechanical removal lock
(can be activated/deactivated)
Dust-repellent labyrinth and cap construction
All detectors have an Chamber Maid Plugat the
bottom for cleaning the optical chamber with
compressed air (not required with the Heat Detector
FCH-T320.
The FCP320/FCH320 Series Conventional Automatic Fire
Detectors set new standards in fire detection technology
through a combination of optical, thermal and chemical
(gas) sensors and intelligent evaluation electronics. Their
most impressive feature is their ability to prevent false
alarms, as well as speed and accuracy of detection.
The enhanced operating voltage range of 8,5 V DC up to
30 V DC and the two variants with 820 alarm resistor or
470 alarm resistor enables the detector application with
nearly all conventional fire panels.
System Overview
Operating mode Detector type
FCP-
OC320
FCP-
OT320
FCP-
O320
FCH-T320/
T320-FSA
Combined x x - -
Optical (scattered light
measurement)
x x x -
Thermal max. - x - x
Thermal differential - x - x
Chemical (gas measure-
ment)
x - - -
Functions
The FCP-OC320 and FCP-OT320 Multisensor Detectors
each combine two detection principles. All sensor signals
are analyzed continually by the internal evaluation
electronics and are linked with each other.
If a signal combination fits the detector's programmed code
field, an alarm is automatically triggered. By linking the
sensors, the combined detectors can also be used in places
where work carried out gives rise to light smoke, steam or
dust.
The optical sensor uses the scattered-light method.
An LED transmits light to the measuring chamber, where it
is absorbed by the labyrinth structure. In the event of a fire,
smoke enters the measuring chamber and the smoke
particles scatter the light from the LED. The amount of light
hitting the photo diode is converted into a proportional
electrical signal.
Thermal sensor (temperature sensor)
A thermistor in a resistance network is used as a thermal
sensor; an analog-digital converter measures the
temperature-dependent voltage at regular intervals.
When the maximum temperature of 54C is exceeded
(thermal maximum), or if the temperature rises by a defined
amount within a specified time (thermal differential), the
temperature sensor triggers the alarm status.
The main function of the gas sensor is to detect carbon
monoxide (CO) generated as a result of a fire, but it will also
detect hydrogen (H) and nitrous monoxide (NO). The
sensor signal value is proportional to the concentration of
gas. The gas sensor delivers additional information to
effectively suppress deceptive values.
Depending on the service life of the gas sensor, the OC 310
detector switches off the C sensors after five years of
operation. The detector will continue to function as an O
detector. The detector should then be exchanged
reliability of detection of the OC detector.
6
Special features Detector type
FCP-
OC320
FCP-
OT320
FCP-
O320
FCH-T320 /
T320-FSA
Drift compensation in op-
tical unit
x x x -
Drift compensation in the
gas sensor
x - - -
The detectors comply wirh:
Europe CE FCP-/FCH-320
CPD 0786-CPD-20353 FCH-T320_FCH-
T320-R470
0786-CPD-20354 FCH-T320-FSA
0786-CPD-20351 FCP-O320_FCP-
O320-R470
0786-CPD-20355 FCP-OC320_FCP-
OC320-R470
0786-CPD-20352 FCP-OT320_FCP-
OT320-R470
Germany VdS G 208003 FCH-T320_-R470
G 208004 FCH-T320-FSA
G 208001 FCP-O320_-R470
G 208002 FCP-OT320_-R470
G 208005 FCP-OC320_-R470
Detector type EN545:2000/
A1:2002
EN547:2000/
A1:2002
FCP-OC320
FCP-OC320-R470
FCP-OT320
FCP-OT320-R470
FCP-O320
FCP-O320-R470
FCH-T320
FCP-T320-R471
FCH-T320-FSA
Up to 32 detectors can be connected per primary line.
Maximum cable length: 1000 m, for J-

Y(St) Y n x 2 x 0.6/0.8

VDE/DIBt
Planning for multisensor detectors follows the

guidelines for optical detectors, unless a specific VdS
planning guideline is available (see DIN VDE 0833 Part 2
and VDS 2095).
The OC and OT types are planned using the guidelines

for optical detectors if operated as optical detectors or
as combined detectors; see DIN VDE 0833 Part 2 and
VDS 2095.
When planning fire barriers according to DIBt, you have

to use the FCH-T320-FSA. This detector has the
characteristic curve corresponds to class A1R.
Parts Included
Detector type Qty
.
Components
FCP-OC320 1 Multisensor Detector Optical/Chemical
FCP-OT320 1 Multisensor Detector Optical/Thermal
FCP-O320 1 Optical Smoke Detector
FCH-T320 1 Heat Detector (Thermal Differential/Thermal Maxi-
mum)
FCH-T320-FSA 1 Heat Detector for Fire Barriers conforming to DIBt,
Quality-controlled (Thermal Differential/Thermal
Maximum)
Electrical
Alarm output Increase in current
(alarm resistance 820 or 470 )
Indicator output Open collector connects 0 V in the event
of an alarm over 3.92 k
Mechanics
Dimensions
Without base 99.5 x 52 mm
With base 120 x 63.5 mm

Housing material Plastic, ABS
Housing color White, similar to RAL 9010, matt fin-
ish
FCP-OC320 Approx. 85 g / approx 130 g
FCP-OT320 / FCP-O320 /
FCH-T320 / FCH-T320-FSA
Approx. 80 g / approx. 120 g
Protection class as per EN 60529 IP 30,
IP 32 with detector base with damp
room seal
Permissible operating temperature
FCP-OC320 -10 C . . . +50 C
FCP-OT320 -20 C . . . +50 C
FCP-O320 -20 C . . . +65 C
FCH-T320 / T320-FSA -20 C . . . +50 C

6
Planning
Monitoring area
FCP-OC320, FCP-OT320,
FCP-O320
Max. 120 m
2
(Heed local guide-
lines!)
FCH-T320
Max. 40 m
2
FCP-OC320, FCP-OT320,
FCP-O320
16 m (Heed local guidelines!)
FCH-T320 6 m (Heed local guidelines!)

Special features
Optical part < 0.2 dB/m, in line with EN 54 T7
Thermal maximum part >54 C
Thermal rate-of-rise part

(in line with prEN 545)
FCH-T320: A2R
FCH-T320-FSA: A1R
Chemical part In ppm range

Color code
FCP-OC320 Blue ring
FCP-OT320 Black ring
FCP-O320 No marking
FCH-T320 / T320-FSA Red ring

FCPOC320 Multisensor Detector Optical/
Chemical
with 820 Ohm alarm resistor
FCP-OC320
FCPOC320R470 Multisensor Detector
Optical/Chemical
FCP-OC320-R470
FCPOT320 Multisensor Detector Optical/
Thermal
FCP-OT320
FCPOT320R470 Multisensor Detector
Optical/Thermal
FCP-OT320-R470
FCPO320 Optical Smoke Detector
FCP-O320
FCPO320R470 Optical Smoke Detector
FCP-O320-R470
FCHT320 Heat Detector
thermal differential/thermal maximum detec-
tor, with 820 Ohm alarm resistor
FCH-T320
FCHT320R470 Heat Detector
FCH-T320-R470
FCH-T320-FSA Heat Detector, for Fire
Barriers conforming to DIBt
FCH-T320-FSA
Accessories
feed
MS 400
Seal
feed
MSF 400
Seal
MSC 420
MSR 320 Conventional Detector Base with
Relay
MSR 320
MSD 320 Conventional Detector Base with
Diode
MSD 320
MPA
False Floor Stilts
FMX-DET-MB
MK 400
SSK 400
Identification
TP4 400
Identification
TP8 400
6
FCP-320/FCH-320 Conventional Automatic Fire Detectors

FCP-O320 FCP-OC320 FCP-OT320
Detector type optical optical/chemical optical/thermal
Operating voltage 8.5 V DC . . . 33 V DC 8.5 V DC . . . 33 V DC 8.5 V DC . . . 33 V DC
ture
-20 C . . . +65 C -10 C . . . +50 C -20 C . . . +50 C
Maximum installation height 16 m 16 m 16 m
Alarm resistance 820 820 820
Color code no marking blue loop black loop
For fire barriers conforming to
DIBt, quality-controlled

6

FCP-O320-R470 FCP-OC320-R470 FCP-OT320-R470
Detector type optical optical/chemical optical/thermal
ture
-20 C . . . +65 C -10 C . . . +50 C -20 C . . . +50 C
Color code no marking blue loop black loop

6

FCH-T320 FCH-T320-R470 FCH-T320-FSA
Detector type thermal differential/thermal
maximum
thermal differential/thermal
maximum
thermal differential/thermal
maximum
ture
-20 C . . . +50 C -20 C . . . +50 C -20 C . . . +50 C
Color code red loop red loop red loop

6
DO1101AEx Optical
Smoke Detector for Ex
Areas
Features
Elegant, compact and robust design
Deception-proof operating behaviour
High level of resistance to temperature fluctuations,
humidity, corrosion and contamination
High resistance to interference through current gain
The DO1101AEx is an Optical Smoke Detector for the
detection of smoldering and flaming fires in potentially
explosive areas in zones 1 and 2.
System Overview
FLM-420/4-CON
EOL22(Ex)
DM 1103 B-Ex DM 1103 B-Ex
DO1101A-Ex
DCA1192 SB3
DCA1192 SB3
DFA1101A-Ex
DO1101A-Ex
1 2
Pos. Description
1 Non-Ex area
2 Ex area zone 1 or 2
Functions
The optical sensor in the smoke detector uses the
scattered-light method. An LED transmits light to the
measuring chamber, where it is absorbed by the labyrinth
structure. In the event of a fire, smoke enters the measuring
chamber and the smoke particles scatter the light from the
LED. The amount of light hitting the photo diode is
converted into a proportional electrical signal.
The entire electronic system is protected inside the
detector. The base is only used for the detector contact.
Europe CE DO 1101A-Ex
Germany VdS G 296052 DO 1101A-Ex
PTB 02 ATEX 2135 DO1101A-Ex
Hungary TMT TMT-89/09/2004 DO 1101A-Ex
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 DO1101A-Ex Optical Smoke Detector
Electrical
Standby current consumption 0.1 mA
Mechanics
Connection terminals
0.2 mm
2
. . . 2.5 mm
2
Dimensions (D x H)
Detector 116 mm x 51 mm
Detector incl. base 116 mm x 61 mm

Housing material
Detector Plastic, ABS
Base Plastic (ASA)

Color (detector and base) White, RAL 9010
Weight incl. base 185 g
Permissible operating temperature -25 C . . . +60C
Permissible storage temperature -40C . . . +75C
Permissible relative humidity 95%
6
Planning
Monitoring area as per EN 547
Max. 120 m
2
Special features
Detection principle Scattered light measurement
Explosion classification in line with
IEC 60079 and EN 50020
Eex ib IIC T4 (Ta 60 C)
DO1101AEx Optical Smoke Detector for Ex
Areas
DO1101A-Ex
Accessories
Base for DO1101AEx Smoke Detector DO1101A-EX-BASE
DBZ 1191 Additional Base
for the standard base of the DO1101AEx
DBZ1191
DBZ 1192 Additional Base for Damp Rooms
DBZ1191+BOX
DBZ 1193A Detector Identification
Purchase order quantity must be 10 or multiple
of 10.
DOW1171-IDENT
SB3 Safety Barrier incl. DCA1192 Input/
Output Module
SB3
6
172 | Automatic Fire Detectors | Accessories - Series 500 Conventional
FAA500TR-W Trim Ring,
White
White Trim Ring for 500 und 520 Series Fire Detectors
FAA-500-TR-W
FAA500TRP Trim Ring,
Transparent with Color
Inserts
Trim Ring for the "transparent with color inserts" Fire
Detectors in the 500 and 520 Series
Color Inserts
FAA-500-TR-P
6
Automatic Fire Detectors | Accessories - Series 500 Conventional | 173
FCA500EU Conventional
Base
For installation of FCP500 detectors.
Functions
The screw-type terminals guarantee a secure electrical
connection through the clamped contacts when mounting
the FCP500 detector.
The bases are provided with three holders for cable ties.
Fault relay (C, NC)
Alarm relay (NO, C)
C-point
Shielding
Cable cross section
0.3 mm
2
3.3 mm
2
Dimensions (D x H) 145.6 x 63.5 mm
Weight (without / with packag-
ing)
200 g / 280 g
FCA500EU Conventional Base
for the FCP-500 Series detectors
FCA-500-EU
FAA500BB Ceiling Mount
Back Box
The FAA500BB Ceiling Mount Back Box is necessary for
flush ceiling installation in false ceilings when mounting 500
and 520 Series Bases and Fire Detectors.
Mounting dimensions
Maximum thickness of the false

ceiling
32 mm
Mounting height 11 cm
Required bore hole 130 mm (-1 mm/+5 mm)

Max. cable diameter 1.4 cm
Housing color White
Weight (without/with packaging) 100 g/200 g
Fire Detectors
FAA-500-BB
6
FAA500CB Built-in
Housing for Concrete Ceil-
ings
FAA500CB Built-in Housings are used to install 500 and
520 Series Fire Detectors in concrete ceilings. These make
it possible to position cable ducts with ease and precision.
A Ceiling Mount Back Box is installed in the Built-in Housing
which receives the base and the detector.
System Overview
1
202
ca. 150
75
226
226
Pos. Description
1 Front part
Ceilings
FAA-500-CB
FAA500SB Surface Mount
Back Box
Functions

Weight Approx. 195 g/300 g (without/with pack-
aging)
6
FAA500SB-H Surface
Mount Back Box with
Damp Room Seal
The FAA500SBH has an additional seal for damp rooms.
Functions

Weight (without/with packag-
ing)
Approx. 225 g/330 g
with Damp Room Seal
FAA-500-SB-H
6
FAA500SPRING for
Concrete/Wooden Ceilings
DU = 10 units
The bases of the 500 Series are fitted with spring as
standard. This is suitable for installing the detector in false
ceilings.
When the detector is installed in concrete or wooden
ceilings, these need to be replaced by the stronger FAA-500-
SPRING springs with red markings.
Ceilings
(DU = 10 units)
FAA-500-SPRING
FAA500RTL Exchanger
Device
The FAA500RTL Exchanger Device for the insertion and
removal of detectors of the 500 and 520 Series, fits on the
SOLO100 Telescopic Access Pole.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 FAA500RTL Exchanger Device for Detectors of the 500 and
520 Series
Note The SOLO100 Telescopic Access Pole is not
included in the scope of delivery.
FAA500RTL Exchanger Device
for Detectors of the 500 and 520 Series
FAA-500-RTL
6
FAA500TTL Test Adapter
with Magnet
The FAA500TTL Test Adapter is placed on the SOLO330
Smoke Detector Tester. It serves to test detectors in the
500 and 520 Series.
Functions
The magnet integrated into the Test Adapter switches the
detector into test mode automatically by activating the reed
switch. The operating mode of the detector is indicated by
its two-color LED.
For the detector test of the 500 and 520 Series, you will
need:
FAA500TTL Test Adapter
SOLO330 Smoke Detector Tester

Also required for detectors with CO sensor:
Solo CO Testing gas

Note For the detectors in the 500 and 520 Series, no
test aerosol is required for optical smoke
detectors!
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 FAA-500-TTL Test Adapter with Magnet
FAA500TTL Test Adapter with Magnet
The FAA500TTL Test Adapter is placed on the
SOLO330 Smoke Detector Tester. It serves to
test detectors in the 500 and 520 Series.
FAA-500-TTL
6
The detector head is installed in the Detector Base MS 400.
The base is suitable for surface-mounted cable feeds as well
as for flush-mounted cable feeds, and has separate
attachment points for ceiling mount/flush-mounted back
boxes. In addition, it fits all standard bore patterns.
The Detector Base made of white ABS plastic (Novodur,
color similar to RAL 9010) has a matt finish and seven
terminal screws to connect the detector and its features to
the fire panel.
Contacts connected to the terminals guarantee a secure
electric connection when the detector module is installed.
Cables up to 2.5 mm
2
in diameter can be used.
Installation information for 400/420 Series Detector
Bases
The drill holes marked with an "X" may only be used to

mount the base to flush-mounted back boxes.
Keep shielded auxiliary wire as short as possible, and

make sure this is insulated.
100
1
4
2
2
.
7
7
,
8
120
+
V
0
V
b
1
b
2
a
a
2
1
/
c
X
X
c
a
.

5
5
LSN (a1/a2, b1, b2)
C-point
Shielding
Housing color Similar to RAL 9010
Weight 72 g
feed
MS 400
6
MSF 400 Detector Base
with Damp Room Seal
The MSF 400 Detector Base is available for use of the
detector in a humid environment.
With the integrated seal made of TPE, the detector base
MSF 400 protects the detector effectively against the entry
of condensation water.
Installation information for damp room seal
Do not cut into the damp room seal on the cable feeds.
Instead, pierce these using a pointed implement, and
then draw the cable through.
LSN (a1/a2, b1, b2)
C-point
Shielding
Housing
Seal material TPE

Weight 90 g
Seal
feed
MSF 400
MSC 420 Additional Base
with Damp Room Seal
The Additional Base MSC 420 was conceived specially for
surface-mounted cable feeds with cable protection
conduits and has 2 opposing pre-cut inlets of 20 mm
diameter and 2 additional opposing and prepared inlets for
up to 28 mm diameter.
To protect against condensation water penetration, a seal
made of TPE is situated on the base of the MSC 420.
Seal material TPE
Weight 74 g
Seal
MSC 420
6
MSR 320 Conventional
Detector Base with Relay
For use according to British Standard, the Series 320
detector is mounted in the MSR 320 Conventional Detector
Base with Relay.
The MSR 320 is provided with an integrated relay that has
NO/C/NC contacts for switching applications (e. g.
dampers, door holders, etc.).
The detector unit can be protected against unauthorized
removal with a variable locking bar.
Note For EOL resistance refer to fire panel
instructions.
Mounting notes for the MSR 320
The bases are prepared for surface cable feed at four

positions with prepared knockouts.
Flush mounting cable feed occurs through the base

center.
Keep the shielding wire as short as possible and isolate

it.
a1/a2, b1, b2
C-point
Shielding
Relay (NO, C, NC)
Relay contact load 1 A @ 30 V DC
Housing color similar RAL 9010
Weight 82 g
MSR 320 Conventional Detector Base with
Relay
MSR 320
6
MSD 320 Conventional
Detector Base with Diode
For use according to British Standard, the Series 320
detector is mounted in the MSD 320 Conventional Detector
Base with Diode.
The MSD 320 is provided with an integrated diode that
preserves the loop function if the detector is removed.
The detector unit can be protected against unauthorised
removal with a variable locking bar.
Note For EOL resistence refer to panel instructions.
Mounting notes for the MSD 320
The bases are prepared for surface cable feed at four

positions with prepared knockouts.
Flush mounting cable feed occurs through the base

center.
Choose shielding wire as short as possible and isolate

it.
a1/a2, b1, b2
C- point
Shielding
Housing color similar RAL 9010
Dimensions 120 x 22,7 mm
Weight 72 g
MSD 320 Conventional Detector Base with
Diode
MSD 320
6
MPA External Detector
Alarm Display according to
DIN 14623
The External Detector Alarm Display is required if the
detector is not directly visible or has been mounted in false
ceilings or false floors. The External Detector Alarm Display
should be mounted in corridors or access pathways to the
corresponding building sections or rooms.
The transparent red alarm display conforms to DIN 14623.
Europe CE MPA
Germany VdS G 294052 MPA
O/T 300/400, DKM/SKM 120, DM/SM
210, MPA
Poland CNBOP 2095/2006 MPA
between a LSN detector and an External
Detector Alarm Display is restricted to a
maximum of 3 m.
(= sum of all cables to the External Detector
Alarm Display within one loop or stub).
Current consumption for display
T.2 Approx. 2 mA
T.3 Limited to approx. 13 mA
T.4 Limited to 20 mA maximum

Display medium 1 LED via a light guide
Permissible wire gauge 0.6 mm ... 0.8 mm
Weight 65 g
MPA
6
FAA420RI Remote Indi-
cator
The FAA420RI is an external detector alarm display and is
required if the detector is not directly visible or has been
mounted in false ceilings or false floors. The external
detector alarm display should be mounted in corridors or
access pathways of the corresponding building sections or
rooms.
Europe CE FAA-420-RI
between an LSN detector and an external
detector alarm display is restricted to a
maximum of 3 m.
(= sum of all cables to the external detector
alarm display within one loop or stub).
Maximum current consumption 20 mA
Display medium 2 LEDs
Permissible wire gauge 0.6 mm 2.0 mm
Weight 45 g
6
Mounting Bracket for Fire
Detectors on False Floor
Stilts
Mounting Bracket to mount the detector in floor cavities.
The detector base is not included in the scope of delivery.
False Floor Stilts
FMX-DET-MB
Console for DIBt compliant mounting of detectors above
doors etc.
The detector base is included in the scope of delivery.
Planning notes
Dimensions (L x B x H): 185 x 129 x 29 mm (without base)
MK 400
6
MH 400 Detector Heating
Element
The Detector Heating Element MH 400 is deployed at
locations where the functional safety of the detector might
be impaired by condensation (dew), e. g. in warehouses
which are briefly opened in order to allow vehicles to enter
and leave.
The integrated 1 k resistor has a nominal performance

of 3 W. With a looped-through 28 V power supply
(monitored), up to 10 Detector Heating Elements
MH 400 can be deployed per loop.
External power supply (not monitored) is possible.
The supply voltage may not be permitted to fall below

23 V.
SK 400 Protective Basket
In the case of installation of the detector e. g. in a sports
hall, the Protective Basket prevents balls or other sports
equipment hitting and possibly damaging the detector.
The robust Protective Basket consists of 5 mm round steel,
and is painted aluminum gray (RAL 9007).
Diameter (max.): 148 mm
Height: 75 mm
6
SSK 400 Protective Dust
Cover
The Protective Dust Cover SSK 400 protects a mounted
detector base with or without detector head against dirt
during building work.
The Protective Dust Cover made of polypropylene (PP) is
pushed onto the installed detector base.
SSK 400
15 / 4
to 65 x 34 mm.
printer or copier.
Identification
TP4 400
6
15 / 4
to 97 x 44 mm.
printer or copier.
Identification
TP8 400
6
188 | Automatic Fire Detectors | Accessories - DO1101A-Ex
Base for DO1101AEx
Smoke Detector
Standard Base with integrated rubber seal and terminal
block with efficient cutting/clamping function for wire
diameters from 0.6 mm to 0.8 mm
Cable diameter
0.2 mm
2
. . 2.5 mm
2
Housing material Plastic, ASA
Housing color White, RAL 9010
Dimensions (D x H) 113 x 26 mm
Weight Approx. 65 g
Permissible operating temperature -25 C . . . +70 C
Base for DO1101AEx Smoke Detector DO1101A-EX-BASE
6
Automatic Fire Detectors | Accessories - DO1101A-Ex | 189
Additional Base for the standard base of the DO1101AEx.
The additional base is required for attachment to uneven
surfaces and to feed surface cables with external diameters
of up to 14 mm. The standard base is placed on top and
attached with snap-action catches.
Cable diameter
0.2 mm
2
. . 2.5 mm
2
Dimensions (D x H)
(with detector and base)
116 x 78 mm
Weight Approx. 50 g
Permissible storage temperature -30 C . . . +75C
DBZ1191
6
190 | Automatic Fire Detectors | Accessories - DO1101A-Ex
for Damp Rooms
Additional Base for Damp Rooms for the standard base of
the DO1101AEx
This additional base for damp rooms is required for
installation in damp and dirty environments.
Surface cable feeds realized with PG16 threaded sections.
The standard base is placed on top and attached with snap-
action catches.
Housing material Plastic, ABS / PC-GF20
DBZ 1192 Additional Base for Damp Rooms
DBZ1191+BOX
DBZ 1193A Detector Iden-
tification
Holder made of polycarbonate with hinged lid, for safe
insertion of a identifier plate size 58 mm x 19 mm
Note Maximum typeface size 16 mm!
DBZ 1193A Detector Identification
Purchase order quantity must be 10 or multiple
of 10.
DOW1171-IDENT
6
Automatic Fire Detectors | Accessories - DO1101A-Ex | 191
SB3 Safety Barrier incl.
DCA1192 Input/Output
Module
Functions
The SB3 Safety Barrier limits the electrical energy between
non-inherently safe and inherently safe circuits and thus
prevents the ignition of gas mixtures by electrical sparks.
The Safety Barrier must always be installed outside the
explosive area.
The DCA1192 Input/Output Module is the galvanical
isolation between the fire panel and SB3 Safety Barrier.
Europe CE DC 1192
SB 3
CPD 0786-CPD-20512 DC 1192
Germany VdS G 298021 DC 1192
PTB 01 ATEX 2088 SB 3
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 SB3 Safety Barrier
1 Installation set for SB3
1 DCA1192 Input/Output Module
1 Terminal carrier for DCA1192
1 EOL22(Ex) line termination, included with the DCA1192
2 Housing with cover
SB3 Safety Barrier, with Housing
Max. voltage 28 V DC
Max. permissible current 100 mA
Max. output 0.7 W
Wire gauge
0.2 mm
2
. . . 2.5 mm
2
Cable bushings PG16 (6x)
Housing material Plastic, PC
Ignition protection according to
EN 50014/20
Inherent safety EEx ia IIC / IIB
DCA1192 Input/Output Module, with Housing
External supply
Current consumption Max. 5 mA
Line resistance 50 . . . 250
Line termination EOL22(Ex)

Line termination
Standby current 45 mA
Operating current 150 mA

Wire gauge
0.2 mm
2
. . . 2.5 mm
2
Permissible relative humidity 100% at T34 C
Output Module
SB3
6
192 | Automatic Fire Detectors | Specialty Detectors
FAS-420-TM Series Aspi-
rating Smoke Detectors
LSN improved version
Features
For connecting to the fire panels FPA-5000 and
FPA1200 with LSN improved technology
High deceptive alarm immunity with intelligent
LOGICSENS signal processing
Innovative fire source identification technology allows
the exact location of the fire to be pinpointed by
monitoring up to five distinct zones
Innovative airflow monitoring including single-hole
monitoring detects obstruction and breakage
Installation and commissioning made easy by plug-and-
play function
Easy to diagnose using FASASDDIAG Diagnostic
Software
Simple implementation of the pipe system planning
through patented aspiration reducing film sheets
Preservation of LSN loop functions in the event of wire
interruption or short-circuit through two integrated
isolators
The FAS420TM Series Aspirating Smoke Detectors are
specially designed for direct connection to the Local
SecurityNetwork improved version with the extended range
of features. These active fire detection systems are for early
fire detection in zone and equipment protection, as well as
for the monitoring of air-conditioning units or ducts. The
exact location of the fire can be pinpointed using the
innovative fire source identification.
The aspirating smoke detectors are fitted with the latest fire
detection technology. Their resistance to contamination,
the temperature compensation of the sensor signals and
initialization in relation to air pressure ensure reliable
operation even under difficult environmental conditions.
System Overview
2
7
3
1
A
FAS-420-TM
4
6
5
A Pipe system
FAS-420-TM series Aspirating smoke detector
1 Smoke aspiration pipe
2 Air intake
3 Air sampling openings
4 Detection unit incl. airflow sensor
5 Housing base
6 Aspiration unit
7 Air outlet
Functions
The aspiration unit uses a pipe system with defined air
sampling openings to draw in air samples from the
monitoring range and route them to the detection unit.
Depending on the programmed response sensitivity of the
detection unit and the alarm threshold, the FAS420TM
Aspirating Smoke Detector triggers the alarm when the
appropriate light obscuration level is reached. The alarm is
displayed via the pre-alarm or main alarm LED on the device
and forwarded to the connected fire panel.
Various time-delay settings can be selected for displaying
and forwarding alarms and malfunctions.
A malfunction message is reset via the connected fire panel.
Alarm and malfunction messages are displayed
simultaneously on the device via the Local SecurityNetwork
(LSN) using the reset function on the detector line.
Avoiding false alarms
The LOGICSENS intelligent signal processing compares the
measured smoke level with known disturbance variables
and decides whether something is an alarm or deception.
Fire source identification
Innovative fire source identification technology allows the
exact location of the fire to be pinpointed by monitoring up
to five distinct zones.
6
Automatic Fire Detectors | Specialty Detectors | 193
Airflow monitoring
An airflow sensor checks the connected pipe system for
breakage and obstruction.
FAS420TM series Aspirating Smoke Detectors have a
response sensitivity of 0.5%/m to 2%/m light obscuration.
The alarm threshold can be set at intervals of 0.1%/m with
FASASDDIAG. The smoke level display on the
FAS420TMRVB model allows a response sensitivity of
0.05%/m to 0.2%/m light obscuration.
Allocating detector address
The address on the Aspirating Smoke Detector is set using
the DIP switch. Both automatic and manual address
allocation are possible, with or without auto detection.
The following settings are possible:
Address Operating mode
0 Automatic address allocation for loop/stub in LSN improved
mode (T-tap not possible)
1 - 254 Manual address allocation for loop/stub/T-tap in LSN improved
mode
255 Automatic address allocation for loop/stub in LSN classic mode
(address range: max. 127)
LSN improved features
FAS420TM series Aspirating Smoke Detectors feature LSN
improved technology:
Flexible network structures, including T-tapping with no

additional elements
Unshielded cable can be used.

The FAS420TM series also offers all the established
benefits of LSN technology. The operating data and fault
messages can be found on the panel controller.
FAS420TM series variant models
All FAS420TM series Aspirating Smoke Detectors have
LED displays for operating mode, malfunction and main
alarm, as well as offering an infrared diagnostics port. In
addition to this, the FAS420TMR and FAS-420TMRVB
variants offer an optical fire location display for up to five
zones. The FAS420TMRVB also includes a pre-alarm
display and a 10-segment smoke level display.
Europe CE FAS-420-TM Series
For connecting to the fire panels FPA-5000 and

FPA1200 with extended range of LSN features.
Programming is carried out via the programming

software FSP5000RPS.
Pipe system planning
In planning, a distinction is made between area monitoring
and equipment monitoring.
The aspiration pipe system should be arranged such that
any fires can be detected at the initial stage. The number of
air sampling openings and the structure of the pipe system
depend on the size and geometry of the monitoring area.
Symmetrical structure
The aspiration pipe system incl. aspiration borings should
preferably be symmetrical in structure, i.e.:
-
Same number of air sampling openings per pipe
branch
-
Same pipe branch lengths (maximum deviation
20%)
-
Same distance between adjacent air sampling
openings on the smoke aspiration pipe (maximum
deviation 20%)
Asymmetrical structure
If structural issues make it impossible to maintain this
symmetry, the following conditions apply:
-
The number of air sampling openings and the length
of the shortest and longest pipe branch within the
pipe system must not exceed a quantity ratio of 1:2.
-
The distance between adjacent air sampling
openings on the smoke aspiration pipe must be the
same (maximum deviation 20%).
-
The diameters of the air sampling openings are
determined separately for each pipe branch. The
diameters depend on the total number of air
sampling openings in the pipe branch in question.
Branch length
For faster detection, it is best to select several short
branches rather than a few long branches (U and double-U
pipe systems preferable).
Pipe configuration
Depending on the geometry of the area, the aspiration pipe
is planned as an I, U, M or double-U pipe system.
Note Planning with fire source identification
requires I pipe configuration.
6
Item Designation
1 I-pipe system
2 U-pipe system
3 M-pipe system
4 Double-U pipe system
For further information on the following aspects of
FAS420TM planning, please refer to the operation guide
FAS420TM Series Aspirating Smoke Detectors LSN
improved version (Product ID F.01U.088.878):
Planning airflow monitoring
Defining the sensitivity
Planning limitations
Planning air sampling pipes
Standard Pipe Planning
Simplified Pipe Planning
Planning for Forced Airflow
Setting of the fan current

Parts Included
Type of device Qty. Components
FAS420TM 1 Standard Aspirating Smoke Detector unit
with LED displays for operating mode, mal-
function and alarm
FAS420TM-R 1 Standard Aspirating Smoke Detector unit
function, alarm and fire source identifica-
tion
FAS420TMRVB 1 Standard Aspirating Smoke Detector unit
function, pre-alarm, main alarm, fire source
identification and 10-segment smoke level
display
Note The FAS420TMHB Housing Base must be
ordered separately for standard units.
Electrical
LSN power supply 15 V DC . . 33 V DC
Auxiliary power supply 15 V DC . . 30 V DC
LSN current consumption 3.25 mA
Current consumption from
auxiliary power supply
Fan voltage
9 V 10.5 V 12 V
- Starting current 150 mA 150 mA 150 mA
- In standby 105 mA 125 mA 145 mA
- With alarm, device variants
FAS420TM and
FAS420TMR
110 mA 130 mA 150 mA
- With alarm, device variant
FAS420TMRVB
140 mA 160 mA 180 mA
Displays on the device
FAS420TM FAS420TMR FAS420TMRVB
Operation Green LED Green LED Green LED
Malfunction Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED
Alarm Red LED Red LED 2 red LEDs (pre-alarm
and main alarm)
Fire location
display
- 5 red LEDs (zones
A-E)
5 red LEDs (zones A-E)
Smoke level
display
- - Yellow smoke level dis-
play with 10 segments
(1-10)
Infrared port IR transmitter/
receiver
IR transmitter/re-
ceiver
IR transmitter/receiver
Mechanics
Conical duct connections 25 mm 1x aspiration pipe
1x air return
Aspiration pipe 1 pipe
Air return 1 pipe

Cable bushings:
Housing base sides 8 x M 20 and 2 x M 25
Housing base rear wall 4 x M 25

6
Weight Approx. 0.8 kg
Housing material Plastic (ABS)
Housing color Papyrus white (RAL 9018)
Protection category according to
EN 60529
Without air return IP 20
With pipe section 100 mm/pipe

bend
IP 42
With air return IP 54

Permissible temperature range:
FAS420TM series Aspirating

Smoke Detector
-20 C to +60 C
PVC pipe system 0 C to +60 C
ABS pipe system -40 C to +80 C

Permissible relative humidity (non-con-
densing)
Max. 95%
Special features
Sound power level (at 9 V fan voltage)
EN27779, 1991
40 dB(A)
Response sensitivity (light obscura-
tion)
0.5 to 2.0%/m
Life cycle of fan (at 12 V and 24 C) 60,000 hrs
FAS-420-TM Aspirating Smoke Detector
function and alarm
FAS-420-TM
FAS-420-TM-R Aspirating Smoke Detector
function, alarm and fire source identification
FAS-420-TM-R
FAS-420-TM-RVB Aspirating Smoke
Detector LSN improved version
function, alarm, fire source identification and
smoke level display
FAS-420-TM-RVB
Accessories
FAS-420-TM-HB Housing Base
for Aspirating Smoke Detectors Series
FAS420TM
FAS-420-TM-HB
FASASDDIAG Diagnostic Software
The FASASDDIAG Diagnostic Software ena-
bles reading out all stored device data and gives
advices to remove failures.
Including connection cable for USB interface
and diagnosis tool with an infrared interface.
FAS-ASD-DIAG
Test Pipe RAS test pipe
Test Adapter RAS test adapter
AFBR Marking Tapes for Aspiration
Reducing Film Sheets
Price per piece, DU 10 pieces
TITANUS AF-BR
AF2.0 Aspiration Reducing Film Sheets
2.0 mm
TITANUS AF-2.0
2.5 mm
TITANUS AF-2.5
AF3.0 Aspiration Reducing Film Sheets,
3.0 mm
TITANUS AF-3.0
3.2 mm
TITANUS AF-3.2
3.4 mm
TITANUS AF-3.4
3.6 mm
TITANUS AF-3.6
3.8 mm
TITANUS AF-3.8
4.0 mm
TITANUS AF-4.0
4.2 mm
TITANUS AF-4.2
4.4 mm
TITANUS AF-4.4
4.6 mm
TITANUS AF-4.6
5.0 mm
TITANUS AF-5.0
5.2 mm
TITANUS AF-5.2
5.6 mm
TITANUS AF-5.6
6.0 mm
TITANUS AF-6.0
6.8 mm
TITANUS AF-6.8
7.0 mm
TITANUS AF-7.0
6
FAS-420-TM Series Aspirating Smoke Detectors LSN improved version

FAS-420-TM FAS-420-TM-R FAS-420-TM-RVB
Model variant with simple alarm indication
(only main alarm)
with simple alarm indication
(only main alarm) and fire
source indication
with differentiated alarm indi-
cation (pre- and main alarm),
fire source indication and
smoke level display
Current consumption LSN 3.25 mA 3.25 mA 3.25 mA
Current consumption AUX depending on the configura-
tion between 105 mA and
150 mA
depending on the configura-
150 mA
depending on the configura-
180 mA
EN 60529

- without air-return pipe IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
- with pipe section 100 mm/ pipe
bend
IP 42 IP 42 IP 42
- with air-return pipe IP 54 IP 54 IP 54
ture

- Aspirating smoke detectors -20 C . . . +60 C -20 C . . . +60 C -20 C . . . +60 C
- Pipe system PVC 0 C . . . +60 C 0 C . . . +60 C 0 C . . . +60 C
- Pipe sytem ABS -40 C . . . +80 C -40 C . . . +80 C -40 C . . . +80 C
Max. sensitivity (light obscuration)
- max. response sensitivity 0.5 %/m 0.5 %/m 0.5 %/m
- max. display sensitivity 0.05 %/m
Max. number of air sampling open-
ings per pipe system

- without fire source identification 8 8 8
- with fire source identification 5 5
Max. monitoring area 400 m 400 m 400 m
Max. length of the pipe system
- pipe 25 mm 50 m 50 m 50 m
- additional pipe 12 mm 8 x 3 m 8 x 3 m 8 x 3 m
6
FAS420 Series Aspirating
Smoke Detectors
Features
Connectable to the fire panels FPA5000 and FPA1200
with the improved LSN technology
High deceptive alarm immunity with intelligent signal
processing LOGICSENS
Innovative airflow monitoring including single-hole
monitoring detects obstruction and breakage
Initial set-up made easy by automatic initialization
Easy diagnostics through flash code on the Detector
Module or by using the FASASDDIAG diagnostic
software
Simple implementation of the pipe system planning
through patented Aspiration reducing Film Sheets
isolators
The FAS420 Series Aspirating Smoke Detectors are
specially designed for direct connection to the Local
SecurityNetwork LSN improved version with the extended
features. They are active fire detection systems for early fire
detection in area and equipment monitoring, as well as for
the monitoring of air conditioning units or ducts.
They have the latest detection technology. Their resistance
to contamination, the temperature compensation of the
sensor signals and initialization in relation to air pressure
ensure reliable operation even under extreme
environmental conditions.
System Overview
1
2
3
4
5
6
Pos. Description
1 Pipe system/air intake
2 Air sampling openings
3 Housing
4 Detector Module incl. airflow sensor
5 Aspiration unit
6 Air outlet
Functions
The aspiration unit takes air samples from the monitoring
area through a pipe system with defined air sampling
openings and passes the samples to the Detector Module.
Depending on the response sensitivity of the used Detector
Module, the Aspirating Smoke Detector triggers an alarm
when the appropriate smoke density is reached. This alarm
is displayed via the alarm LED on the unit and is transmitted
to the fire panel.
An airflow sensor checks the connected pipe system for
breakage and obstruction.
Intelligent signal processing LOGICSENS compares the
measured smoke level with known disturbance variables
and decides between alarm and deception. For the display
and transmission of alarm and faults various delay times can
be selected.
Each Detector Module is monitored for contamination,
signal malfunction and device removal. Malfunctions and
certain device states are displayed using various LED flash
codes on the Detector Module's electronics PCB.
A fault message is reset via the connected fire panel. Via the
Local SecurityNetwork LSN the alarm and fault messages
on the unit are reset simultaneously with the detector line.
There are three different Detector Modules available for the
FAS420 Series Aspirating Smoke Detectors. These
modules have different response sensitivities:
6
Detector Module Max. sensitivity
(light obscuration)
Levels for selection
DM-TT-50(80) 0.5 %/m (0.8 %/m) 2
DM-TT-10(25) 0.1 %/m (0.25 %/m) 4
DM-TT-01(05) 0.015 %/m (0.05 %/m) 4
Note The sensitivity is based on the measurements
during Standard Test Fires (previous
measurement in brackets).
The FAS420TP2 and the FAS420TT2 runs with two
Detector Modules.
Two air sampling pipe systems can be connected to monitor
two areas. When monitoring only one area with two pipe
systems, dual-detector dependency may be implemented.
Connection to the fire panels FPA5000 and FPA1200 and
programming via FSP5000RPS also allows for dual-zone
dependency.
Address allocation
The integrated DIP switches are used to select between
automatic or manual addressing with or without auto
detection.
Address Operating mode
0 Automatic addressing in improved version LSN mode for
loop/stub (T-taps not possible)
1 254 Manual addressing in improved version LSN mode for
loop/stub/T-taps
255 Automatic addressing in classic LSN mode for loop/stub
(address range: max. 127)
Features of improved LSN
The Aspirating Smoke Detectors in the 420 Series offer all
the features of the LSN technology improved version:
Flexible network structures including Ttapping without

additional elements
Up to 254 LSN-improved elements per loop or stub line

In addition, the FAS420 Series offer all the established
benefits of LSN technology. Operating data and fault
messages can be found on the panel controller. In the event
of an alarm, individual detector identification is transmitted
to the fire panel.
Model variants FAS420 Series
The variants FAS420TP1 and FAS420TP2 are the cost-
effective Aspirating Smoke Detectors for universal use with
LED displays for operation, malfunction, and alarm (two
alarm indications on the FAS420TP2).
The FAS420TT1 and FAS420TT2 offer differentiated
alarm indications (info, pre, and main alarm) as well as a
smoke level display in 10 levels (with the FAS420TT2 all
alarm and smoke level displays are doubled). Depending on
the used Detector Module, a resolution of the sensitivity
indication of up to 0,0015 %/m, 0,01 %/m or 0,05 %/m can
be selected.
Europe CE FAS-420-TP1/TP2
FAS-420-TT1/TT2
Germany VdS G 208046 FCS 320
TT_TPSeries_FAS-420 TT_TPSeries
For connection to the fire panels FPA5000 and

FPA1200 with the extended system parameters of LSN
improved version.
Programming is carried out via RPS.
The fan requires a separate power supply.
An external detector alarm display for connection to the

FAS420 Series Aspirating Smoke Detectors can be
ordered separately.
Planning of the pipe system
In planning, a distinction is made between area

monitoring and equipment monitoring.
PVC pipes and halogen-free aspiration pipes can be

used.
For equipment monitoring, halogen-free pipes should

be used.
The air sampling pipe system should be arranged such

that any fires can be detected at the initial stage.
The pipe system including air sampling openings must

always be symmetrical in design (10% deviation).
If structural issues make it impossible to maintain this

symmetry, the following conditions apply:
-
The number of air sampling openings and the length
of the shortest and longest pipe branch within the
pipe system must not exceed a quantity ratio of
01:02.
-
The distance between neighboring air sampling
openings on the aspiration pipe must be even (max.
deviation 20%).
-
The diameters of the air sampling openings are
determined separately for each pipe branch. The
diameters depend on the total number of air
sampling openings in the pipe branch in question.
Greater distances between the Aspirating Smoke

Detector and aspiration pipe are specified for pipes
with a 40 mm diameter.
Depending on the geometrics of the area, the I-, U-, M-

or double U-pipe system is utilized.
Note Take notice when planning that the fans of the
Aspirating Smoke Detectors produce a noise
level of 45 dB(A).
6
FAS-420
FAS-420
FAS-420
3
4
2
1
FAS-420
Pos. Designation
1 I-pipe system
2 U-pipe system
3 Mpipe system
4 Double U-pipe system
For a faster detection, it is best to select several short

branches rather than a few long branches (U and
double-U pipe systems preferable).
Bends are preferable to angles in the event of

directional changes.
In order to increase transport speed in critical

application areas, the fan voltage can be increased from
6.9 V to 9 V.
Planning limitations
Pipe length between two air sampling openings:

-
Minimum 4 m (0.1 m with Simplified Pipe Planning)
-
Maximum 12 m.
The maximum monitoring area per air sampling opening

corresponds to the maximum monitoring area of point-
type detectors according to valid planning guidelines.
Maximum of 32 air sampling openings per pipe system
Max. pipe length / max. total monitoring area per pipe

system:
- 300 m / 2880 m
2
(VdS-compliant)
- With two Detector Modules: 2*280 m / 5760 m
2
Aspiration pipe planning
Aspiration pipe systems are constructed according to
planning specifications with the common pipe components
as well as components for special applications, e. g. Water
Separator or Detonation Safety Barrier.
All borings for the smoke aspiration systems are made to a
diameter of 10 mm and the exact aspiration openings are
implemented by means of the patented Aspiration Reducing
Film Sheets. For each aspiration hole a Aspiration reducing
Film Sheet with corresponding punch diameter and Marking
Tape must be provided.
Note For applications in areas where a blowing-out
system is necessary (e. g. low-temperature
areas or where high levels of dust accumulate),
special suction reducers with plastic clips are
available as separate items.
For further information on the following aspects of FAS-420
planning, please refer to the operation guide FAS-420
Series Aspirating Smoke Detectors LSN improved version
(product ID F.01U.029.275):
Specifying the sensitivity
Standard planning in line with VdS
Planning with long pipe feed lines
Planning for high-rise warehouses
Simplified Planning
Planning with single-hole monitoring
Planning for forced airflow

Parts Included
Type of device Qty Components
FAS-420-TP1 1 Aspirating Smoke Detector basic unit, with
LED displays for operation, malfunction, and
alarm, for one Detector Module, for connect-
ing one pipe system
FAS-420-TP2 1 Aspirating Smoke Detector basic unit, with
LED displays for operation, malfunction, and
alarm, for two Detector Modules, for con-
necting two pipe systems
FAS-420-TT1 1 Aspirating Smoke Detector basic unit, with
differentiated alarm and smoke level dis-
play, for one Detector Module, for connect-
ing one pipe system
FAS-420-TT2 1 Aspirating Smoke Detector basic unit, with
differentiated alarm and smoke level dis-
play, for two Detector Modules, for connect-
ing two pipe systems
Note One or two Detector Modules must be ordered
separately for the basic units (see table). Only
use Detector Modules of the type DMTTXX for
all variants of the FAS420 series.
For type of device Qty Required Detector Modules
FAS-420-TP1 1 Either DMTT50(80), DMTT10(25) or
DMTT01(05)
FAS-420-TP2 2 DMTT50(80), DMTT10(25) and/or
DMTT01(05)
FAS-420-TT1 1 Either DMTT50(80), DMTT10(25) or
DMTT01(05)
FAS-420-TT2 2 DMTT50(80), DMTT10(25) and/or
DMTT01(05)
6
Electrical
Current consumption from LSN 3.25 mA
Current consumption from auxiliary
power supply (at 24 V)
FAS-420-TP1/
FAS-420-TT1
FAS-420-TP2/
FAS-420-TT2
Starting current, fan voltage

6.9 V
300 mA 330 mA
Starting current, fan voltage

9 V
300 mA 330 mA
In standby, fan voltage 6.9 V 200 mA 230 mA
In standby, fan voltage 9 V 260 mA 310 mA
On alarm, fan voltage 6.9 V 230 mA 290 mA
On alarm, fan voltage 9 V 290 mA 370 mA

Mechanics
Displays on the device
FAS-420-TP1 / FAS-420-TP2
In operation Green LED
Malfunction Yellow LED
Alarm 1 red LED / 2 red LEDs

FAS-420-TT1 / FAS-420-TT2
In operation Green LED
Malfunction Yellow LED
Level display 1 x / 2 x
smoke level display, each with 10 seg-
ments (1 - 10)
Alarm 1 x 3 / 2 x 3 red LEDs

for info alarm, pre-alarm and main alarm
Conical duct connections
for 25 mm
Aspiration pipe 1 pipe / 2 pipes
Air return 1 pipe

Cable bushings 5 x M 20 and 2 x M 25
Housing material Plastic (ABS)
Housing color Papyrus white, RAL 9018
Permissible temperature range
Series FAS-420 Aspirating

Smoke Detectors
-20 C to +60 C
Pipe system PVC 00 C to +60 C
Pipe system ABS -40 C to +80 C

Permissible relative humidity
(non-condensing)
10 to 95 %
Special features
Acoustic power level 45 dB(A)
(max. light obscuration)
Detector Module DM-TT-50(80) 0.5 %/m (0.8 %/m)

Service life of the fan (12 V) 43,000 hrs at 24 C
FAS420TP1 Aspirating Smoke Detector
Basic unit without Detector Module, for con-
necting one pipe system
FAS-420-TP1
FAS420TP2 Aspirating Smoke Detector
Basic unit without Detector Modules, for con-
FAS-420-TP2
FAS420TT1 Aspirating Smoke Detector
Basic unit without Detector Module, for con-
necting one pipe system
FAS-420-TT1
FAS420TT2 Aspirating Smoke Detector
Basic unit without Detector Modules, for con-
FAS-420-TT2
Accessories
DMTT50(80) Detector Module
FAS-420, with max. sensitivity of 0,5 %/m
(0.8 %/m) light obscuration
DM-TT-50(80)
FAS420, with max. sensitivity of 0,1 %/m
DM-TT-10(25)
FAS420, with max. sensitivity of 0,015 %/m
DM-TT-01(05)
MT1 Device Mounting TITANUS MT-1
mount
FASASDDIAG Diagnostic Software
The FASASDDIAG Diagnostic Software ena-
bles reading out all stored device data and gives
advices to remove failures.
Including connection cable for USB interface
and diagnosis tool with an infrared interface.
FAS-ASD-DIAG
Test Pipe RAS test pipe
Test Adapter RAS test adapter
AFBR Marking Tapes for Aspiration
Reducing Film Sheets
TITANUS AF-BR
2.0 mm
TITANUS AF-2.0
6
2.5 mm
TITANUS AF-2.5
3.0 mm
TITANUS AF-3.0
3.2 mm
TITANUS AF-3.2
3.4 mm
TITANUS AF-3.4
3.6 mm
TITANUS AF-3.6
3.8 mm
TITANUS AF-3.8
4.0 mm
TITANUS AF-4.0
4.2 mm
TITANUS AF-4.2
4.4 mm
TITANUS AF-4.4
4.6 mm
TITANUS AF-4.6
5.0 mm
TITANUS AF-5.0
5.2 mm
TITANUS AF-5.2
5.6 mm
TITANUS AF-5.6
6.0 mm
TITANUS AF-6.0
6.8 mm
TITANUS AF-6.8
7.0 mm
TITANUS AF-7.0
6
FAS-420 Series Aspirating Smoke Detectors LSN imroved version

FAS-420-TP1 FAS-420-TP2 FAS-420-TT1 FAS-420-TT2
Model variant with simple alarm indi-
cation (only main alarm)
with differentiated
alarm indication (info,
pre, and main alarm)
and smoke level display
with simple alarm indi-
cation (only main alarm)
with differentiated
alarm indication (info,
pre, and main alarm)
and smoke level display
Current consumption LSN 3.25 mA 3.25 mA 3.25 mA 3.25 mA
Current consumption AUX depending on the con-
figuration between
200 mA and 300 mA
depending on the con-
figuration between
230 mA and 370 mA
figuration between
200 mA and 300 mA
figuration between
230 mA and 370 mA
perature

- Aspirating smoke detec-
tors
-20 C . . . +60 C -20 C . . . +60 C -20 C . . . +60 C -20 C . . . +60 C
- Pipe system PVC -10 C . . . +60 C -10 C . . . +60 C -10 C . . . +60 C -10 C . . . +60 C
- Pipe sytem ABS -40 C . . . +80 C -40 C . . . +80 C -40 C . . . +80 C -40 C . . . +80 C
Number of detector mod-
ules
1 2 1 2
Dual-detector dependency
configurable

Max. sensitivity (light ob-
scuration)

- max. response sensitivity depending on the detec-
tor module between
0.05%/m and 0.8%/m
depending on the detec-
tor module between
0.05%/m and 0.8%/m
tor module between
0.05%/m and 0.8%/m
tor module between
0.05%/m and 0.8%/m
- max. display sensitivity depending on the detec-
tor module between
0.005%/m and 0.08%/m
tor module between
0.005%/m and 0.08%/m
Max. number of air sam-
pling openings per pipe sys-
tem
24 2x24 24 2x24
Max. monitoring area 2880 m 2x2880 m 2880 m 2x2880 m
Max. length of the pipe sys-
tem
180 m 2x180 m 180 m 2x180 m
6
Components for Smoke
Aspiration Systems
A wide range of aspiration pipe components are available
for use in smoke aspiration systems. The use of appropriate
components allows for a safe and reliable operation even
under extreme ambient conditions.
FASASDPHF16 Polywell Hose Flexible,
PG16
50 m roll, flexible, black, non halogen
FAS-ASD-PHF
FASASDTRPG16 Threaded Ring, PG16
including PG16 internal threads, 5 units
FAS-ASD-TRPG16
FASASDCSL Connection Straight Line
connection between aspiration hose and aspi-
ration pipe, including PG16 internal thread
FAS-ASD-CSL
FASASD3WT Three Way Tap
including fittings, for 25 mm pipe system
FAS-ASD-3WT
FASASDF Flange
for ventilation duct
FAS-ASD-F
FASASDAR Reduction
includes a 10 mm bore for adding a suction
reducing film sheet, 10 units
FAS-ASD-AR
FASASDCLT Ceiling Lead-through
white, ABS, 10 units
FAS-ASD-CLT
FASASDAHC Aspiration Hose for Ceiling
Lead-through
50 m roll, white, PE
FAS-ASD-AHC
Dust Collector, for Pipe Exterior 25 mm AD25 dust collect
FASASDDSB Detonation Safety Barrier
type PROTEGO EG IIA
FAS-ASD-DSB
Water Separator, for Pipe Exterior 25 mm AD25 water sep
FASASDWS Water Separator
including metal sinter filter and manual drain
valve,
including fixing bracket and PG screw joint for
25 mm pipe system
FAS-ASD-WS
Filter Box Small, for Pipe Exterior 25 mm AD25 filter box s
Replacement Filter Mat for Filter Box Small RAS spare filter s
FASASDFL Filterbox Large
for 25 mm pipe system, including filter set and
two PG29 screw joints
FAS-ASD-FL
FASASDRFL Replacement Filter Large
Set including one of a fine, medium and rough
filter mat (60 ppi, 45 ppi and 25 ppi)
FAS-ASD-RFL
6
Fireray 50/100RV Linear
Smoke Detectors
Features
Extended monitoring area
Transmitter, receiver, and evaluating unit integrated
into a compact housing
Electronic help for detector alignment and automatic
detector calibration procedure
Automatic compensation for contamination
LED display in control unit for various operating states
Adjustable alarm thresholds
The Linear Smoke Detectors Fireray 50RV and
Fireray 100RV are easy to mount, cost-effective, and work
in retro-operation with an extended range:
- Fireray 50RV: 5 m to 50 m
- Fireray 100RV: 50 m to 100 m
Preferred areas of application are historical buildings,
churches, museums, shopping centers, factory halls,
warehouses, power plants, ex areas, contaminated
environments, etc.
Functions
The transmitter emits an infrared light beam (880 nm) that
is focused through a lens and invisible. The light beam is
reflected by 180 by the prism reflector mounted opposite
and returned to the transmitter/receiver combination.
If the IR beam is obscured by smoke and the signal received
drops below the selected threshold value for 10 s, the
Fireray triggers a fire alarm and the alarm relay closes.
The activation threshold can be adjusted to the
environmental conditions. Settings 25% (sensitive), 35%,
and 50% (non-sensitive) are possible.
For the alarm relay, you can select between auto-reset and
alarm storage.
Various operating states are displayed by LEDs:
Alarm
Malfunction
Operating display
End of the readjustment for contamination/aging

Slow changes in the operating states (e. g. aging of the
components, contamination of the optic, etc.) do not lead
to faulty triggering, but are compensated for by automatic
amplification control. The state of the system is compared
with a default reference value every 15 minutes and in case
of deviations, compensated automatically up to 0.7 dB/h. If
the readjustment limit is reached, either "Malfunction" or
"Alarm" is triggered.
If the IR beam is obscured for at least 10 seconds by more
than 90% with a sharp signal increase, the fault relay
switches. The reason can be an obstacle in the beam path,
turning of the detector, covering of the reflector, etc. After
removing the cause of the malfunction, the fault relay is set
again and the detector is reset automatically into the
detection-ready state after 5 s. The fire panel must be reset
separately.
The detector has an alarm output in the form of a floating
self-holding relay contact.
Meets the following regulations:
-
BS 5839 Part 5
-
EN54-12:2002
Europe CE Fireray 50RV/100RV
CPD 0786-CPD-20045 Fireray 50R/50RV/
100R/100RV
Germany VdS G 203070 Fireray 50RV/100RV
Hungary TMT TMT-89/07/2004 Fireray 50RV/100RV
POCC.YII001.BO7219 Fireray2000
& Fireray 50-100RV
POCC GB.bb02.HO4311 Fireray2000
& Fireray50-100RV
Sweden INTYG 09-407 Fireray 50_ Fireray 100
General installation/configuration notes
For connection to the LSN, the following are required:

-
One FLM420/4CON Conventional Interface
Module
-
One Mini Distributor a.P. 6 DA.
6
To implement cross zoning, the following are required:

-
One FLM420/4CON Conventional Interface
Module
-
One Mini Distributor a.P. 6 DA.
Between the detector and reflector there must be a

constant visual connection, which may not be
interrupted by movable objects (e. g. overhead crane).
Detector and reflector are generally installed at the

same height and aligned with one another. The
relatively wide angle of the IR beam makes adjustments
easier and guarantees reliable long-term stability.
The mounting surface for the detector must be firm and

vibration-free. Metal supports that may be affected by
heat or cold are unsuitable for the installation.
The reflector is mounted at the permissible distance on

a solid, non-reflecting surface, whereby the light beam
must hit the reflector vertically.
The detector must be installed so that direct irradiation

of sunlight or artificial light into the optical system is
prevented. Normal ambient light has no influence on the
IR beam and the analysis.
A screened cable must be used to protect against

radiated interference. Possible sources of interference
are to be avoided when routing cables and the cable
must be protected against mechanical damage.
Heat accumulation under roof surfaces can prevent the

travel of climbing smoke to the ceiling. The detector
must therefore be mounted below an expected heat
accumulation. This can mean that the benchmark values
for D
L
specified in the table must be exceeded.
30-60 cm
C
B
A
D
Pos. Description
A Ceiling
B Mushroom cloud
C Heat accumulation
D IR beam
Since the smoke over a fire source does not just climb
vertically upwards, but rather spreads like a mushroom
cloud (depending on existing air currents and air pads),
the width of the monitoring area is much greater than
the diameter of the IR beam.
The sideways detection width on both sides of the beam

center line is 7.5 m.
Country-specific standards and guidelines with respect

to planning must be adhered to.
Detector arrangement
The detectors must be devided up so that the following
distances are adhered to:
D
H
horizontal distance detector-wall or detec-
tor-ceiling
at least 0.5 m,
max. 7.5 m
2 x D
H
Distance between two parallel beams max. 15 m
D
L
Distance from the ceiling 0.3 m to 0.6 m
D
R
Range = distance detector-reflector.
- Fireray 50RV:
- Fireray 100RV:
over 5 m to 50 m
over 50 m to 100 m
The center line of the monitoring beam may not be

closer than 0.5 m to walls, equipment or stored goods.
The prism reflectors permit angle deviations up to 5

from the center line without signal weakening.
Positioning detectors on flat ceilings
2 x D
H
D
H
D
H
D
H
D
L
D
R
1
2
Pos. Description
1 Fireray 50/100RV
2 Prism reflectors
D
H
,D
L
,D
R
see table above
Positioning the detectors in a tilted roof
max. 7,5 m max. 15 m
max.
7,5 m
min.
0,5 m
max. 15 m
min. 0,5 m
D
L
D
L
D
L
6
Positioning the detectors in a saddleback roof
max. 7,5 m
max. 15 m
max. 7,5 m
min. 0,5 m
max. 15 m
min. 0,5 m
D
L
D
L
D
L
Note The ceiling distance can be reduced with
saddleback roofs by 1 % per degree, maximum
25 %.
Detector arrangement in accordance with VdS/VDE
The number of light beam smoke detectors must be

selected so that the maximum monitoring area A in the
table is not exceeded (meets VdS 2095 and
DIN VDE 08332).
Room height
R
H
D
H
A D
L
at < 20 D
L
at > 20
up to 6 m 6 m
1200 m
2
0.3 m to 0.5 m 0.3 m to 0.5 m
over 6 m to 12
m
6.5 m
1300 m
2
0.4 m to 0.7 m 0.4 m to 0.9 m
more than 12
m to 16 m *
)
**
)
7 m *
)
1400 m
2
**
)
0.6 m to 0.9 m
**
)
0.8 m to 1.2 m
**
)
D
H
= greatest permissible horizontal distance of any point of
the ceiling to the next-closest beam
A = maximum monitoring area per detector (= double the
product of the greatest horizontal distance D
H
and highest
allowable detector/reflector distance)
D
L
= distance of the detector to the ceiling
= angle which the roof/ceiling pitch forms with the
horizontal; if a roof has different pitches (e. g. sheds), use the
smallest existing pitch
* With a room height of more than 12 m, it is recommended
that you provide a second monitoring level on which the
detectors are arranged offset to the first monitoring level
** Depends on use and environmental conditions (e. g. quick
fire development and smoke spread)
Depending on the roof construction (flat, tilted or

saddleback), the detectors and reflectors must be
arranged depending on the roof pitch and the room
height R
H
so that the light beam in the distance D
L
runs
under the roof (see table).
Parts Included
Fireray 50RV
Qty. Components
1 Linear Smoke Detector Fireray 50RV:
compact device with integrated transmitter, receiver, and con-
trol unit
1 Prism reflector
1 Test filter
1 Connection cable with plug
1 Installation material
Fireray 100RV
Qty. Components
1 Linear Smoke Detector Fireray 100RV:
compact device with integrated transmitter, receiver, and con-
trol unit
4 Prism reflectors
1 Test filter
1 Connection cable with plug
1 Installation material
Electrical
Current consumption
In standby < 4 mA @ 24 V
In alarm/malfunction < 15 mA
Reset control by power disruption > 5 s
Alarm relay (contact load) Open contact, potential free
(2 A @ 30 V DC)
Fault relay (contact load) Break contact element, potential
free (2 A @ 30 V DC)
Mechanics
LED indicators for
Alarm Red
Malfunction Yellow
Operation Yellow flashing once in 10 sec-

onds
Limit of the readjustment for con-

tamination/aging
Yellow flashing once in 2 seconds
Fireray 50/100RV 126 x 210 x 120 mm
Prism reflector 100 x 100 x 9.5 mm

Housing Color Light gray/black
Housing material ABS, non-flammable
Weight 670 g
Permissible operating temperature -30 C . . . 55 C
6
Planning
Permissible distance detector-reflector
Fireray 50RV Min. 5 m - max. 50 m
Fireray 100RV Min. 50 m - max. 100 m

Side detection width
(on both sides of the light beam)
Max. 7.5 m (Heed local guide-
lines!)
Special features
Optical wavelength 880 nm
Adjustable alarm threshold values 2.50 dB (25%)
3.74 dB (35%)
6.02 dB (55%)
Tolerance of the axial deviation (at 35%
sensitivity)
Detector 0.8
Prism reflector 5.0

Fireray 50RV Fireray 50 RV
Fireray 100RV Fireray 100 RV
6
Fireray 2000 Linear Smoke
Detector
Features
Extended monitoring area
Increased security against false alarms with gain
control
Potential-free, self-holding relay double-throw contact
as alarm output
LED displays in the control unit for:
Adjustable thresholds
The Fireray 2000 is an optical Linear Smoke Detector for the
detection of light and dark smoke across an area of 10 m to
100 m or 2 m to 45 m in reflection operation using prisms.
Preferred areas of application are very large and high halls,
e. g. airplane hangars, factory buildings and similar
buildings where the use of point-type automatic automatic
call points is not possible.
System Overview
1
2
3
Pos. Description
1 Infrared transmitter
2 Infrared receiver
3 Control unit
Functions
The transmitter transmits an invisible infrared light beam
bundled through a lens to the receiver.
S 3m
30m 50m 80m 100m
0,9m 1,5m 2,4m
At a maximum distance of 100 m the core diameter of the
light beam is 3 m. The core diameter is the area of the
conical IR beam in which orderly operation of the system is
possible.
If smoke interrupts the beam, the signal in the receiver is
attenuated depending on the thickness of the smoke. If an
attenuation according to the set threshold lasts longer than
5 s, an alarm is triggered.
The alarm threshold can be set to 25% or 35% or 50% with
the use of prisms.
Slow changes (e. g. contamination of the optical system) do
not cause false alarms; instead, they are balanced out by an
automatic gain control. Here the current state of the system
is compared with a reference value and adjusted stepwise
in case of deviations greater than 7%. By default, the
comparison is done every 1.5 hours.
With a comp switch, manual or automatic alarm reset can
be selected.
The Fireray 2000 can also be used as reflection fire alarm
system with prisms (transmitters and receivers on the same
wall).
Comply with:
EN54-12:2002
Europe CE Fireray 2000
CPD 0786-CPD-20196 Fireray 2000
Germany VdS G 297058 Fireray 2000
Czech
Republic
TZS 080-001259 Fireray 2000
Hungary TMT TMT-89/08/2004 Fireray 2000
POCC GB.bb02.HO4311 Fireray2000
& Fireray50-100RV
POCC.YII001.BO7219 Fireray2000
& Fireray 50-100RV
Sweden INTYG 09-408 Fireray 2000
6
General installation/configuration notes
A FLM420/4CON Conventional Interface Module is

required for connection of the Fireray 2000 to the LSN.
Between the detector and reflector there must be a

constant visual connection, which may not be
interrupted by movable objects (e. g. overhead crane).
The mounting surfaces for the transmitter and receiver

must be stable and free of vibration. Installation on
metal surfaces should be avoided since they expand
and contract in case of temperature fluctuations.
Inaccessible areas are monitored by monitoring

transmitters and receivers outside and letting them look
through windows into the monitoring area. The
minimum diameter of the opening must be 20 cm or an
opening corresponding to the diameter of the beam.
Warning Normal panes of glass reduce the effective
system range by approx. 10% per pane
When installing the receiver, be sure that the direct

penetration of sunlight or other light into the optical
system is avoided. Normal environmental light has no
influence on the receiver.
The control unit must be installed in an area that is easy

to reach. A screened cable must be used. The maximum
cable length of 100 m to the receiver may not be
exceeded.
An adjustment tool can be ordered separately. It is

connected to the control unit. Alignment, particularly
over larger distances, is considerably simplified with
the help of two LED displays.
Heat accumulation under roof surfaces can prevent the
travel of climbing smoke to the ceiling. The detector must
therefore be mounted below an expected heat
accumulation. This can mean that the benchmark values
for D
L
specified in the table must be exceeded.
30-60 cm
C
B
A
D
Pos. Description
A Ceiling
B Mushroom cloud
C Heat accumulation
D IR beam
Since the smoke over a fire source does not just climb
vertically upwards, but rather spreads like a mushroom
cloud (depending on existing air currents and air pads),
the width of the monitoring area is much greater than
the diameter of the IR beam.
10m - 100m
7
,
5

m
7
,
5

m
1
2
Pos. Description
1 Transmitter
2 Receiver
The sideways detection width on both sides of the beam

center line is 7.5 m.
Country-specific standards and guidelines with respect

to planning must be adhered to.
The detectors must be divided up so that the following
distances are adhered to:
D
H
Horizontal distance detector-wall or detec-
tor-ceiling
at least 0.5 m,
max. 7.5 m
2 x D
H
Distance between two parallel beams max. 15 m
D
L
Distance from the ceiling 0.3 m to 0.6 m
D
R
Range = distance between detector and re-
flector:
- Fireray 2000 over 10 m to 100 m
- Fireray 2000 in retro operation: over 2 m to 45 m
The center line of the monitoring beam may not be

closer than 0.5 m to walls, equipment or stored goods.
The prism reflectors permit angle deviations up to 5

from the center line without signal weakening.
Positioning detectors on flat ceilings
2 x D
H
D
H
D
H
D
H
D
L
D
R
1
2
Pos. Description
1 Fireray 2000 transmitter or receiver
2 Fireray 2000 receiver or transmitter or prism
6
Positioning the detectors in a tilted roof
max. 7,5 m max. 15 m
max.
7,5 m
min.
0,5 m
max. 15 m
min. 0,5 m
D
L
D
L
D
L
Positioning the detectors in a saddleback roof
max. 7,5 m
max. 15 m
max. 7,5 m
min. 0,5 m
max. 15 m
min. 0,5 m
D
L
D
L
D
L
Note The ceiling distance can be reduced by 1% per
degree for saddleback roofs, up to a maximum
of 25%.
Installation as reflection fire alarm system with prisms
To install transmitter and receiver on the same wall, you

need prisms that reflect the light by 180. The use of
prisms eases the installation of transmitters and
receivers and the comparison.
With installation as reflection fire alarm system with

prisms, transmitter and receiver must be installed as
close to one another as possible.
Required number of prisms:

-
Distance up to 25 m: 1 prism
-
Distance up to 45 m: 9 prisms
To achieve effective reflection, the prisms must be

installed right-angled to the IR beam of the transmitter.
Deviations cause a weaker signal.
1
3
2 S
E
P
Pos. Description
1 Additional reflection from the polished prism surface
2 Beam from transmitter
3 Main portion of the reflected beam to the receiver
P Prism
E Receiver
S Transmitter
selected so that the maximum monitoring area A in the
table is not exceeded (fulfills VdS 2095 and
DIN VDE 08332).
Room height
R
H
D
H
A D
L
at < 20 D
L
at > 20
up to 6 m 6 m
1200 m
2
0.3 m to 0.5 m 0.3 m to 0.5 m
over 6 m
to 12 m
6.5 m
1300 m
2
0.4 m to 0.7 m 0.4 m to 0.9 m
more than 12
m to
16 m *
)
**
)
7 m *
)
1400 m
2
**)
0.6 m to 0.9 m
**
)
0.8 m to 1.2 m
**
)
D
H
= greatest permissible horizontal distance of any point of
the ceiling to the next-closest beam
H
and highest
allowable detector/reflector distance)
D
L
= distance of the detector to the ceiling
horizontal; if a roof has different pitches (e. g. sheds), use the
smallest existing pitch
*
)
With a room height of more than 12 m, it is recommended
**
)
Depends on use and environmental conditions (e. g. quick
fire development and smoke spread)

saddleback), the detectors and reflectors must be
arranged depending on the roof pitch and the room
height R
H
so that the light beam in the distance D
L
runs
under the roof (see table).
6
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 Control unit, Fireray 2000
1 Infrared transmitter
1 Infrared receiver
1 Test filter
Electrical
Operating voltage 24 V DC
(11.5 . . . 28 V DC)
Current consumption
In standby Approx. 14 mA
During an alarm Approx. 22 mA

Mechanics
LED indicators for Malfunction (beam interruption)
Signal too high
Signal too low
Alarm
Control unit incl. key 212 x 261.5 x 120.6 mm
Transmitter incl. installation

frame
90 x 130 x 115 mm
Receiver incl. installation frame 90 x 130 x 115 mm
Prism 124.6 x 103 x 9.5 mm

Color (all parts) White, RAL 9010
Material
Control unit incl. key Aluminium
Transmitter and receiver hous-

ing
Sheet steel
Weight
Control unit incl. key 1060 g
Transmitter incl. installation

frame
650 g
Receiver incl. installation frame 650 g

Permissible operating temperature -20 C . . . 55 C
Planning
Permissible distance transmitter- re-
ceiver
Min. 10 m - max. 100 m
Permissible distance transmitter-re-
ceiver in reflection operation with
prism
Min. 2 m - max. 45 m
Special features
Fireray 2000 Linear Smoke Detector Fireray 2000
Accessories
Prism for Fireray 2000
Distance: up to 25 m: 1 prism, up to 35 m:
4 prisms, up to 45 m: 6 prisms
Fireray 2000-prism
6
FRay5000-50-EN Linear
Smoke Detector
Features
Extended monitoring range
Transmitter and receiver integrated into a compact
housing
Electronic and optical feature for detector alignment
and self-alignment during operation
Remote control unit at eye level for easy installation
and programming
Automatic contamination compensation
Control unit with LED and LCD displaying - various
operating states
Adjustable alarm thresholds
Building shift compensation
The FRay500050EN Linear Smoke Detector covers
distances between 8 m and 100 m. A reflective prism allows
for the accurate detection of smoke particles within the
given distance range.
For ranges between 8 m and 50 m, one prism is sufficient.
For ranges between 50 m and 100 m, four prisms are
required. The additional prisms are included in the
FRay5000LRKit Long Range Kit.
Key application areas are large halls such as historical
buildings, churches, museums, shopping centers, factory
halls, warehouses, etc.
The FRay500050EN Linear Smoke Detector is suitable for
use in areas where point-type detectors are not effective.
Functions
The transmitter emits an invisible infrared light beam
(850 nm) that is focused through a lens. The light beam is
reflected by the prism mounted opposite and returned to
the transmitter/receiver combination.
If the IR beam is obscured by smoke and the signal received
drops below the selected threshold (standard 10 s,
adjustable), the detector triggers a fire alarm and the alarm
relay closes.
The sensitivity can be adjusted according to the
environmental conditions. The default settings of 25%
(sensitive), 35% and 50% (non-sensitive) can be changed in
steps of 1%.
The alarm relay can be set to auto-reset or latched mode.
The LEDs indicate three different operating states:
Alarm
Fault
Operation
You can control and set all parameters via the control unit
and LCD display.
Slow changes in the operating states (e. g. component
aging, optics contamination, etc.) do not cause false alarms,
but are compensated by the automatic gain control. Every
15 minutes, the system state is compared with a default
reference value and in the case of a deviation, is corrected
automatically to 0.17 dB/h. If the compensation limit is
reached, "Fault" the fault signal is indicated.
If the IR beam is obscured within 2 s and the obscuration is
more than 87% and lasts for 10 seconds and above
(operator changeable), the fault relay switches. Faults may
be caused by an obstacle in the beam path, by the covering
of the reflector, etc. As soon as the fault cause is removed,
the fault relay is cleared and after 5 s, the detector is
automatically reset to standard operation. The fire panel
must be reset separately.
The system has an alarm output, which is a relay with a
potentialfree change-over contact.
Comply with:
EN54-12:2002
Europe CE FRAY5000-50-EN
CPD 0832-CPD-0565 Fireray 5000
Germany VdS G 208017 Fireray 5000
Belgium BOSEC TCC2-K803 Fireray 5000
Great Britain BRE 831a/03 Fireray 5000
Sweden INTYG 08-722 Fireray 5000
6
For connection to the LSN, one FLM420/4CON

Conventional Interface Module is required.
For direct connection to the FPA-5000, one CZM 0004 A

module is required.
The line of sight between the detector and the reflector

always has to be clear and may not be interfered by
moving objects (e. g. overhead crane).
Heat accumulation under the roof may prevent smoke

from rising up to the ceiling. Thus, the detector must be
mounted below the expected heat accumulation.
Accordingly, the benchmark values for X1 specified in
the table have to be exceeded.
The mounting surface for the detector must be firm and

vibration-free. Metal supports that may be affected by
heat or cold are unsuitable for the installation.
The detector and the reflector are usually installed at

the same height and aligned with one another. The wide
angle of the IR beam allows for an easy adjustment and
for a reliable long-term stability.
The detector must be mounted in a position where the

detectors optical system is not exposed to direct
sunlight or artificial light. Normal ambient light has no
influence on the IR beam and the analysis.
30-60 cm
C
B
A
D
Pos. Description
A Ceiling
B Mushroom cloud
C Heat accumulation
D IR beam
Since the smoke from a fire does not simply rise straight
up, but rather spreads like a mushroom cloud
(depending on air current and accumulation), the
monitoring range is much greater than the diameter of
the IR beam.
The lateral detection on either side of the beam is 7.5 m.
Country-specific Standards and guidelines on planning

must be observed.
The detectors must be arranged according to the following
distances:
X1 Distance from the ceiling 0.3 m to 0.6 m
X2 Horizontal distance detector/wall min. 0.5 m
X3 Horizontal distance between two detectors un-
der gable roofs
Example: Gable roof, 10 roof pitch
X3 = 7.5 m + (7.5 m x 10%)
X3 = 7.5 m + 0.75 m
X3 = 8.25 m
The maximum distance between two detectors with

parallel IR beams is 15 m.
The centre line of the monitoring beam may not be

closer than 0.5 m to walls, furniture or stored goods.
The reflectors allow an angle deviation of up to 5 from

the centre line without causing a weakening of the
signal..
Positioning the detectors on flat ceilings
Positioning the detectors under a shed roof
Positioning the detectors under a gable roof

selected according to the maximum monitoring area A
listed in the table and which must not be exceeded
(meets VdS 2095 and DIN VDE 08332).
Room height
R
H
X2 A X1 at < 20 X1 at > 20
Up to6 m 6 m
1200 m
2
0.3 m to 0.5 m 0.3 m to 0.5 m
6 m to 12 m 6,5 m
1300 m
2
0.4 m to 0.7 m 0.4 m to 0.9 m
12 m to
16 m *)**)
7 m*))
1400 m
2
**)
0.6 m to
0.9 m**)
0.8 m to
1.2 m**)
X2 = greatest permissible horizontal distance of any point
of the ceiling to the next-closest beam
H
and the
highest allowable detector/reflector distance)
6
X1 = distance between the detector and the ceiling
horizontal; if a roof has different pitches (e. g. sheds), use
the smallest pitch.
* With a room height of more than 12 m, it is recommended
** Depends on use and environmental conditions (e. g.
quick fire and spread of smoke)

gable), the detectors and reflectors must be arranged
according to the roof pitch and the room height R
H
so
that the light beam runs along the roof in a
distance D
L
(see table).
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 FRay500050EN Linear Smoke Detector:
compact device with integrated transmitter and receiver
1 Reflective prism
1 Control unit
1 Installation kit
Electrical
Operating voltage 14 V DC 28 V DC
Current consumption
In standby < 12 mA @ 24 V DC
In alarm/fault < 52 mA @ 24 V DC
Reset control by power disruption > 5 s
Alarm relay (contact load) 100 mA @ 30 V
Fault relay (contact load) 100 mA @ 30 V
Mechanics
LED indicators for
Alarm Flashes red every 10 s
Fault Flashes yellow every 10 s
Operation Flashes green every 10 s s
Detector 135 x 135 x 135 mm
Prism reflector 100 x 100 x 10 mm
Control unit 200 x 235 x 71 mm
Housing
Color Light gray/black
Material C6600, non-flammable
Weight
Detector 500 g
Prism reflector 70 g
Control unit 900 g
Permissible operating temperature -10 C55C
Planning
Permissible distance detector-re-
flector
Min. 8 m max. 50 m
with FRay5000LRKit Long Range
Kit
Min. 50 m max. 100 m
Lateral detection
(on either sides of the light beam)
Max. 7.5 m (heed local guidelines!)
Special features
Tolerance of the axial deviation
Detector 0.3
Reflective prism 5.0
FRay5000-50-EN Linear Smoke Detector
Range 850 m
FRay5000-50-EN
Accessories
FRay5000-LR-Kit Long Range Kit
3 additional prisms for ranges between 164 ft
and 328 ft (50 m and 100 m).
FRay5000-LR-Kit
FRAY5000-BR Universal Bracket Accessory
for FRay5000
Universal Bracket for use with Fireray 5000
detector head or FRAY5000-4PRISM Prism
Plate for 4 prism or FRAY5000-1PRISM Prism
Plate for 1 prism.
FRAY5000-BR
FRAY5000-4PRISM Prism Plate for 4 prism
Prism Plate for 4 prisms for use with
FRAY5000-BR Universal Bracket Accessory
for Fray5000 (not included).
FRAY5000-4PRISM
FRAY5000-1PRISM Prism Plate for 1 prism
Prism Plate for 1 prism for use with FRAY5000-
BR Universal Bracket Accessory for Fray5000
(not included).
FRAY5000-1PRISM
6
FCSLWM1 Linear Heat
Detector
Features
Resistant to mechanical and chemical influences,
corrosion, humidity and dust
Simple installation and initial set-up
Minimal maintenance costs through continual self-
monitoring of the sensor cable.
Configurable response temperature
Test key for maintenance (simulates alarm and
malfunction).
Use in constricted spaces and under extreme
environmental conditions.
The FCSLWM1 is a Linear Heat Detector for detecting fire.
Its functionality is based on the change in resistance of an
electrical conductor caused by a rise in temperature.
Functions
The four copper wires on the sensor cable are each
surrounded by a color-coded (orange, white, red, blue)
material with a negative temperature coefficient and
encased in a thermally resistant external coating. Two
copper wires are connected to the bare end of the sensor
cable to form two loops. The end of the sensor cable is then
hermetically sealed. Both loops are continually monitored.
In the event of an interruption or short circuit, the control
unit outputs a trouble message.
If the temperature rises, the electrical resistance between
the two loops changes. The control unit detects this change
and triggers the alarm if the defined response temperature
is exceeded. Both short sensor lengths and longer sections
with small temperature increases
are detected.
Europe CE FCS-LWM-1
Germany VdS G 205066 FCS-LWM-1
Parts Included
Quant. Component
1 Detector box with control unit
Electrical
Voltage 10 - 30 V DC
Current consumption
On alarm (ALARM DIFF/

ALARM MAX)
25 mA (at 24 V DC)
Malfunction 15 mA (at 24 V DC)

Switch-on current < 100 mA (at 24 V DC)
Mechanical
Display
In operation LED green, continuously lit
ALARM DIFF LED red, continuously lit
ALARM MAX LED red, continuously lit
Malfunction LED yellow, flashing light

Test keys 2 x for simulating alarm, malfunction
and LED test
Material ABS
Color Grey, similar to RAL 7035
Weight Appr. 550 g
Temperature range - 20 C to + 50 C
6
Sensor Cables
Features
Blue Sensor Cable Suitable for use in non-aggressive at-

mosphere with high humidity
Black Sensor Cable with Nylon

Coating
Suitable for use in aggressive atmos-
phere (nylon coating protects
against acids and bases)
Black Sensor Cable with Steel

Netting
suitable for use in aggressive atmos-
phere (nylon coating protects
against acids and bases), the sur-
rounding stainless steel netting re-
duces the mechanical load of the ca-
ble under extreme conditions.
Heat resistance
Up to 100 C Unlimited
Up to 150 C 35 h
Up to 175 C 25 h
Exterior diameter
Blue Sensor Cable 3.15 mm

Coating
4.1 mm

Netting
4.7 mm
Weight per 100 m
Blue Sensor Cable 1600 g

Coating
2150 g

Netting
4150 g
Minimum tensile strength 100 N
Wire diameter 0.46 mm
Coating thickness 0.34 mm
Thickness of the exterior jacket 0.25 mm
Wire material
Lines 1 + 3 (orange + red) Copper (blank)
Lines 2 + 4 (white + blue) Copper (with polyester coating)

Coating material
Lines 1 + 3 (orange + red) Special NTC polymer
Lines 2 + 4 (white + blue) Non-conductive polymer

FCSLWM1 Linear Heat Detector FCS-LWM-1
Accessories
Blue Sensor Cable, per Meter
suitable for use in non-aggressive atmosphere
with high humidity
LHD4-SC-BLUE
Black Sensor Cable with Nylon Coating,
per Meter
suitable for use in aggressive atmosphere (ny-
lon coating protects against acids and bases)
LHD4-SC-BLACK
Black Sensor Cable with Woven Steel Cover,
per Meter
suitable for use in aggressive atmosphere (ny-
lon coating protects against acids and bases)
LHD4-SC-STEEL
Terminal Connector for Sensor Cable LHD4-terminal
Intermediate Connector for Sensor Cable LHD4-connector
6
ADW 511A Linear Heat
Detector
Features
Compact, robust design
Suitable for use under extreme environmental
conditions
Low maintenance costs through periodic fully
automated seal verification and self-monitoring
Application-specific default settings by rotary switch
Response behavior can be programmed by PC
The Transafe ADW 511A is a Linear Heat Detector with
differential and maximum temperature recording.
The mode of operation is based on volumetric expansion of
a gas on heating and the corresponding increase in pressure
in a pneumatically sealed system.
The heat detector comprises a sensor tube (SENSTUBE)
and a detector box (with control unit).
The robust design makes the ADW 511A particularly
suitable for use in extreme areas in which conventional
detectors cannot be used (e. g. response grades in line with
EN 54 Part 5 and for increased ambient temperatures in line
with EN 54 Part 8).
System Overview
10
11
9
2
ADW511
12
5 1 3
8 7 6 4
16
13
14
15
Pos. Description
1 End screw cap
2 Sensor tube segment
3 Fixing bridles
4 + 5 SERTO clamp
6 Sensor tube segment
7 Sensor tube connection
8 Reference tube
9 Operating status display LEDs
10 PC board with evaluation electronics
11 Detector box housing
12 Cable duct (PG clamp)
13 Pump drive motor
14 Pump
15 Fiber-optic cable for the 3 display LEDs (Pos. 9)
16 Housing cover of the detector box
Functions
The pressure sensor continually measures the pressure in
the sensor tube. The sensor signals are evaluated by the
microprocessor. The differential behavior is electronic.
If the pressure in the sensor tube rises strongly over a short
time, the ADW 511A triggers an alarm.
Disturbance variables such as slow pressure changes, e. g.
as a result of weather-related temperature fluctuations or
pressure blows caused by high volumes of traffic in tunnels
are filtered out.
The evaluation of maximums is designed so that the
pressure value corresponding to a programmable maximum
temperature triggers the alarm. The ADW 511A also
responds to gradual temperature increases over a longer
time period, e.g. T = 40K/h overheating of an oven. A
temperature sensor in the detector box continually
measures the current ambient temperature and derives the
reference value for the maximum evaluation value.
Self-monitoring
A test motor with a pressure pump generates a specified
pressure excess in the sensor tube in regular, configurable
intervals.
6
If the value measured by the sensor does not correspond to
the set value, e. g. because of a leak or crushing of the
sensor tube, a fault indication is displayed.
Alarm and fault indications take the form of three LEDs on
the PC board using three fiber-optic cables in the housing
cover.
Europe CE ADW 511 A
Germany VdS G 204122 ADW 511A
General Planning Notes
The mounting location of the detector box and sensor

tube (SENSTUBE) must not be exposed to direct
sunlight.
The detector box can be mounted anywhere, although

a minimum distance of 0.1 m from switching boxes,
niches etc. must be provided on the sensor tube
connection side.
If used in a tunnel, or if it must be fitted outdoors, the

detector box must be installed in an additional
protective box.
At tunnel entrance portals, a distance of 25 m must be

maintained between the sensor tube end and the
portal.
The minimum sensor tube length is 20 m.

Tunnel with curved roof, or round construction and 2 to
3 traffic lanes
SENSTUBE
SENSTUBE
The sensor tube must always be installed in the middle

of the tunnel roof (max. permitted side tolerance
0.5 m).
The maximum permitted sensor tube length is 130 m.

Tunnel with flat roof and 2 to 3 traffic lanes
SENSTUBE
a
SENSTUBE
The sensor tube should preferably be installed in the

middle of the tunnel roof (max. permitted side
tolerance 0.5 m).
The sensor tube side mounting is possible taking a

minimum distance (a) to tunnel wall into account.
-
For 2 traffic lanes: a > 0.5 m
-
For 3 traffic lanes: a > 1.0 m

Tunnel with flat roof and more than 3 traffic lanes
a b b
SENSTUBE
At least two sensor tubes are required
The maximum distance (a) between the sensor tubes is

10 m.
The maximum distance (b) between sensor tube and

tunnel wall is a = 5 m.
Storage halls, parking garages, vehicle decks and
applications with similar usage
a
b
ADW
511
a
a
b
b
b
SENSTUBE 2
SENSTUBE 1
It is possible to lay the sensor tube in a spiral.
The maximum distance (a) between the sensor tubes is

7.2 m.
The maximum distance (b) between sensor tube and

tunnel wall is a = 3.6 m.
Roof underpinnings must take guidelines in force into

account.
Other applications
For all other applications, the sensor tube must be

installed after agreement with the commissioning
authorities responsible.
The permitted sensor tube length is 80 m as standard.

Longer lengths are application-specific and must be
approved by the manufacturer.
For use in areas with raised ambient temperature, metal

bridles must be used for sensor tube mounting. In
addition, the detector box must be mounted in an area
with normal ambient temperatures.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 Transafe ADW 511A detector box,
signal analysis and monitoring module of the linear maximum and
differential heat detector
6
Electrical
(12 / 24 V DC operation)
Measured at
10.5 V DC / 14 V DC
In standby 114 mA / 90 mA approx.
In the event of an alarm (diff./

max.)
124 mA / 99 mA approx.
In the event of pre-alarm +

alarm
135 mA / 108 mA approx.
In the event of malfunction 103 mA / 81 mA approx.
When testing 127 mA / 102 mA approx.

Maximum contact load of alarm relay 1 A / 50 V DC
Mechanics
Connections Contact outputs for
Alarm
Pre-alarm
Malfunction
Leakage
RS232 serial interface 9pin DSUB connector for program-
ming and data transmission
Displays
ALARM DIFF LED red
ALARM MAX LED red
POWER / FAULT LED yellow

Detector box
Material Polyester, fiber-reinforced
Color Dark gray, RAL 7000
Weight 1700 g approx.

Sensor tube
Material Copper
Dimensions ( x L) 5 mm x 20 m to 130m
Detector box -20 C to +50 C

Sensor tube
(1)
-40 C to +160 C
Permissible relative humidity
Detector box 95 %
Sensor tube 100 %

(1) Subject to prior consultation with Bosch ST, lower or
higher operating temperatures may be possible
System limits
Maximum permitted sensor tube
length
Tunnel applications (incl. tube

mounting)
20 m to 130 m
For other applications (incl.

tube mounting)
20 m to 80 m
Special features
Detection principle Change in volume of gases caused by
temperature change
Detector class according to EN 54-5 A1 - G
ADW 511A Linear Heat Detector ADW 511 A
Accessories
Copper Pipe and Accessories
order quantity must be specified in meters,
delivery occurs in 5.5 m long pieces, 5 mm,
including 6 clamps and 1 SERTO screw con-
nector
ADW53A6M-CU-
PIPE
Plastic Hose, 25 m Reel
PA (polyamide)
ADW53A-TUBE
6
Infrared Flame Detectors
Features
Compact, robust and nearly maintenance-free
Suitable for outdoor use under extreme conditions
Optimal adjustment to the environmental conditions
with 10 DIP switches
Two sensitivity levels
Easy-to-see red individual display
For room heights from 1.50 m to 20 m
Infrared Flame Detectors are used to detect open flames in
rooms or outdoors.
They are especially suitable for smokeless liquid and gas
fires as well as for fires of materials that contain carbon with
strong smoke development.
Typical areas of application are:
large industrial warehouses, airplane hangars, chemical
facilities, oil refineries, machine rooms, ferries and freight
ships, power plants, printing plants, wood warehouses,
subway tunnels.
The DF1101AEx is an inherently safe Infrared Flame
Detector for use in explosive areas of the zones 1 and 2,
e. g. in high warehouse halls for flammable liquids, where
liquid fires could occur in an explosive atmosphere.
System Overview
FLM-420/4-CON
EOL22(Ex)
DO1101A-Ex
DCA1192 SB3
DCA1192 SB3
DFA1101A-Ex
DO1101A-Ex
1 2
Pos. Description
1 Non-Ex area
Functions
The detection element of the Infrared Flame Detector
consists of two pyroelectric sensors (sensor 1 and 2) and a
silicon photo diode (sensor 3).
While sensor 1 detects the flame, the other two sensors
measure the malfunction beam in other wavelength ranges.
Sensor Spectral range Detection from
1 4.0 m to 4.8 m CO
2
2 5.1 m to 6.0 m Sources of interference
3 0.7 m to 1.1 m Solar radiation
The combination of the three sensors and the intelligent
signal processing with fuzzy algorithms and wavelet creates
outstanding reliability of detection with high protection
against false alarms.
The D1101AEx meets the explosion classification in line
with IEC 60079 and EN 50020 (Eex ib IIC T4).
Europe CE DF 1192
DF 1101-Ex
Germany VdS G 299085 DF1101-Ex/DF1192
Both Infrared Flame Detectors comply with EN 5410.
The response sensitivity and the resulting monitoring

area of an Infrared Flame Detector depend on:
-
Detection distance
-
Possible spread of fire
6
-
Fire material
-
Detector sensitivity
-
Detector arrangement.
Purely for physical reasons, IR flame detectors can

detect no fires of inorganic materials (e. g. sulfur,
phosphorous, magnesium, natrium, hydrogen, etc.).
The detector must have a direct visual line to all

possible fire locations of the monitoring area.
Practical area monitoring is achieved with a detector

arrangement at a 45 to the corners of the area.
If the room height is more than 5 m, the detector axis

should be aligned towards the opposite corner of the
room.
The space above the detector is outside of the detection

area.
Despite wide-ranging insensitivity, the sensors must be

protected against direct or indirect sunlight; it may be
necessary to install a covering housing.
The Infrared Flame Detectors can be connected using a

NBK 100 LSN to the Local SecurityNetwork LSN.
Parts Included
DF1192 1 Infrared Flame Detector DF1192
D1101A-Ex 1 Infrared Flame Detector D1101AEx
1 Base for Infrared Flame Detector DFB1190
Note With the Infrared Flame Detector DF1192, the
DFB1190 detector base is not included in the
scope of delivery and must be ordered
separately.
Electrical
Standby current consumption 0.5 mA
Mechanics
Connection terminals
0.2 mm
2
. . . 2.5 mm
2
Detector 135 x 135 x 32 mm
Detector incl. base 135 x 135 x 77 mm

Housing material
Detector Cast aluminum
Base Plastic, PC, fiber-reinforced

Color (detector and base) White, RAL 9010
Weight incl. base
DF1192 500 g
DF1101A-Ex 750 g
Relative humidity < 100 %, no heavy condensation of the
sensor window
Planning
Max. installation height 1.5 . . . 20 m
Max. monitoring area
80 m
2
Special features
Detection principle Detection of infrared radiation
Detection area 90
DF1192 Infrared Flame Detector DF1192
DFB1190 Base for Infrared Flame Detector DF1192-base
DF1101AEx Infrared Flame Detector for Ex
Areas
DF1101A-Ex
Output Module
SB3
6
FAD420HSEN Duct
Smoke Detector
Features
Use in ventilation systems with air velocities from
1.5 m/s to 20 m/s
For the activation of fans, door controls or external
display devices an optional Relay Board can be
installed
A clear section on the frosted cover allows observing
the alarm LED of the integrated FADO420 Detector
Control to prevent unwanted removal of the cover
Easy installation of the FADO420 Detector
isolators
The FAD420HSEN Duct Smoke Detector with integrated
FADO420 Detector detects smoke in ventilation ducts.
Smoke particles in the air are reliably detected and
reported to the fire panel by the LSN improved bus system.
System Overview
E
B
D C
A
A Air sampling housing
B Detector Base for the FADO420 Detector
C,D Mounting flange for sample tube or ventilation tube
E Connection board
Functions
Air from the ventilation duct is constantly directed through
the sample tube and the air sampling housing to the
purpose-built FADO420 Detector.
Smoke particles in the air are reliably detected and
reported to the fire panel by the LSN improved bus system.
Europe CE FAD-O 420
Air velocities from 1.5 m/s to 20 m/s
Horizontal or vertical mount of housing
If a remote indicator is connected (like MPA or

FAA420RI), the FADRBDIBT Relay Board must not be
used!
Parts Included
Quant. Component
1 Air sampling housing with connection board, Detector base and
installation material
1 D344-1.5 sample tube (length 45.7 cm)
1 Ventilation tube
2 D344-TF air filter for sample and ventilation tube
Note Please note that the FAD420HSEN does not
come with the required FADO420 Detector.
The FADO420 Detector has to be ordered in
addition.
FAD-420-HS-EN Duct Smoke Detector
Electrical
Operating voltage 24 V DC (15 33 V DC)
Maximum current consumption Approx. 0.5 mA (approx. 0.7 mA
when FADRBDIBT Relay Board is in-
stalled)
Electromagnetic susceptibility
(EMS)
EN 501304
Electromagnetic emission (EME) EN 6100063
Mechanics
Dimensions (H x W x D) 16.5 x 39.5 x 11 cm
Material and Color
Housing base Plastic fiber reinforced, PPE + PS

(UL94-V1), grey
Housing cover Plastic, PC (UL94-V2), clear

6
Environmental Conditions
Permissible air velocity 1.5 m/s 20 m/s
Permissible operating temperature 0 C 50 C
Permissible storage temperature -20 C 80 C
Permissible relative humidity 95 %, non condensing
FAD-RB-DIBT Relay Board
Maximum contact load 2 A at 30 V DC
Weight 11 g
FAD420HSEN Duct Smoke Detector
The FADO420 Detector must be ordered in
addition.
FAD-420-HS-EN
Accessories
FADO420 Detector for Use in Air Sampling
Housing
FAD-O420
FADRBDIBT Relay Board for DIBT
Application
FAD-RB-DIBT
D3443 Sample Tube
length 91.4 cm (3 ft)
D344-3
D3445 Sample Tube
length 1.52 m (5 ft)
D344-5
D344TF Filter for Sample/Ventilation Tube
Replaceable filters for duct detector sampling
tubes, available in packages of 20
D344-TF
6
Manual Call Points
7
LSN Manual Call Points 226
Conventional Manual Call Points 237
Accessories - Manual Call Points LSN and
Conventional 246
Conventional Manual Call Points for Ex
Areas 249
Accessories - Manual Call Points for Ex
Areas 251
226 | Manual Call Points | LSN Manual Call Points
FMC420RW Single Action
Call Points LSN improved
Features
Alarm triggering by pressing the black marking or
breaking the glass pane
Protection against injury through foil-labeled glass
pane
LED display for triggered alarm or inspection
evaluation
Individual call point identification
Call point query routines with evaluation and multiple
transmission
isolators
FMC420RW Single Action Call Points are used for manual
alarm triggering and can be employed in both the Local
SecurityNetwork (LSN) and the LSN improved version.
Functions
Single action call points with glass pane:
1
2
3
Pressing the black marking (1) breaks the glass pane (3),
which triggers the alarm and causes the LED display (2) to
flash.
Single action call points can be reset with the test key and
by replacing the glass pane (3). The LED display (2) goes
out.
Resettable single action call points:
1
2
4
Pressing the black marking (1) triggers the alarm. The alarm
status is displayed by the red window (4) and the flashing
LED display (2).
Single action call points can be reset using the test key. The
LED display (2) goes out.
Neither single action call points with glass pane nor
resettable single action call points are reset on the fire
panel.
Individual call point identification with display of the call
point address on the fire panel ensures the quick location
of the triggered call point.
Europe CPD 0786-CPD-20333 FMC-420RW
Germany VdS G 207087 FMC-420RW
Manual call points must be mounted visibly along

escape and rescue routes (e.g. exits, passageways,
stairwells) and be easily accessible.
An installation height of 1400 mm 200 mm (55 in. 8

in.), measured from the middle of the manual call point
to the floor, must be maintained.
Manual call points must be sufficiently lit with daylight

or another light source (including emergency lighting if
present).
The maximum number of LSN elements that can be

connected depends on their current consumption from
the LSN data line. The limit values should be taken from
the product information supplied with the fire panel
used.
7
Manual Call Points | LSN Manual Call Points | 227
Standards, guidelines and planning recommendations

regarding the installation location etc. should also be
taken into consideration.
The regulations of the local fire services must be

observed.
Parts Included
Quanti-
ty
Components
1 FMC-420RW-GSGRD Manual Call Point with Glass Pane, Surface-
mounted, Red
1 FMC-420RW-GSRRD Manual Call Point Resettable, Surface-
mounted, Red
1 FMC-420RW-GFGRD Manual Call Point with Glass Pane, Flush-
mounted, Red
1 FMC-420RW-GFRRD Manual Call Point Resettable, Flush-mount-
ed, Red
1 FMC-420RW-GSGYE Manual Call Point with Glass Pane, Surface-
mounted, Yellow
1 FMC-420RW-GSRYE Manual Call Point Resettable, Surface-
mounted, Yellow
1 FMC-420RW-GSGBU Manual Call Point with Glass Pane, Surface-
mounted, Blue
1 FMC-420RW-GSRBU Manual Call Point Resettable, Surface-
mounted, Blue
Note The FMCKEYRW Test Key is not included in
the scope of delivery and must be ordered
separately.
Electrical
Operating voltage 15 VDC to 33 VDC
Mechanical components
Dimensions (H x W x D)
FMC420RWGFGRD,
FMC420RWGFRRD
107 mm x 107 mm x 38.5 mm (4.2
in. x 4.2 in. x 1.5 in.)
FMC420RWGSGRD,
FMC420RWGSGBU,
FMC420RWGSGYE
87 mm x 87 mm x 56 mm (3.4 in. x
3.4 in. x 2.2 in.)
FMC420RWGSRRD,
FMC420RWGSRBU,
FMC420RWGSRYE
87 mm x 87 mm x 56 mm (3.4 in. x
3.4 in. x 2.2 in.)
Colors
Red RAL 3001
Blue RAL 5005
Yellow RAL 1003

EN 60529
IP 52
FMC420RWGSGRD Manual Call Point with
Glass Pane, Red
Surface-mounted
FMC-420RW-
GSGRD
FMC420RWGSRRD Manual Call Point
Resettable, Red
Surface-mounted
FMC-420RW-
GSRRD
FMC420RWGFGRD Manual Call Point with
Glass Pane, Flush-mounted, Red
Flush-mounted
FMC-420RW-
GFGRD
FMC420RWGFRRD Manual Call Point
Resettable, Flush-mounted, Red
Flush-mounted
FMC-420RW-
GFRRD
FMC420RWGSGYE Manual Call Point with
Glass Pane, Yellow
Surface-mounted
FMC-420RW-
GSGYE
FMC420RWGSRYE Manual Call Point
Resettable, Yellow
Surface-mounted
FMC-420RW-
GSRYE
FMC420RWGSGBU Manual Call Point with
Glass Pane, Blue
Surface-mounted
FMC-420RW-
GSGBU
FMC420RWGSRBU Manual Call Point
Resettable, Blue
Surface-mounted
FMC-420RW-
GSRBU
Accessories
FMCSPACERRWRD Spacer, Red
For the flush-mounted variant of the RW call
points. Its use increases the storage room for
the cables.
1 unit = 5 spacers
FMC-SPACER-
RWRD
FMCSPGLRW Spare Glasses
Spare glasses for all RW call points.
1 unit = 5 spare glasses
FMC-SPGL-RW
FMCSIGNRW Out of Order Sign
Used instead of the glass pane when a call point
is not ready for use.
1 unit = 5 signs
FMC-SIGN-RW
FMCKEYRW Test Key
The key can open, check, and reset manual call
points.
1 unit = 1 key
FMC-KEY-RW
FMCFLAPRW Clear Hinged Flap
To protect against accidental triggering; with
seal.
1 unit = 5 flaps
FMC-FLAP-RW
7
FMC-420RW Single Action Call Points LSN improved version

FMC-420RW-GSGRD FMC-420RW-GSRRD FMC-420RW-GFGRD FMC-420RW-GFRRD
Design with glass pane resettable with glass pane resettable
Range of use indoor indoor indoor indoor
Mounting surface-mounted surface-mounted flush-mounted flush-mounted
Current consumption 0.4 mA 0.4 mA 0.4 mA 0.4 mA
perature
-25C . . . +70C -25C . . . +70C -25C . . . +70C -25C . . . +70C
Color red, RAL 3001 red, RAL 3001 red, RAL 3001 red, RAL 3001
7
FMC-420RW Single Action Call Points LSN improved version

FMC-420RW-GSGYE FMC-420RW-GSRYE FMC-420RW-GSGBU FMC-420RW-GSRBU
Design with glass pane resettable with glass pane resettable
Range of use indoor indoor indoor indoor
Mounting surface-mounted surface-mounted surface-mounted surface-mounted
Current consumption 0.4 mA 0.4 mA 0.4 mA 0.4 mA
perature
-25C . . . +70C -25C . . . +70C -25C . . . +70C -25C . . . +70C
Color yellow, RAL 1003 yellow, RAL 1003 blue, RAL 5005 blue, RAL 5005
7
FMC210DM Manual Call
Points
Features
Adjustment of the Manual Call Point after alarm
triggering
Automatic or manual detector addressing via rotary
switch possible
Indicator LED for alarm or for inspection evaluation
transmission
isolators
The FMC210DM Manual Call Points are used to trigger the
alarm manually, and are deployed in the Local
SecurityNetwork LSN and LSN improved. Form H Manual
Call Points are designed for outdoor deployment, form G
Manual Call Points are designed for indoor deployment.
Functions
1 1
2
2 3
3
4
5
In the event of an alarm, the glass pane (2) is broken first,
then the manual call point (3) is pressed hard. This activates
the microswitch for alarm triggering and the indicator LED
(4) blinks. A mechanism holds the pressed call point down.
The manual call point can be reset with the reset lever (5)
or by closing the door of the manual call point (1). The
indicator LED (4) goes out.
This does not reset the alarm on the fire panel.
Variants
The designs of the manual call points for outdoor and indoor
use are identical. The manual call points for indoor use
(form G) are available in red, blue, and yellow; the manual
call points for outdoor use (form H) are available in red and
blue.
Form H manual call points are equipped with an especially
resistant PC board layered with parylene.
The manual call points offer all the features of the improved
LSN technology:
Flexible network structures, including "T-tapping"


detection

300 mA
Shielded and unshielded cables can be used

control panels.
Europe CE FMC-210-DM-G-B / -H-B / -SM-G-B
FMC-210-DM-G-R / -H-R / -SM-G-R
FMC-210-DM-G-Y / EST-G-B
CPD 0786-CPD-20293 FMC-210-DM-G/H-R
0786-CPD-20244 FMC-210-DM-G-Y
0786-CPD-20245 FMC-210-EST-G-B
Germany VdS G 206100 FMC-210-EST-G-B
G 206098 FMC-210-DM-G-R /-G-R-A/ -H-
R
G 206099 FMC-210-DM-G-Y
Poland CNBOP 0082/2008 FMC-210 DM-G-R, FMC-210
DM-H-R
Czech
Republic
TZS 080_12987 FMC-210
7
Slovakia EVP SK08-ZSV-0071 FMC-210-DM,
FMC-210-EST
Type Number Complies with
FMC210DMGR EN 54-11:2001/A1:2005, EN 54-17:2005
FMC210DMHR EN 54-11:2001/A1:2005, EN 54-17:2005
FMC210DMGY EN 12094-3:2003, EN 54-17:2005
FMC210ESTGB EN 12094-3:2003, EN 54-17:2005

An installation height of 1400 mm 200 mm, measured

from the middle of the manual call point to the floor,
must be maintained.
Manual call points must be adequately illuminated by

sunlight or another light source (including emergency
lighting if present).
The maximum number of LSN elements that may be

used.
Additional norms, guidelines, and planning

recommendations with respect to installation location,
etc. must be taken into account (see fire detector
manual).

observed.
Installation
The cable duct can be surface-mounted or flush-

mounted.
Installation in fire hose cabinets is possible in three

ways:
135 mm
140 mm
2,5 mm
2 mm
1
3
9

m
m
1
2
3
149,5 mm
12,5 mm
Pos. Description
1 Installation depth version 1: ca. 40 mm
2 Installation depth version 2: 14 mm
3 Installation depth version 3: min. 30 mm
Parts Included
Type Number Component
FMC210DMGR
Form G, Red
Manual Call Point for indoor use, indirect triggering
(type B), housing color red
FMC210DMHR
Form H, Red
Manual Call Point for outdoor use, indirect triggering
(type B) , housing color red
FMC210DMGB
Form G, Blue
(type B), housing color blue
FMC210DMHB
Form H, Blue
Manual Call Point for outdoor use, indirect triggering
(type B), housing color blue
FMC210DMGY
Form G, Yellow
(type B), housing color yellow
FMC210ESTGB
Form G, Blue
Electronic Stop Device for indoor use, indirect trig-
gering (type B), housing color blue
Note The key must be ordered separately.
7
Electrical
Operating voltage 24 V DC (15 V DC . . . 33 V DC)
Mechanics
Dimensions (W x H x D) 135 x 135 x 40 mm /
5.31 x 5.31 x 1.5 in.
Colors Red, RAL 3001
Blue, RAL 5005
Yellow, RAL 1003
Protection class as per EN 60529
Form H (outdoor use) IP 54
Form G (indoor use) IP 52

Norm
FMC210DMGR,
FMC210DMHR
EN 54-11
FMC210DMGY,
FMC210ESTGB
EN 12094-3
Form H (outdoor use) -25 C . . . +70 C /

-13 F 158 F
Form G (indoor use) -10 C . . . +55 C /

14 F 131 F
FMC210DMGR Form G, Red
Manual call point for indoor use, indirect trig-
gering (type B)
FMC-210-DM-G-R
FMC210DMHR Form H, Red
Manual call point for outdoor use, indirect trig-
gering (type B)
FMC-210-DM-H-R
FMC210DMGB Form G, Blue
gering (type B)
FMC-210-DM-G-B
FMC210DMHB Form H, Blue
Manual call point for outdoor use, indirect trig-
gering (type B)
FMC-210-DM-H-B
FMC210DMGY Form G, Yellow
gering (type B)
FMC-210-DM-G-Y
FMC210ESTGB Form G, Blue
Electronic stop device for indoor use, indirect
triggering (type B)
FMC-210-EST-G-B
Accessories
FMXFSOLSN Punched, Self-adhesive Foil
Sets (Blank)
For the labeling field of manual call points of
the Series FMC210.
1 unit = 10 sheets
FMX-FSO-LSN
FMCFSTDE Printed Labeling Foils for the
Upper Label Field
For yellow and blue manual call points of Series
FMC120 and FMC210, 1 unit = 5 sheets
FMC-FST-DE
FMCSPGLDEIL Spare Glasses
For manual call points of Series DM, DKM, SKM,
FMC120 and FMC210.
FMC-SPGL-DEIL
Sign with label "Nicht in Betrieb"
Metal sign for fire detectors form G or H
FMM-SIGN
Key for Fire Detectors Types G and H
made of red plastic (ASA)
FMM-KEY-Form G/H
7
FMC-210-DM Single Action Call Points

FMC-210-DM-G-R FMC-210-DM-H-R FMC-210-DM-G-B
Range of use indoor outdoor indoor
Mounting surface-mounted/flush-
mounted
surface-mounted/flush-
mounted
mounted
Current consumption 0.4 mA 0.4 mA 0.4 mA
Protection category IP 52 IP 54 IP 52
ture
-10C . . . +55C -25C . . . +70C -10C . . . +55C
Color red, RAL 3001 red, RAL 3001 blue, RAL 5005
7
FMC-210-DM Single Action Call Points

FMC-210-DM-H-B FMC-210-DM-G-Y FMC-210-EST-G-B
Range of use outdoor indoor indoor
mounted
mounted
mounted
Current consumption 0.4 mA 0.4 mA 0.4 mA
ture
-25C . . . +70C -10C . . . +55C -10C . . . +55C
Color blue, RAL 5005 yellow, RAL 1003 blue, RAL 5005
7
FMC210SM Single Action
Call Points
Features
Alarm triggering by breaking of the glass pane
Automatic or manual detector addressing via rotary
switch possible
transmission
isolators
The FMC210SM Single Action Call Points are used to
trigger the alarm manually, and can be used in the Local
SecurityNetwork LSN and LSN improved. The FMC210SM
Single Action Call Points are designed for indoor
deployment.
Functions
1 1
2
2 3
3
4
5
With single action call points, the alarm is triggered when
the glass plate (2) is broken and the button (3) springs up.
This activates the microswitch for alarm triggering and the
indicator LED (4) blinks.
The call point (3) can be reset after inserting a new glass
pane (2) and closing the door of the single action call point
(1). The indicator LED (4) goes out.
FMC210SMGR applies to
EN 5411:2001/A1:2005
EN 5417:2005
Europe CPD 0786-CPD-20316 FMC-210-SM-G-R
Germany VdS G 207008 FMC-210-SM-G-R

escape and rescue routes (e. g. exits, passageways,

must be maintained.
Manual call points must be adequately illuminated by

sunlight or another light source (including emergency
lighting if present).
The maximum number of LSN elements that may be

used.
Further standards, guidelines and planning

recommendations regarding the installation location
etc., should also be taken into consideration (see Fire
Detection manual).

observed.
Installation notes in accordance with VdS/VDE
The distance between manual call points should not be

more than 100 m according to DIN 14675 or 80 m
according to VdS.
In high risk areas, manual call points should be installed

at a distance of max. 40 m (VDE 0833 Part 2,
Point 7.2.6).
Installation
The cable duct can be surface-mounted or flush-

mounted.
7

ways:
135 mm
140 mm
2,5 mm
2 mm
1
3
9

m
m
1
2
3
149,5 mm
12,5 mm
Pos. Description
1 Installation depth version 1: ca. 40 mm
3 Installation depth version 3: min. 30 mm
Parts Included
TypeNumber. Component
FMC210SMGB
Form G, Blue
Single Action Call Point for indoor use, direct trig-
gering (type A)
FMC210SMGR
Form G, Red
Single Action Call Point for indoor use, direct trig-
gering (type A
Note The key must be ordered separately.
Electrical
Mechanics
Colors
FMC-210-SM-G-R Red, RAL 3001
FMC-210-SM-G-B Blue, RAL 5005

Permissible operating temperature -10 C. . . +55
FMC210SMGR Form G, Red
Single Action Call Point for indoor use, direct
triggering (type A)
FMC-210-SM-G-R
FMC210SMGB Form G, Blue
Single Action Call Point for indoor use, direct
triggering (type A)
FMC-210-SM-G-B
Accessories
Sets (Blank)
the Series FMC210.
1 unit = 10 sheets
FMX-FSO-LSN
Upper Label Field
FMC-FST-DE
FMC120 and FMC210.
FMC-SPGL-DEIL
FMM-KEY-Form G/H
FMM-SIGN
7
Manual Call Points | Conventional Manual Call Points | 237
FMC300RW Single Action
Call Points
Features
Alarm triggering by pressing the black marking or
breaking the glass pane
Protection against injury through foil-labeled glass
pane
LED display for triggered alarm or inspection
evaluation
FMC300RW Single Action Call Points are used for manual
alarm triggering and are employed in conventional
technology.
Functions
Single action call points with glass pane:
1
2
3
Pressing the black marking (1) breaks the glass pane (3),
which triggers the alarm and causes the LED display (2) to
flash.
Single action call points can be reset with the test key and
by replacing the glass pane (3). The LED display (2) goes
out.
Resettable single action call points:
1
2
4
Pressing the black marking (1) triggers the alarm. The alarm
status is displayed by the red window (4) and the flashing
LED display (2).
Single action call points can be reset using the test key. The
LED display (2) goes out.
Applies to EN 5411:2001/A1:2005
Europe CPD 0786-CPD-20332 FMC-300RW
Germany VdS G 207086 FMC-300 RW

An installation height of 1400 mm 200 mm (55 in. 8

in.), measured from the middle of the manual call point
to the floor, must be maintained.
Manual call points must be sufficiently lit with daylight

or another light source (including emergency lighting if
present).
The maximum number of LSN elements that can be

used.
Standards, guidelines and planning recommendations

regarding the installation location etc. should also be
taken into consideration.

observed.
7
238 | Manual Call Points | Conventional Manual Call Points
Parts Included
Quanti-
ty
Components
1 FMC-300RW-GSGBU Manual Call Point with Glass Pane, Blue
1 FMC-300RW-GSRBU Manual Call Point Resettable, Blue
1 FMC-300RW-GSGRD Manual Call Point with Glass Pane, Red
1 FMC-300RW-GSRRD Manual Call Point Resettable, Red
1 FMC-300RW-GSGYE Manual Call Point with Glass Pane, Yellow
1 FMC-300RW-GSRYE Manual Call Point Resettable, Yellow
Note The FMCKEYRW Test Key is not included in
the scope of delivery and must be ordered
separately.
Electrical
Operating voltage 20 VDC
(8.5 VDC to 30 VDC)
Current consumption specified by the respective security
system
Alarm resistor 820 +/- 10%
(8.5 VDC to 30 VDC)
Mechanical components
Dimensions (H x W x D) 87 mm x 87 mm x 56 mm (3.4 in. x
3.4 in. x 2.2 in.)
Colors
Red RAL 3001
Blue RAL 5005
Yellow RAL 1003

Protection category according to EN
60529
IP 52
FMC300RWGSGBU Manual Call Point with
Glass Pane, Blue
FMC-300RW-
GSGBU
FMC300RWGSRBU Manual Call Point
Resettable, Blue
FMC-300RW-
GSRBU
FMC300RWGSGRD Manual Call Point with
Glass Pane, Red
FMC-300RW-
GSGRD
FMC300RWGSRRD Manual Call Point
Resettable, Red
FMC-300RW-
GSRRD
FMC300RWGSGYE Manual Call Point with
Glass Pane, Yellow
FMC-300RW-
GSGYE
FMC300RWGSRYE Manual Call Point
Resettable, Yellow
FMC-300RW-
GSRYE
Accessories
FMCSPACERRWRD Spacer, Red
For the flush-mounted variant of the RW call
points. Its use increases the storage room for
the cables.
1 unit = 5 spacers
FMC-SPACER-
RWRD
FMCSPGLRW Spare Glasses
Spare glasses for all RW call points.
FMC-SPGL-RW
FMCSIGNRW Out of Order Sign
Used instead of the glass pane when a call point
is not ready for use.
1 unit = 5 signs
FMC-SIGN-RW
FMCKEYRW Test Key
The key can open, check, and reset manual call
points.
1 unit = 1 key
FMC-KEY-RW
FMCFLAPRW Clear Hinged Flap
To protect against accidental triggering; with
seal.
1 unit = 5 flaps
FMC-FLAP-RW
7
FMC-300RW Single Action Call Points

FMC-300RW-GSGBU FMC-300RW-GSRBU FMC-300RW-GSGRD
Design with glass pane resettable with glass pane
Range of use indoor indoor indoor
Mounting surface-mounted surface-mounted surface-mounted
Current consumption specified by the respective se-
curity system
specified by the respective se-
curity system
curity system
ture
-25C . . . +70C -25C . . . +70C -25C . . . +70C
Color blue, RAL 5005 blue, RAL 5005 red, RAL 3001
7
FMC-300RW Single Action Call Points

FMC-300RW-GSRRD FMC-300RW-GSGYE FMC-300RW-GSRYE
Design resettable with glass pane resettable
Range of use indoor indoor indoor
Mounting surface-mounted surface-mounted surface-mounted
curity system
curity system
curity system
ture
-25C . . . +70C -25C . . . +70C -25C . . . +70C
Color red, RAL 3001 yellow, RAL 1003 yellow, RAL 1003
7
FMC120DKM Manual Call
Points
Features
Adjustment of the manual call point after alarm
triggering
Second contact with connections for panel control
Variants for indoor and outdoor use
The FMC-120-DKM Manual Call Points handle manual alarm
triggering and are used with conventional technology.
Functions
1 1
2
2 3
3
4
5
then the manual call point (3) is pressed hard.
This activates the micro switch for alarm triggering and the
indicator LED (4) blinks.
A locking mechanism holds the pressed manual call point.
The manual call point can be reset with the reset lever (5).
The indicator LED (4) goes out.
Variants
The design of the manual call points for indoor (form G) and
outdoor use (form H) are identical. Three color variants,
red, blue, and yellow are available.
Detectors for outdoor use (form H) have a cover equipped
with a seal.
Europe CE FMC-120-EST-G-B / -DKM-G-Y
FMC-120-DKM-G-R / -H-R
FMC-120-DKM-G-B
CPD 0786-CPD-20294 FMC-120-DKM-G/H-R
0786-CPD-20231 FMC-120-DKM-G-Y
0786-CPD-20232 FMC-120-EST-G-B/-
H-HE
Germany VdS G 298061 FMC-120-DKM-G-R / -H-R
G 206079 FMC-120-DKM-G-Y
G 206080 FMC-120-EST-G-B
O/T 300/400, DKM/SKM 120, DM/SM
210, MPA
01 ATEX 2163 X FMC-120-DKM
Type Number Complies with
FMC120DKMGR EN54-11:2001/A1:2005
FMC120DKMHR EN54-11:2001/A1:2005
FMC120DKMGY EN12094-3:2003
FMC120ESTGB EN12094-3:2003
Manual call points have to be mounted visibly along


must be maintained.
Manual call points must be illuminated sufficiently with

daylight or another light source (including emergency
lighting, if present).
Max. one test detector may be used for primary lines

together with automatic detectors. The test detector is
connected at the end of the primary line.

Detection manual).
Regulations of local fire departments must be observed.

Installation
Cables can be inserted surface-mounted or flush-

mounted.
7
3,4

ways:
135
140
2,5
2
1
3
9
1
2
3
10
147
Pos. Description
3 Installation depth version 3: approx. 30 mm
Electrical
Operating voltage 24 V DC (16.2 V DC . . . 30 V DC)
Current consumption Specified by the respective security
system
Mechanics
Dimensions (W x H x D) 135 x 135 x 37 mm /
5.31 x 5.31 x 1.4 in.
Housing material Plastic (ASA)
Blue, RAL 5005
Yellow, RAL 1003
Form G (indoor area) IP 52
Form H (outdoor area) IP 54
Norm
FMC-120-DKM-G-R,
FMC120DKMHR
EN 54-11
FMC-120-DKM-G-Y,
FMC120ESTGB
EN 12094-3
Form G (indoor area) -10 C . . . +55 C /
14 F 131 F
Form H (outdoor area) -25 C . . . +70 C /
-13 F 158 F
FMC120DKMGR Form G, Red
Conventional Manual Call Point for indoor use,
indirect triggering (type B)
FMC-120-DKM-G-R
FMC120DKMHR Form H, Red
Conventional Manual Call Point for outdoor
use, indirect triggering (type B)
FMC-120-DKM-H-R
FMC120DKMGB Form G, Blue
FMC-120-DKM-G-B
FMC120DKMHB Form H, Blue
Conventional Manual Call Point for outdoor
FMC-120-DKM-H-B
FMC120DKMGY Form G, Yellow
FMC-120-DKM-G-Y
FMC120ESTGB Form G, Blue
Conventional Electronic Stop Device for indoor
FMC-120-EST-G-B
Accessories
FMXFSOGLT Punched, Self-adhesive Foil
Sets (Blank)
For the labeling field of conventional manual
call points of the Series FMC120,
1 unit = 10 sheets
FMX-FSO-GLT
Upper Label Field
FMC-FST-DE
FMC120 and FMC210.
FMC-SPGL-DEIL
7
FMM-SIGN
FMM-KEY-Form G/H
7
FMC-120-DKM Single Action Call Points

FMC-120-DKM-G-R FMC-120-DKM-H-R FMC-120-DKM-G-B
Range of use indoor outdoor indoor
mounted
mounted
mounted
curity system
curity system
curity system
ture
-10C . . . +55C -25C . . . +70C -10C . . . +55C
Color red, RAL 3001 red, RAL 3001 blue, RAL 5005
7
FMC-120-DKM Single Action Call Points

FMC-120-DKM-H-B FMC-120-DKM-G-Y FMC-120-EST-G-B
Range of use outdoor indoor indoor
mounted
mounted
mounted
curity system
curity system
curity system
ture
-25C . . . +70C -10C . . . +55C -10C . . . +55C
Color blue, RAL 5005 yellow, RAL 1003 blue, RAL 5005
7
246 | Manual Call Points | Accessories - Manual Call Points LSN and Conventional
Punched, Self-adhesive
Foil Sets (Blank), for Oper-
ating Panel and Labeling
Field
10 punched foil sets, appropriate for DM/DKM/SM/SKM, for
individual printing with a customary laser printer
The required print file is available on the WinPara diskette.
Punched, Self-adhesive Foil Sets (Blank),
for Operating Panel and Labeling Field
10 units, for DM/DKM/SM/SKM, for individual
printing
DKM120-LABEL
FMXFSOLSN Punched,
Self-adhesive Foil Sets
(Blank)
For the labeling field of manual call points of the Series
FMC210.
1 unit = 10 sheets
Appropriate for printing at standard laser printers. The
required print file is available on the WinPara disk.
Sets (Blank)
the Series FMC210.
1 unit = 10 sheets
FMX-FSO-LSN
7
Manual Call Points | Accessories - Manual Call Points LSN and Conventional | 247
FMXFSOGLT Punched,
Self-adhesive Foil Sets
(Blank)
For the labeling field of conventional manual call points of
the Series FMC120.
1 unit = 10 sheets
Appropriate for printing at standard laser printers. The
required print file is available on the WinPara disk.
FMXFSOGLT Punched, Self-adhesive Foil
Sets (Blank)
For the labeling field of conventional manual
call points of the Series FMC120,
1 unit = 10 sheets
FMX-FSO-GLT
FMCFSTDE Printed
Labeling Foils for the
Upper Label Field
For yellow and blue manual call points of Series FMC120
and FMC210.
1 unit = 5 sheets
All labeling foils meet the requirements of the EN 120943
(use in gas extinguishing system).
Upper Label Field
FMC-FST-DE
7
248 | Manual Call Points | Accessories - Manual Call Points LSN and Conventional
FMCSPGLDEIL Spare
Glasses
For manual call points of Series DM, DKM, SKM, FMC120
and FMC210.
FMC120 and FMC210.
FMC-SPGL-DEIL
7
Manual Call Points | Conventional Manual Call Points for Ex Areas | 249
Conventional Manual Call
Points for Ex Areas
The Conventional Manual Call Points for Ex Areas are used
to manually activate the alarm in zones 1 and 2 at risk of
explosion.
The K type call points are encapsulated, intrinsically safe
call points and do not require any safety barriers.
The DM 1103 BEx Manual Call Points for ex zones must be
connected via a Safety Barrier SB 3 incl. Input/Output
Module DCA1192 (see system overview).
System Overview
FLM-420/4-CON
EOL22(Ex)
DO1101A-Ex
DCA1192 SB3
DCA1192 SB3
DFA1101A-Ex
DO1101A-Ex
1 2
For DM 1103 BEx:
Pos. Description
1 Non-ex area
Functions
then the pushbutton (3) is pressed hard. Thus the switch
triggers the alarm.
A locking mechanism holds the pressed manual call point.
The pushbutton can be reset with the reset lever.
Europe CE DM 1103
BASEEFA Ex 98E2304 DM 1103 B-Ex
Germany VdS G 297060 DKM 2014/2-ex/-GLU
G 295036 DM 1103 B-Ex
PTB 97 ATEX 3197 DKM 2014/2 / DKM
2014/2-GLU
Hungary TMT TMT-50-05/2004 DM 200, DM 210, DKM
120, DM 1103B-Ex
Manual call points must be illuminated sufficiently with

daylight or another light source (including emergency
lighting, if present).

must be maintained.
Manual call points must be installed along escape and

rescue routes (e.g. exits, passageways, stairwells).

Detection manual).
Regulations of local fire departments must be observed.

VDE
The distance between manual call points should not

exceed 100 m according to DIN 14675 or 80 m
according to VdS.
In high risk areas, manual call points should be installed

at a distance of max. 40 m (VDE 0833 Part 2,
Point 7.2.6).
According to VdS, up to 10 manual call points can be

connected to a primary line.
DKM 2014/2ex Manual Call Point Type K
For connection to the LSN, an NBK 100 LSN Fire

Interface is required.
Can be connected directly to the following conventional

control panels:
-
BZ 1012
-
BZ 1060
-
UEZ 1000 GLT.
With an NBK 100 LSN Fire Interface, can be connected

to the following control panels:
-
BZ 500 LSN
-
UEZ 1000 LSN
7
250 | Manual Call Points | Conventional Manual Call Points for Ex Areas
-
UEZ 2000 LSN
-
UGM 2020 LSN
DKM 2014/2exUGM Manual Call Point Type K, for
Connection to UGM Conventional
Can be connected directly to the UGMGLT Universal

Danger Detection System
DM 1103 B-Ex manual call point for ex area
For connection to the LSN, an NBK 100 LSN interface is

required.
For use in explosive areas of zones 1 and 2, a safety

barrier and an input/output module are required, which
must be mounted in front of the ex area.
Cables can be inserted surface-mounted or flush-

mounted
Parts Included
DKM 2014/2ex 1 Manual Call Point Type K, for ex areas, for
surface mounting
DKM 2014/2exUGM 1 Manual Call Point Type K, for Connection to
UGM Conventional, for ex areas, for surface
mounting
DM 1103 B-Ex 1
1
2
DM 1103 B-Ex manual call point, color red
Key for DM1103B-Ex manual call point
PG11 cable screws
DKM 2014/2exUGM Manual Call Point Type K, for Connection to UGM
Conventional
Operating voltage 24 V DC
Switch contact Type 366 (encapsulated), II 2 G EEx
d II C
Maximum contact load 5 A / 250 V AC
0,25 A / 250 V DC
Cable entry
1x M16 x 1.5 tightening diam-

eter 48 mm, EEx e II
Blind plug: 1x M16 x1.5 EEx e II

Housing material Polyester, glass fiber reinforced
Ex classification Eex emd IIC T6
Test certificate / PTB No. 97-37001
ATEX approval no. PTB 97 ATEX 3197
DM 1103 BEx Manual Call Point
Operating voltage 16V DC to 28V DC
Cable duct PG11 screws (2x)
Connection terminals 0.2 mm to 1.5 mm
Color Red, RAL 3000
Dimensions (W x H x D) 134.4 x 134.4 x 43.5 mm
Ex classification EEx ib IIC T4
for Ex area
DKM 2014/2-ex
Key for Fire Detector Type K FMX-7743.0.0500
DKM 2014/2exUGM Manual Call Point
Type K, for Connection to UGM
Conventional
for ex area, exclusively for use in conjunction
with the Universal Danger Detection System
UGMGLT
DKM 2014/2-ex-
UGM
Key for Fire Detector Type K FMX-7743.0.0500
DM 1103 BEx Manual Call Point
for zone 1 and 2 areas at risk of explosion
DM1103B-Ex
Output Module
SB3
Accessories
FMC120 and FMC210.
FMC-SPGL-DEIL
7
Manual Call Points | Accessories - Manual Call Points for Ex Areas | 251
SB3 Safety Barrier incl.
DCA1192 Input/Output
Module
Functions
The SB3 Safety Barrier limits the electrical energy between
non-inherently safe and inherently safe circuits and thus
prevents the ignition of gas mixtures by electrical sparks.
The Safety Barrier must always be installed outside the
explosive area.
The DCA1192 Input/Output Module is the galvanical
isolation between the fire panel and SB3 Safety Barrier.
Europe CE DC 1192
SB 3
CPD 0786-CPD-20512 DC 1192
Germany VdS G 298021 DC 1192
PTB 01 ATEX 2088 SB 3
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 SB3 Safety Barrier
1 Installation set for SB3
1 DCA1192 Input/Output Module
1 Terminal carrier for DCA1192
1 EOL22(Ex) line termination, included with the DCA1192
2 Housing with cover
SB3 Safety Barrier, with Housing
Max. voltage 28 V DC
Max. permissible current 100 mA
Max. output 0.7 W
Wire gauge
0.2 mm
2
. . . 2.5 mm
2
Ignition protection according to
EN 50014/20
Inherent safety EEx ia IIC / IIB
DCA1192 Input/Output Module, with Housing
External supply
Current consumption Max. 5 mA

Line termination
Standby current 45 mA
Operating current 150 mA

Wire gauge
0.2 mm
2
. . . 2.5 mm
2
Output Module
SB3
7
Interface and EOL
Modules
8
EOL Modules 293
254 | Interface and EOL Modules | LSN Interface Modules Series 420
LSN Interface Modules Serie 420

FLM420/4CON FLM420NAC FLMI 420S
Interface type Conventional Interface Mod-
ule 4wire LSN
Signaling Device Interface
Module
Short Circuit Isolator
Function Connecting conventional de-
tectors to LSN fire panels
Connecting signaling devices Isolating alarm zones with
short circuit
Wiring type 4-wire 4-wire 2-wire
Input voltage LSN 15 V DC to 33 V DC 15 V DC to 33 V DC 15 V DC to 33 V DC
Max. current consumption from
LSN
8.5 mA 6.06 mA 0.25 mA (after initialization)
Potential-free outputs
Maximum contact load
Maximum switching load
Protection category -S: IP 54; -D: IP 30 -S: IP 54; -D: IP 30 IP 54
ture
-20C to +55C -20C to +50C -20C to +50C
Connectable to LSN classic fire
panels

Design
- E: in-built
- W: wall-mount
- D: DIN rail
- S: with surface-mounted housing
8
Interface and EOL Modules | LSN Interface Modules Series 420 | 255

FLM420RHV FLM420RLV1 FLM-420-RLV8-S
Interface type Relay High Voltage Interface
Module
Relay Interface Module Low
Voltage
Octo-relay Interface Module
Low Voltage
Function 2 change-over contact relays
with feedback lines
1 change-over contact relay 8 change-over contact relays
LSN
17.15 mA 1.75 mA 3. 55 mA
Maximum contact load 10 A/120 V AC
10 A/230 V AC
10 A/24 V DC
6 A/30 V DC
-D: 5 A/30 V DC
-S: 2 A/30 V DC
2 A/30 V DC
Maximum switching load
Protection category -S: IP 54; -D: IP 30 IP 30 IP 43
ture
-20C to +50C -20C to +55C -20C to +65C
panels

Design
- E: in-built
- W: wall-mount
- D: DIN rail
8

FLM420I2 FLM420O2 FLM-420-I8R1-S
Interface type Input Interface Module Output Interface Module Octo-input Interface Module
with Relay
Function Monitoring of up to 2 inputs 2 semi-conductor outputs for
controlling external devices
Monitoring of up to 8 inputs
LSN
10.4 mA 4.9 mA 5.5 mA
Maximum contact load 2 A/30 V DC
Maximum switching load 700 mA/30 V DC
ture
-20C to +65C -20C to +65C -20C to +65C
panels

Design
- E: in-built
- W: wall-mount
- D: DIN rail
8

FLM420O1I1
Interface type Output-input Interface Module
Function 1 semi-conductor output for
controlling external devices
and 1 monitored input
Wiring type 2-wire
Input voltage LSN 15 V DC to 33 V DC
LSN
1.9 mA
Maximum contact load
Maximum switching load 700 mA/30 V DC
Protection category IP 30
ture
-20C to +65C
panels
Design
- E: in-built
- W: wall-mount
- D: DIN rail
8
FLM420/4CON Conven-
tional Interface Modules
4wire LSN
Features
Can be used with a wide range of conventional
detectors
Monitoring of primary lines for alarms, short circuits
and wire breaks
Conventional detectors can be connected in two stubs
or one loop
Individual detector parameters can be programmed for
each stub
isolators
Expanded system limiting values of LSN improved
technology
The FLM420/4CON Conventional Interface Modules allow
conventional detectors to be connected to LSN fire panels
via a 4wire supply network (Local SecurityNetwork LSN
with external power supply).
The interface modules in the 420 series have been specially
developed for connecting to the Local SecurityNetwork LSN
improved version and offer the enhanced functionality. In
classic mode, selected via the integrated rotary switches,
the interface modules can be connected to all classic LSN
fire panels.
System Overview
LSN b1+ | a- | b2+ LSN (in/out)
AUX 2+ | 1/2- | 1+ Output power supply 4wire detectors
OUT1 + | - Stub 1 or loop out
OUT2/IN1 - | + Stub 2 or loop in
PWR IN
LSN AUX or EXT.PWR + | -
Input power supply (from LSN or external
source)
Functions
Features conventional lines
Individual detector parameters can be programmed for
each stub. Within one stub or loop the detector parameters
have to be consistent.
Only one EOL resistance can be selected for each interface
module.
The detector voltage AUX (supply to 4wire detectors) can
be switched on or off for each line individually. For
configurations with only one stub or one loop the two
outputs AUX with 200 mA maximum current intensity can
be switched in parallel.
If a line has only 2wire detectors connected, the AUX
output of this line might be switched in parallel with the
AUX output of the second line (with 4wire detectors). In
this case, both AUX outputs are reset in parallel at once.
If both lines have only 2wire detectors connected, both
AUX outputs are set off.
The detector lines are short-circuit proof. In the event of a
short circuit on the line, a fault message is sent to the
control panel.
In the event of a line interruption in the loop, the loop is
split into two stubs to retain all detectors.
The system detects removal of detectors and indicates a
fault message on the fire panel.
The fire panel detects a ground connection for each
individual line.
8
LSN features
Integrated isolators ensure that function is maintained in
the event of a short circuit or line interruption in the LSN
loop. A fault indication is sent to the fire panel.
Interface module functions
The interface module has a red LED for displaying alarms.
Current values and other parameters can also be displayed.
Address switches
The rotary switches integrated in the interface module can
be used to select automatic or manual addressing with or
without auto detection.
Address Operating mode Fire panel
0 0 0 Loop/stub in LSN mode improved version
with automatic addressing (T-taps not possi-
ble)
FPA-5000
FPA1200
0 0 1
-
254
Loop/stub/T-taps in LSN mode improved ver-
sion with manual addressing
FPA-5000
FPA1200
CL 0 0 Loop/stub in LSN mode classic BZ 500 LSN
UEZ 2000 LSN
UGM 2020
Features of LSN improved version
The interface modules in the 420 series offer all the features
of the improved LSN technology:

additional elements
Up to 254 LSN-improved elements per fire panel loop or

stub line
Rotary switches allow operator to select automatic and

manual addressing, either with or without auto
detection
Downwards compatible with existing LSN systems and

control panels.
Interface variants
Different versions of the interface module are available:
FLM420/4CONS for surface-mount installation with

housing
FLM420/4COND for installation via an adapter on a

DIN rail or in a FLMIFB126S surface-mounted housing.
Complies with
EN54-17:2005
EN54-18:2005
Europe CE FLM-420_4-CON/-S/-D
CPD 0786-CPD-20399 FLM-420/4-CON-S, -
D
Germany VdS G 208010 FLM-420/4-CON;
FLM-420/4CON-D

FPA1200 and the classic LSN fire panels BZ 500 LSN,
UEZ 2000 LSN and UGM 2020.
For compatible devices, please refer to the

Compatibility List (document number F.01U.079.455)
available for download at www.boschsecurity.com/
emea/fire.
Programming is done with the programming software of

the fire panel.
Within one stub (class B) or loop (class A) the detector

parameters have to be consistent (e.g. standby current,
alarm resistance).
Loop wiring of the conventional zone (class A) does not

require an EOL resistor as it is already integrated in the
interface module.
The power supply is provided via the two wires on the

LSN additional voltage or by an external power supply
unit. External power supply units must be free-of-
ground.
The surface-mounted housing has two cable ducts on

opposite sides:
-
2 x 2 pre-punched cable ducts for diameter up to
21 mm/to 34 mm (for conduits)
-
2 x 4 rubber bushes for inserting cables with
diameters of up to 8 mm.
In addition, there are cable ducts on the base of the

surface-mounted housing:
-
1 x pre-punched cable duct for diameter up to
21 mm (for conduits)
-

EN 54-13, it is necessary to terminate every
conventional zone with EOL modules.
Observe the maximum line resistance of 25 for

conventional lines with manual call points or automatic
fire detectors.
Parts Included
Type Qty. Component
FLM-420/4-CON-S 1 Conventional Interface Module for 4-wire
LSN, with surface-mounted housing, cable
with EOL resistor (3k92)
FLM-420/4-CON-D 1 Conventional Interface Module for 4-wire
LSN, with adapter for installation on a DIN rail
in accordance with EN 5000022, light pipe,
cable with EOL resistor (3k92)
Electrical
LSN
LSN input voltage 15 V DC to 33 V DC (min. to max.)
Max. current consump-

tion from LSN
8.5 mA
Primary line
Line voltage 21 to 22 V DC (21,5 V DC typ. 0,5 V DC))
Max. line current 80 mA (10% at 25 C)
Max. line resistance 50 per line (max. 2 x 25 )

8
Input power supply (PWR IN)
Voltage 24 to 30 V DC
Residual ripple < 150 mV

Output power supply 4wire de-
tector (AUX)
Voltage 23.5 V DC to 30 V DC
(rated voltage 24 V DC)
Residual ripple < 300 mV
Max. current (supply to

4wire detector)
200 mA per output (can be switched in
parallel)
EOL resistor for stub wiring of
conventional zone (class B)
With calibration value 2,2 k
Without calibration value 2,2 k / 3,9 k

Mechanics
Display element 1 red LED, flashes at 1 Hz in the event of
an alarm
Address setting 3 rotary switches
Connections 12 screw terminals
Permitted wire cross-section
0.6 to 3.3 mm
2
Housing material
Surface-mounted housing ABS/PC blend
Interface housing and

adapter
PPO (Noryl)
Color
Surface-mounted housing Signal white, RAL 9003
Interface housing and

adapter
Off- white, similar to RAL 9002
Dimensions
FLM-420/4-CON-S Approx. 126 x 126 x 71 mm (W x H x D)
FLM-420/4-CON-D Approx. 110 x 110 x 48 mm (W x H x D)

FLM-420/4-CON-S Approx. 390 g / 590 g
FLM-420/4-CON-D Approx. 150 g / 350 g

ture
-20 C to +55 C
Permitted storage temperature -25 C to +80 C
Permitted rel. humidity < 96% (non-condensing)
IEC 60950
Class III equipment
IEC 60529
FLM-420/4-CON-S IP 54
FLM-420/4-CON-D IP 30
FLM420/4CONS Conventional Interface
Module 4wire LSN
with surface-mounted housing
FLM-420/4-CON-S
FLM420/4COND Conventional Interface
Module 4wire LSN
type DIN rail
FLM-420/4-CON-D
Accessories
FLMIFB126S Surface-mounted Housing
as retainer for the interface modules ser-
ies 420 type DIN rail (-D) or spare housing for
type surface-mount (-S)
FLM-IFB126-S
8
FLM420NAC Signaling
Device Interface Modules
Features
Rotary switches for automatic or manual address
setting
Control of signaling device line by pole reversal
Synchronized activation of all signaling devices
connected to a LSN module via FLM420NAC Signaling
Device Interface Module
Ten different output signals via LSN selectable
isolators
Available with surface-mounted housing or DIN rail
adapter
FLM420NAC Signaling Device Interface Modules make it
possible to monitor and activate a group of signaling
devices (NAC = Notification Appliance Circuit) in the Local
SecurityNetwork LSN.
Each interface module offers one monitored primary line.
This means one signaling device line can be connected to
LSN fire panels.
The following can be connected:
Sounders
Strobes
Horns.
System Overview
b IN / a IN NAC zone input
b OUT / a OUT NAC zone output
0 V / 24 V Ext. power supply
a1- / b1+ LSN in
a2- / b2+ LSN out
FAIL ac Trouble ext. voltage
FAIL bat Trouble ext. battery
Functions
Interface module variants
Two different versions of the interface module are available:
FLM420NACS for surface-mounting with housing
FLM420NACD for installation on a DIN rail with

adapter.
Functions
The functions of the signaling device interface module are:
1. Activation of signaling devices in the event of an alarm
2. Monitoring the signaling device line
3. Monitoring the ext. power supply
4. Status display via LEDs
When activated signaling devices connected to
FLM420NAC zones are synchronized through the LSN
module they are connected to.
The control of the signaling device line is performed through
polarity reversal.
The status of the NAC zone is shown by a red and a green
LED.
Rotary switches
The rotary switch integrated in the interface module can be
used to select between automatic or manual addressing
with or without auto detection.
0 0 0 Loop/stub in LSN mode improved version with automatic
addressing (T-tap system not possible)
0 0 1 - 254 Loop/stub/T-tap system in LSN mode improved version with
manual addressing
CL 0 0 Loop/stub in classic LSN mode
8
LSN features
of improved LSN technology:

additional elements

control panels.
Complies with
EN54-17:2005
EN54-18:2005
Europe CE FLM-420-NAC/-S/-D
CPD 0786-CPD-20375 FLM-420-NAC
Germany VdS G 207052 FLM-420-NAC-S; FLM-420-
NAC-D
Hungary TMT TMT-24/2006 FLM-420-NAC, FLM-I 420-
S

National standards and guidelines must be taken into

account during the planning stage.
An external power supply is required for the

FLM420NAC interface module.

opposite sides:
-
-

-
1 x pre-punched cable duct for diameter up to
-
Parts Included
FLM-420-NAC-S 1 Signaling Device Interface Module with sur-
face-mounted housing
FLM-420-NAC-D 1 Signaling Device Interface Module for instal-
lation on a DIN rail with adapter
Electrical
from LSN 6,06 mA (normal operation and alarm)
from external power supply 15 mA (normal operation) + output cur-

rent
External power supply 20,4 V DC to 29 V DC
Max. output current 3 A (during an alarm, from ext. power
supply)
EOL resistance 3.9 k
Mechanics
Display elements
Red LED Alarm
Green LED Normal operation

LSN/Address setting 3 rotary switches for
Mode LSN "classic" or LSN im-

proved version
Automatic or manual addressing

Connections 12 threaded clamps
Max. wire diameter for terminals
3.3 mm
2
(12 AWG)
Housing material
Interface module PPO (Noryl)
Surface-mount housing ABS/PC-Blend

Housing color
Interface module Off-white, similar to RAL 9002
Surface-mount housing Signal white, RAL 9003

Dimensions
FLM-420-NAC-S Approx. 126 x 126 x 71 mm

(4.96 x 4.96 x 2.8 in.)
FLM-420-NAC-D (with DIN

rail adapter)
Approx. 110 x 110 x 48 mm
(4.33 x 4.33 x 1.89 in.)
Weight
FLM-420-NAC-S Approx. 390 g (13.8 ounces)
FLM-420-NAC-D (with DIN rail
adapter)
Approx. 150 g (5.3 ounces)
System limits
Number of zones per signaling de-
vice interface module
1
Output signals Steady
BS 5839
March Time
March Time 120
California Coded
Synchronization protocol (Wheelock,
Gentex)
8
ture
-20 C to 50 C
(-4 F to 122 F)
ture
-25 C to 80 C
(-13 F to 176 F)
Permitted relative humidity < 96%
IEC 60950
Class III equipment
IEC 60529
FLM-420-NAC-S IP 54
FLM-420-NAC-D IP 30
FLM420NACS Signaling Device Interface
Module
FLM-420-NAC-S
FLM420NACD Signaling Device Interface
Module
for installation on a DIN rail with adapter
FLM-420-NAC-D
8
FLMI 420S Short Circuit
Isolator
Features
Rotary switch for automatic and manual address
setting
Preservation of LSN loop functions in the event of a
short-circuit by two integrated isolators
Power supply via LSN
Three free screw terminals
The Short Circuit Isolator isolates alarm zones in which a
short circuit has occurred. This means the functionality of
the remainder of the network remains preserved.
System Overview
b1+ a- b2+ N/A N/A N/A
LSN
9 1
6 4
7 3
8 2
0
5
8 2
0
5
6 4
9 1
7 3
CL 1
2
0
b1+ / a- / b2+ LSN
N/A (3 x) free terminals, e.g. for looping through ext. auxiliary volt-
age and for shielding
Functions
Features of improved LSN

additional elements

Address switch (rotary switch)
The address of the Short Circuit Isolator is set using the
rotary switches.
addressing (T-tap system not possible)
manual addressing
Configuration
The Short Circuit Isolator isolates alarm zones in which a
short circuit has occurred. The following illustrations show
typical configurations of the isolator module.
Wiring example: Isolation of separate floors
1
LSN2
LSN1
a-
a-
b+
b+
b
1
+
b
1
+
b
1
+
a
-
a
-
a
-
b
2
+
b
2
+
b
2
+
III
FLM-I 420-S
FLM-I 420-S
FLM-I 420-S
II
I
L
S
N
LSN
Pos. Description
1 Fire panel
I, II, III Floors
8
Typical wiring in a TTap
b1+
b1+ b1+
b1+
a- a- a- a-
b2+
b2+ b2+
b2+
FLM-I 420-S FLM-I 420-S
1
LSN
LSN
Pos. Description
1 Alarm zone / device group with LSN elements
Complies with EN54-17:2005
Europe CE FLM-I 420-S
CPD 0786-CPD-20374 FLM-I 420-S
Germany VdS G 207045 FLM-I 420-S; FLM-I 420-D
Hungary TMT TMT-24/2006 FLM-420-NAC, FLM-I 420-
S


opposite sides:
-
2 x 2 pre-punched for diameter up to 21 mm/to
-

-
1 x pre-punched cable ducts for diameter up to
-
Connectable to the fire panels FPA5000 Modular and

FPA1200 with LSN technology improved version.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 Short Circuit Isolator with surface-mounted housing.
1 DIN rail adapter
Note Alternatively to the use of the surface-mounted
housing, the Isolator can be mounted on a DIN
rail with the included adapter.
Electrical
During initialization < 0.4 mA
Following the initializa-

tion
< 0.25 mA
Mechanics
LSN/Address setting 3 rotary switches for
Mode LSN classic or LSN improved

version

Housing material
Isolator module PPO (Noryl)

Housing color
Isolator module Off-white, similar to RAL 9002

(4.96 x 4.96 x 2.8 in.)
ture
-20 C to 50 C
(-4 F to 122 F)
ture
-25 C to 85 C
(-13 F to. 176 F)
IEC 60950
Class III equipment
IEC 60529
IP 54
FLMI 420S Short Circuit Isolator
FLM-I 420-S
8
FLM420RHV Relay High
Voltage Interface Modules
Features
Relay function or fan control function selectable
setting
LED display for operating state (can be deactivated
with LSN)
isolators
Available with surface-mounted housing or DIN rail
adapter
The FLM420RHV Relay High Voltage Interface Modules are
used to control the activation of external elements, e. g.
smoke dampers or fans (FAN function), via the Local
SecurityNetwork LSN.
System Overview
NO / C / NC Relay 1
NO / C / NC Relay 2
b1+ / a- / b2+ LSN
FB2+ Relay 2, feedback +
FB1/FB2- Relay 1 and 2, feedback
FB1+ Relay 1, feedback +
Functions
Two different versions of the interface module are available:
FLM420RHVS for surface-mounting with housing
FLM420RHVD for installation on a DIN rail with

adapter.
Relay and FAN function
The interface modules have two change-over contact relays
(Form C) for the controlled activation of external elements.
The relay contacts are protected with 10 A fuses which are
built into the module.
The maximum relay contact loads are (values apply to
resistive load):
10 A at 120 V AC / 230 V AC / 24 V DC
6 A at 30 V DC.
Rotary switches
The rotary switches can be used to select either the relay
function (RLHV) or the fan control function (FAN) as well as
to define the address of the interface module.
8
Function selection (rotary switch 1)
RLHV Relay function used to control external elements
FAN Fan control function
Address setting (rotary switches 1-3)
addressing (Ttap system not possible)
manual addressing

additional elements

control panels.
The status of the two relays is shown via a red and a green
LED.
The power is provided via the LSN loop.
Complies with
EN54-17:2005
EN54-18:2005
Europe CE FLM-420-RHV/-S/-D
CPD 0786-CPD-20376 FLM-420-RHV
Germany VdS G 207053 FLM-420-RHV-S; FLM-420-
RHV-D


It is not permitted
-
to operate the relays with different voltages (high
voltage and low voltage)
-
to place two different AC line voltage phases on the
relay contacts.
The monitoring function is deactivated at the time of

delivery, and can be activated via the panel software.

opposite sides:
-
-

-
21 mm (for conduit)
-
For a fire system operation according to EN 542, the

interface modules used for the activation of fire
protection equipment and whose outputs are not
monitored, must be installed directly next to or within
the device which shall be activated.
Parts Included
FLM-420-RHV-S 1 Relay High Voltage Interface Module with
surface-mounted housing
FLM-420-RHV-D 1 Relay High Voltage Interface Module for in-
stallation on a DIN rail with adapter
Electrical
Max. current consumption 17.15 mA (normal operation and activat-
ed)
Max. contact load 10 A at 120 V AC
10 A at 230 V AC
10 A at 24 V DC
6 A at 30 V DC
Max. bounce period of NC con-
tact
9 ms
Feedback current 1 mA (EOL resistance R=3.9 k)
Feedback voltage Max. 30 V DC
Fuses (F1, F2) 10 A / 250 V
Mechanics
Operating/display elements 2 LEDs (1 x red, 1 x green)
Function selection and address
setting
3 rotary switches for
FAN/RLHV function
Mode LSN "classic" or LSN im-

proved version

Housing material

Housing color
Interface module Off-white, similar to RAL 9002

8
Dimensions
FLM-420-RHV-S Approx. 126 x 126 x 71 mm

(4.96 x 4.96 x 2.8 in.)
FLM-420-RHV-D (with
DIN rail adapter)
(4.33 x 4.33 x 1.89 in.)
Weight
FLM-420-RHV-S Approx. 390 g (13.8 ounces)
FLM-420-RHV-D Approx. 150 g (5.3 ounces)

ture
-20 C to 50 C
(-4 F to 122 F)
Permitted storage temperature -25 C to 85 C
(-13 F to 176 F)
IEC 60950
Class II equipment
IEC 60529
FLM-420-RHV-S IP 54
FLM-420-RHV-D IP 30
FLM420RHVS Relay High Voltage
Interface Module
FLM-420-RHV-S
FLM420RHVD Relay High Voltage
Interface Module
for installation on a DIN rail with adapter
FLM-420-RHV-D
8
FLM420RLV1 Relay Inter-
face Modules Low Voltage
Features
Maximum switching current of 5 A (type DIN rail) / 1 A
(type in-built)
Low current consumption
isolators
The FLM420RLV1 Relay Interface Modules Low Voltage
feature a changeover contact relay for providing a potential-
free output contact.
They are 2wire LSN elements. When connected to the fire
panels FPA5000 and FPA1200, the interface module offers
the enhanced functionality of LSN improved technology.
System Overview
FLM-420-RLV1-D
REL1 NC | COM | NO Relay (NC, COM and NO contact)
FLM-420-RLV1-E
REL1 COM | NO | NC Relay (COM, NO and NC contact)
LSN SHIELD Shielding cable (if available)
LSN POWER
0 V | 0 V | +24 V | +24 V
LSN power supply (supports for looping
through)
LSN a1- | b1+ | a2- | b2+ LSN (in/out)
Functions
Address switches
The addresses of the interface modules are set using:
DIP switches for FLM420RLV1E
Rotary switches for FLM420RLV1D.

8
When connecting to the FPA-5000 Modular Fire Panel (LSN
mode improved version), the operator can select automatic
or manual addressing with or without auto-detection. In
LSN mode classic, connection to the fire panels
BZ 500 LSN, UEZ 2000 LSN and UGM 2020 is possible.
Address
rotary
switches
Address
DIP switches
Operating mode
0 0 0 0 Loop/stub in improved version LSN
mode with automatic addressing (T-taps
not possible)
0 0 1
-
2 5 4
1 - 254 Loop/stub/T-taps in improved version
LSN mode with manual addressing
CL 0 0 255 Loop/stub in LSN mode classic
LSN features

additional elements

control panels.
Interface variants
The input interface modules are available in various designs:
FLM420RLV1E type in-built:

-
Can be built in to standard device boxes in
accordance with EN 60670
-
For space-saving installation in devices
FLM420RLV1D type DIN rail:

-
For installation on a DIN rail in accordance with
EN 500022 with included adapter
-
Can be built in to a FLMIFB126S surface-mounted
housing.
Complies with
EN54-17:2005
EN54-18:2005
Europe CE FLM-420-RLV1-E
FLM-420-RLV1-D
CPD 0786-CPD-20291 FLM-420-RLV1
0786-CPD-20292 FLM-420-RLV1-W, -E
Germany VdS G 207077 FLM-420-RLV1-D; FLM-420-
RLV1-E; FLM-420-RLV1-W


the fire panel.
The connected device must have a minimum activation

time of 20 ms.
The LSN connection is established via the two wires on

the LSN line.
The in-built (-E) version is fitted with terminals to allow

a second wire pair to be looped through to the LSN
power supply of subsequent elements.

Parts Included
Type Qty. Component
FLM-420-RLV1-E 1 Relay Interface Module Low Voltage, type
in-built
FLM-420- RLV1-D 1 Relay Interface Module Low Voltage, type
DIN rail, with adapter and light pipe
Electrical
LSN
Max. current consump-

tion from LSN
1.75 mA
Relay (low voltage) Normally closed, common and normally
open contact (NC/COM/NO)
Contact load (ohm resistive load)
FLM420RLV1E
Max. switching current 1 A
Max. switching voltage 30 V DC
Min. switching current 0.01 mA
Min. switching voltage 10 mV DC

Contact load (ohm resistive load)
FLM420RLV1D

Minimum activation time of the
connected device
> 20 ms
8
Mechanical
Connections
FLM-420-RLV1-E 12 screw terminals
FLM-420-RLV1-D 6 threaded terminals

FLM-420-RLV1-E
0.6 to 2.0 mm
2
FLM-420-RLV1-D
0.6 to 3.3 mm
2
Address setting
FLM-420-RLV1-E 8 DIP switches
FLM-420- RLV1-D 3 rotary switches

Housing material
FLM-420- RLV1-E ABS/PC blend
FLM-420- RLV1-D with

adapter
PPO (Noryl)
Color
FLM-420- RLV1-E Signal white, RAL 9003
FLM-420- RLV1-D Off-white, similar to RAL 9002

Dimensions
FLM-420- RLV1-E Approx. 50 mm x 22 mm ( x H)
FLM-420- RLV1-D with

adapter
Approx. 110 x 110 x 48 mm (W x H x D)
FLM-420- RLV1-E Approx. 35 g / 130 g
FLM-420- RLV1-D Approx. 150 g / 235 g

ture
-20 C to +55 C
IEC 60950
Class III equipment
IEC 60529
IP 30
FLM420RLV1E Relay Interface Module
Low Voltage
type in-built
FLM-420-RLV1-E
FLM420RLV1D Relay Interface Module
Low Voltage
DIN rail type
FLM-420-RLV1-D
FLM-IFB126-S
8
FLM420RLV8S Octo-
relay Interface Module Low
Voltage
Features
Maximum switching capacity of the relays 2 A / 30 V DC
Low current consumption
isolators
Easy wiring thanks to pluggable terminal blocks
The FLM420RLV8S Octo-relay Interface Module Low
Voltage features eight changeover contact relays for
providing potential-free output contacts.
It is a 2wire LSN element. When connected to the fire
Functions
Relay function
The eight changeover contact relays of the FLM420RLV8S
allow for a seperate connection of up to eight single
external elements.
The maximum contact load (resistive load) is 2 A / 30 V DC.
Address switches
The addresses of the interface modules are set by rotary
switches.
In case of a connection to the Local SecurityNetwork LSN
improved version, the operator can select automatic or
manual addressing with or without auto-detection. In LSN
mode classic, connection to the fire panels BZ 500 LSN,
UEZ 2000 LSN and UGM 2020 is possible.
Address Mode
0 0 0 Loop/stub in improved version LSN mode with automatic
addressing (T-taps not possible)
0 0 1 ... 2 5 4 Loop/stub/T-taps in improved version LSN mode with man-
ual addressing
CL 0 0 Loop/stub in LSN mode classic
LSN features
The interface modules of the 420 Serieshave all features of
the improved LSN technology:

additional elements

control panels.
Complies with
EN54-17:2005
EN54-18:2005
Europe CE FLM-420-RLV8-S
CPD 0786-CPD-20559 FLM-420-RLV8-S
Germany VdS G 208183 FLM-420-RLV8-S
8
N
C

C
O
M

N
O
N
C

C
O
M

N
O
N
C

C
O
M

N
O
N
C

C
O
M

N
O
N
C

C
O
M

N
O
N
C

C
O
M

N
O
N
C

C
O
M

N
O
N
C

C
O
M

N
O
R
E
L
8
R
E
L
7
R
E
L
6
R
E
L
5
R
E
L
4
R
E
L
3
R
E
L
2
R
E
L
1
+
U

0
V

a
1
-

b
1
+

S
H
I
E
L
D

+
U

0
V

a
2
-

b
2
+

L
S
N
L
S
N
L
S
N
+U | 0V Auxiliary power supply (support points
to loop through)
LSN a1- | b1+ LSN incoming
LSN SHIELD Cable shielding (if available)
LSN-POWER +U | 0V Auxiliary power supply (support points
to loop through)
LSN a2- | b2+ LSN outgoing
REL1 REL8 NC | COM | NO Relay 1 to relay 8 (NC contact / COM /
NO contact)


the fire panel.
The LSN connection is established by the two wires of

the LSN line.
The interface module has terminals blocks to allow a

second pair of wires to be looped through to an auxiliary
power to supply downstream connected elements.
The cables are fed through rubber bushings or PG cable

glands
The pluggable terminal blocks allow for an easy wiring

even if the interface module is built in.
Use included spacers when mounting on uneven

surface.

Parts Included
Type Qty. Component
FLM-420-RLV8-S 1 Octo-relay Interface Module Low Voltage, in
housing for surface mounting
Electrical
LSN

from LSN
3.55 mA
8 relays (low voltage) (NC contact / COM / NO contact)
Contact load (resistive load)

Mechanical
Connections Screw terminals
Wire diameter
0.6 to 3.3 mm
2
Material ABS + PC-FR
Dimensions Approx. 140 x 200 x 48 mm (W x H x D)
Weight (without/with packing) Approx. 490 g / 810 g
Permissible rel. humidity < 96% (noncondensing)
IEC 60950
Class III equipment
FLM420RLV8S Octo-relay Interface
Module Low Voltage
2-wire LSN element with eight changeover
contact relays for providing potential-free out-
put contacts, in housing for surface mounting
FLM-420-RLV8-S
8
FLM420I8R1S Octo-input
Interface Module with
Relay
Features
Individually selectable monitoring functions (EOL or
contact) for the eight inputs each
Maximum switching capacity 2 A / 30 V DC
isolators
Easy wiring thanks to pluggable terminal blocks
The FLM420I8R1S Octo-input Interface Module with
Relay allows the monitoring of up to eight inputs.
Additionally, it features a changeover contact relay for
providing a potentialfree output contact.
It is a 2wire LSN element. When connected to the fire
Functions
Monitoring functions of the inputs
The FLM420I8R1S Octoinput Interface Module provides
two monitoring functions:
1. Monitoring of a line by an EOL resistor
2. Monitoring of a potentialfree contact
The monitoring functions of the eight inputs can be selected
individually by setting the corresponding addresses.
Line monitoring with EOL resistor
The monitoring with EOL resistor can be activated
individually for each of the inputs. The EOL resistor has a
standard resistance of 3.9 k.
The interface module detects
Standby
Triggering in the event of a short circuit
Triggering in the event of line interruption.

IN+
IN-
R
EOL
R
EOL
R
L/2
R
L/2
IN
Position Description
R
Overall line resistance with R

=
R
L/2
+ R
L/2
+ R
EOL
R
L/2
Line resistance
The following line conditions will be reliably detected if the
overall line resistance is within the specified range:
Line condition Overall line resistance R
Standby 1500 to 6000

Short circuit < 800
Interruption > 12 000
Contact monitoring
IN+
IN-
R
L/2
R
L/2
IN
The interface module evaluates the operating conditions
"open" or "closed". The normal operating condition can be
programmed for each input. Contact monitoring has a pulse
intensity of 8 mA.
Changeover contact relay
The maximum contact load (resistive load) is 2 A / 30 V DC.
Address switches
The addresses of the interface modules are set by rotary
switches.
In case of a connection to the fire panels FPA5000 and
FPA1200 (improved version LSN mode), the operator can
select automatic or manual addressing with or without
auto-detection. In LSN mode classic, connection to the fire
panels BZ 500 LSN, UEZ 2000 LSN and UGM 2020 is
possible.
Address Mode
0 0 0 Loop/stub in improved version LSN mode with automatic
addressing (T-taps not possible)
0 0 1 ... 2 5 4 Loop/stub/T-taps in improved version LSN mode with man-
ual addressing
CL 0 0 Loop/stub in LSN mode classic
LSN features
The interface modules of the 420 series have all features of
the improved LSN technology:
8

additional elements

control panels.
Complies with
EN54-17:2005
EN54-18:2005
Europe CE FLM-420-I8R1-S
CPD 0786-CPD-20560 FLM-420-I8R1-S
Germany VdS G 208184 FLM-420-I8R1-S
L
S
N
I
N
R
E
L
+

8

-
+

7

-
+

6

-
+

5

-
+

4

-
+

3

-
+

2

-
+

1

-
N
C

C
O
M

C
O
M

N
O
+
U
0
V
a
1
-
b
1
+
S
H
IE
L
D
+
U
0
V
a
2
-
b
2
+
L
S
N
L
S
N
+U | 0V Auxiliary power supply (support points to loop
through)
LSN a1- | b1+ LSN incoming
+U | 0V Auxiliary power supply (support points to loop
through)
LSN a2- | b2+ LSN outgoing
IN 1 ... 8: + | - Input 1 to input 8
REL NC | COM |
COM | NO
Change-over relay (NC contact / COM, COM / NO
contact

FPA1200 and the classic LSN control panels
BZ 500 LSN, UEZ 2000 LSN and UGM 2020.

the fire panel.

the LSN line.
The activation of the inputs IN 18 has to be carried out

electrically isolated from LSN (e. g. with relay contact,
pushbutton, etc.).
The inputs must have a minimum activation time of

3.2 s.
The maximum cable length of all inputs connected to

the loop or stub is 500 m in total. Additionally, all
outputs which are not electrically isolated from LSN
must be included in the total line length calculation (e.g.
peripherals connected via C points). With
UEZ 2000 LSN and UGM 2020, the limitation to 500 m
applies to each Network Processing Converter (NVU).

second pair of wires to be looped through to an auxiliary
power supply.
The cables are fed through rubber bushings or PG cable

glands.
The pluggable terminal blocks allow for an easy wiring

even if he interface module is built in.
Use included spacers when mounting on uneven

surface.

Parts Included
Type Qty. Component
FLM-420-I8R1-S 1 Octo-input Interface Module with Relay, in
housing for surface mounting
Electrical
LSN
LSN input voltage 15 V DC to 33 V DC

from LSN
5.5 mA
Inputs 8, independent
Line monitoring with EOL
EOL resistor Nominal 3.9 k
Overall line resistance R
with R
= R
L/1
+ R
L/2
+ R
EOL
Standby: 1500 to 6000
Line interruption: > 12.000
Short circuit: < 800

Contact monitoring
Max. current strength (cur-

rent pulse)
8 mA
Minimum activation time of the in-
puts IN 18
3.2 s
Relay (low voltage) (NC / COM / NO contact)
8
Contact load (resistive load)

Mechanical
Connections Screw terminals
Wire diameter
0.6 mm
2
to 3.3 mm
2
Material ABS + PC-FR
Dimensions Approx. 140 x 200 x 48 mm (W x H x D)
Weight (without/with packing) Approx. 480 g / 800 g
Permissible rel. humidity < 96% (noncondensing)
IEC 60950
Class III equipment
System limiting values
Maximum cable length of all inputs
and outputs which are connected
to the loop or stub and not electri-
cally isolated from LSN
500 m in total
FLM420I8R1S Octo-input Interface
Module with Relay
2-wire LSN element, allows the monitoring of
up to eight inputs, with a changeover contact
relay for providing a potentialfree output con-
tact, in housing for surface mounting
FLM-420-I8R1-S
8
FLM420I2 Input Interface
Modules
Features
Line monitoring when operating with EOL resistor
Contact monitoring
Voltage monitoring
Individual monitoring of the two inputs
isolators
The FLM420I2 Input Interface Modules monitor up to two
inputs.
They are 2wire LSN elements for connection to the Local
SecurityNetwork LSN improved version with the enhanced
functionality.
System Overview
FLM-420-I2-D
IN1+ | IN1- Input 1
IN2+ | IN2- Input 2
FLM-420-I2-E / FLM-420-I2-W
IN1- | IN1+ Input 1
IN2- | IN2+ Input 2
LSN-SHIELD Shielding cable (if available)
LSN POWER
0 V | 0 V | +24 V | +24 V
through)
8
Functions
Monitoring functions
The FLM420I2 Input Interface Modules offer three
monitoring functions:
1. Monitoring of a line with EOL resistor
2. Monitoring of a potential-free contact
3. Voltage monitoring
The monitoring functions can be selected for the two inputs
individually by address setting via the programming
software.
Operation with EOL resistor can be programmed for each
input individually. The standard EOL resistor is 3.9 k.
Standby
Triggering in the event of line interruption
Triggering in the event of a short circuit.

IN+
IN-
R
EOL
R
EOL
R
L/2
R
L/2
IN
R

=
R
L/2
+ R
L/2
+ R
EOL
R
L/2
Line resistance
The following line conditions will be definitely detected if
the overall line resistance is within the specified ranges:

Interruption > 12.000
Short circuit < 800
Contact monitoring
IN+
IN-
R
L/2
R
L/2
IN
R
L/2
Line resistance with R
L/2
+ R
L/2
50
programmed for each input. Contact monitoring is carried
out with a pulse intensity of 8 mA. The module detects
signals from a duration of 300 ms.
Voltage monitoring
V
R
L/2
R
L/2
IN
IN+
IN-
R
L/2
Line resistance with R
L/2
+ R
L/2
50
Voltage monitoring is carried out between 0 V DC and
30 V DC. The programming software can be used to select
two threshold values.
Address switches
DIP switches for FLM420I2E and FLM420I2W
Rotary switches for FLM420I2D.

In improved version LSN mode, the operator can select
automatic or manual addressing with or without auto-
detection.
Address
rotary
switches
Address
DIP switches
Operating mode
0 0 0 0 Loop/stub in improved version LSN mode
with automatic addressing (T-taps not pos-
sible)
0 0 1
-
2 5 4
1 254 Loop/stub/T-taps in improved version LSN
mode with manual addressing
LSN features

additional elements

Interface variants
The Input Interface Modules are available in various
designs:
FLM420I2E type in-built:

-
accordance with EN 60670 (e.g. below standard
switch programs)
-
FLM420I2W type wall-mount (with cover):

-
-
For surface mounting in conjunction with the
FMXIFB55S interface box.
FLM420I2D type DIN rail:

-
8
-
housing.
Complies with
EN54-17:2005
EN54-18:2005
Europe CE FLM-420-I2-W/-E
FLM-420-I2-D
CPD 0786-CPD-20288 FLM-420-I2-D
0786-CPD-20287 FLM-420-I2-W, -E
Germany VdS G 207076 FLM-420-I2-D; FLM-420-I2-E;
FLM-420-I2-W

FPA1200.

the fire panel.

the LSN line.
A maximum cable length of 3 m is permitted per input.
When mounting the in-built type interface module

below a switch, a minimum depth of the device box of
60 mm is recommended.
The in-built (-E) and wall-mount (-W) versions are fitted

with terminals to allow a second wire pair to be looped
through to the LSN power supply of subsequent
elements.
Parts Included
Type Qty. Component
FLM-420-I2-E 1 Input Interface Module, type in-built
FLM-420-I2-W 1 Input Interface Module, type wall-mount, with
cover and accessories
FLM-420-I2-D 1 Input Interface Module, type DIN rail, with
adapter and light pipe
Electrical
LSN

from LSN
10.4 mA
Inputs 2, independent of each other
Overall line resistance
During standby: 1500 to

6000
Interruption: > 12.000

Contact monitoring
Max. current (current peak) 8 mA

Voltage monitoring
Voltage range 0 to 30 V DC
Input resistance 50 k
Selectable threshold values
0.8 V DC ( 0.3 V DC)
3.3 V DC ( 0.3 V DC)
10.2 V DC ( 0.5 V DC)
21.2 V DC ( 0.5 V DC)

Mechanical
Connections
FLM-420-I2-E / W 14 screw terminals
FLM-420-I2-D 7 screw terminals

FLM-420-I2-E / W
0.6 to 2.0 mm
2
FLM-420-I2-D
0.6 to 3.3 mm
2
Address setting
FLM-420-I2-E / W 8 DIP switches
FLM-420-I2-D 3 rotary switches

Housing material
FLM-420-I2-E / W ABS/PC blend
FLM-420-I2-D with adapt-

er
PPO (Noryl)
Color
FLM-420-I2-E / W Signal white, RAL 9003

er
Off-white, similar to RAL 9002
Dimensions
FLM-420-I2-E Approx. 50 mm x 22 mm ( x H)
FLM-420-I2-W Approx. 76 mm x 30 mm ( x H)

er
FLM-420-I2-E Approx. 35 g / 130 g
FLM-420-I2-W Approx. 55 g / 155 g
FLM-420-I2-D Approx. 150 g / 235 g

8
Permitted operating temperature -20 C to +65 C
IEC 60950
Class III equipment
Max. cable length per input 3 m
FLM420I2E Input Interface Module
flush-mount type
FLM-420-I2-E
FLM420I2W Input Interface Module
wall-mount type, with cover
FLM-420-I2-W
FMXIFB55S Interface Box Surface-mount FMX-IFB55-S
FLM420I2D Input Interface Module
DIN rail type
FLM-420-I2-D
FLM-IFB126-S
8
FLM420O2 Output Inter-
face Modules
Features
Two semi-conductor outputs, can be switched
independently of each other
Outputs are electrically isolated from LSN loop and
short-circuit proof
Max. switchable current per output 700 mA
isolators
The FLM420O2 Output Interface Modules have two
outputs to control external devices.
They are 2wire LSN elements for connection to the Local
SecurityNetwork LSN improved version with the enhanced
functionality.
Functions
Semi-conductor outputs
The two semi-conductor outputs can be switched
independently of each other. They are electrically isolated
from the LSN loop and protected against short circuits.
OUT1 - / OUT2 -
POW-
OUT1/OUT2
POW+
Functionality of the semi-conductor outputs
Power supply
The loads' power supply can be selected for each output:
Power supply of the interface module
External power supply.

Address switches
DIP switches for FLM420O2E and FLM420O2W
Rotary switches for FLM420O2D.

between automatic or manual addressing with or without
auto-detection.
Address
rotary
switches
Address
DIP switches
Operating mode
0 0 0 0 Loop/stub in improved version LSN
mode with automatic addressing (T-taps
not possible)
0 0 1
-
2 5 4
1 - 254 Loop/stub/T-taps in improved version
LSN mode with manual addressing
LSN features

additional elements

The Output Interface Modules are available in various
designs:
FLM420O2E type in-built:

-
-
FLM420O2W type wall-mount (with cover):

-
-
For surface mounting in conjunction with the
FMXIFB55S interface box.
FLM420O2D type DIN rail:

-
8
-
housing.
Complies with
EN54-17:2005
EN54-18:2005
Europe CE FLM-420-O2/-W/-E
FLM-420-O2-D
CPD 0786-CPD-20290 FLM-420-O2-D
0786-CPD-20289 FLM-420-O2-W, -E
Germany VdS G 207075 FLM-420-O2-D; FLM-420-O2-
E; FLM-420-O2-W
FLM-420-O2-D
P O W E R I N O U T
P O W - P O W + P O W + O U T 2 - O U T 1 -
POWER IN: POW- | POW+ Power supply (LSN and outputs)
POW+ Reference potential (+)
OUT2- Output 2 (switched negative potential)
FLM-420-O2-E / FLM-420-O2-W
-
-
-
POWER IN
POW+ | POW-
Power supply (LSN and outputs)
POW+ Reference potential (+)
LSN SHIELD Shielding cable (if available)
LSN POWER
0 V | 0 V | +24 V | +24 V
through)

FPA1200.

the fire panel.

the LSN line.
The power supply for the outputs can be provided by

the power supply of the interface module or an external
power supply. External power supply units must be
free-of-ground.
The loads are switched against the negative potential of

the interface modules (OUT1- or OUT2-). The positive
potential is provided by either the power supply of the
interface module (POW+) or an external power supply
unit.
The maximum switchable voltage to the semi-conductor

outputs is 30 V DC. The maximum switchable current is
700 mA per output.
A maximum cable length of 3 m is permitted per output.
The in-built (-E) and wall-mount (-W) versions are fitted

with terminals to allow a second wire pair to be looped
through to the LSN power supply of subsequent
elements.

8
Parts Included
Type Qty. Component
FLM-420-O2-E 1 Output Interface Module, type in-built
FLM-420-O2-W 1 Output Interface Module, type wall-mount,
with cover and accessories
FLM-420-O2-D 1 Output Interface Module, type DIN rail, with
adapter and light pipe
Electrical
LSN

from LSN
4.9 mA
Outputs 2, independent of each other
Max. switching voltage of

semi-conductor outputs
30 V DC
Max. switchable output cur-

rent
700 mA per output
Bounce period (when initial-

izing the system)
< 2 ms
External power supply 5 to 30 V DC (min. to max.)
Mechanical
Connections
FLM-420-O2-E / -W 14 screw terminals
FLM-420-O2-D 8 screw terminals

FLM-420-O2-E / -W
0.6 to 2.0 mm
2
FLM-420-O2-D
0.6 to 3.3 mm
2
Address setting
FLM-420-O2-E / -W 8 DIP switches
FLM-420-O2-D 3 rotary switches

Housing material
FLM-420-O2-E / -W ABS/PC blend
FLM-420-O2-D with adapt-

er
PPO (Noryl)
Color
FLM-420-O2-E / -W Signal white, RAL 9003

er
Off-white, similar to RAL 9002
Dimensions
FLM-420-O2-E Approx. 50 mm x 22 mm ( x H)
FLM-420-O2-W Approx. 76 mm x 30 mm ( x H)

er
FLM-420-O2-E Approx. 35 g / 130 g
FLM-420-O2-W Approx. 55 g / 155 g
FLM-420-O2-D Approx. 150 g / 235 g

Permitted operating temperature -20 C to +65 C
IEC 60950
Class III equipment
System limits
Max. cable length per output 3 m
FLM420O2E Output Interface Module
type in-built
FLM-420-O2-E
FLM420O2W Output Interface Module
type wall-mount, with cover
FLM-420-O2-W
FLM420O2D Output Interface Module
DIN rail type
FLM-420-O2-D
FLM-IFB126-S
8
FLM420O1I1 Output-
input Interface Modules
Features
Semi-conductor output electrically isolated from LSN
loop and short-circuit proof
Max. switchable current per output 700 mA
Individually selectable input monitoring functions (EOL
or contact)
isolators
The FLM420O1I1 Output-input Interface Modules are
fitted with one output to control external devices and with
one monitored input.
They are 2wire LSN elements for connection to the fire
panels FPA5000 and FPA1200 and offer the enhanced
functionality of LSN improved technology.
Functions
Semi-conductor output
The semi-conductor output is electrically isolated from the
LSN loop and protected against short circuits.
OUT-
0V
OUT
POW+
Functionality of the semi-conductor output
Output power supply
The power supply for loads connected to the output can be
selected as:
Auxiliary power supply from the fire panel
External power supply units.

Input monitoring functions
The FLM420O1I1 Output-input-Interface Module provides
two monitoring functions:
1. Monitoring of a line by an EOL resistor
2. Monitoring of a potentialfree contact
The input monitoring functions can be selected by setting
the corresponding addresses.
The EOL resistor has a standard resistance of 3.9 k.
Standby
Triggering in the event of a short circuit
Triggering in the event of line interruption.

IN+
IN-
R
EOL
R
EOL
R
L/2
R
L/2
IN
R

=
R
L/2
+ R
L/2
+ R
EOL
R
L/2
Line resistance
The following line conditions will be reliably detected if the
overall line resistance is within the specified range:

Short circuit < 800
Interruption > 12.000
Contact monitoring
IN+
IN-
R
L/2
R
L/2
IN
programmed for each input. Contact monitoring has a pulse
intensity of 8 mA.
Adress switches
The address of the interface module is set using:
DIP switches in case of the FLM420O1I1E
Rotary switches in case of the FLM420O1I1D.

automatic or manual addressing with or without auto-
detection.
8
Address
rotary
switches
Address
DIP
switches
Mode
0 0 0 0 Loop/stub in improved version LSN mode
with automatic addressing (T-taps not pos-
sible)
0 0 1
-
2 5 4
1 - 254 Loop/stub/T-taps in improved version LSN
mode with manual addressing
LSN features

additional elements

Interface variants
The Output-input Interface Modules are available in various
designs:
FLM420O1I1E in-built version:

-
Suitable for standard device boxes according to
EN 60670 and
-
For a space-saving installation in all devices.
FLM420O1I1D DIN-rail version:

-
Suitable for installation on a DIN-rail according to
EN 500022 with included adapter and
-
For the FLMIFB126S surface-mounted housing.
Complies with
EN 54-17: 2005
EN 54-18: 2005
Europe CE FLM-420-O1I1-E
FLM-420-O1I1-D
FLM420O1I1D
LSN
P O W E R I N
P O W + 0 V
O U T
P O W + O U T -
I N
I N + I N -
b1+ b2+ a-
IN IN- | IN+ Input 1
OUT POW+ Reference potential (+)
OUT- Output (switched negative potential)
POWER IN POW+ | 0V Power supply output
LSN b1+ | a- | b2+ LSN (incoming / outgoing)
FLM420O1I1E
I
N
I
N
-
IN
+
0
V
0
V
+
U
+
U
a
2
-
a
1
-
b 2 +
b
1
+
OUT
POWER IN POW+ | 0V- Power supply (interface module and
output)
OUT POW+ Reference potential (+)
OUT- Output (switched negative potential)
IN - | + Input
0V | +U | +U Auxiliary power supply (support points
to loop through)
LSN b2+ | a2- | b1+ | a1- LSN (incoming / outgoing)

FPA1200.
8

the fire panel.

the LSN line.
The power supply for the output is either fed by the

auxiliary power supply from the fire panel or by an
external power supply unit. External power supplies
must be free-of-ground.
The outputs OUT/OUT- are switched against the

negative potential of the interface module (POWER IN/
0V). The positive potential (OUT/POW+) is either
supplied by the auxiliary power (AUX) from the fire
panel or by an external power supply unit.
The maximum switchable voltage of the semi-conductor

output is 30 V DC. The maximum switchable current is
700 mA (depending on the external power supply).
The activation of the input IN has to be carried out

electrically isolated from LSN (e.g. with relay contacts,
pushbutton, etc.).
The input must have a minimum activation time of 3.2 s.
A maximum cable length of 3 m is permitted per input

and output.
The maximum cable length of all inputs connected to

the loop or stub is 500 m in total. Additionally, all
outputs which are not electrically isolated from LSN
must be included in the total line length calculation (e.g.
peripherals connected via C points). With
UEZ 2000 LSN and UGM 2020, the limitation to 500 m
applies to each Network Processing Converter (NVU).

second pair of wires to be looped through to supply the
downstream connected elements with LSN power.

Parts Included
Type Qty. Component
FLM-420- O1I1-E 1 Output-input Interface Module, in-built ver-
sion
FLM-420-O1I1-D 1 Output-input Interface Module, DINrail ver-
sion, with adapter and light pipe
Electrical
LSN

from LSN
1.9 mA
Output
Max. switchable voltage of

semi-conductor output
30 V DC
Max. switchable output

current
700 mA (depending on external power
supply)
External power supply 5 V DC to 30 V DC

Input
Overall line resistance R
with R
= R
L/1
+ R
L/2
+ R
EOL
Standby: 1500 to 6000
Line interruption: > 12.000

Contact monitoring
Max. current strength (cur-

rent pulse)
8 mA
Minimum activation time of the in-
put
3.2 s
Mechanical
Connections
FLM-420-O1I1-E 14 screw terminals
FLM-420-O1I1-D 12 screw terminals

Permissible wire diameter
FLM-420- O1I1-E
0.6 mm
2
to 2.0 mm
2
FLM-420- O1I-D
0.6 mm
2
to 3.3 mm
2
Address setting
FLM-420- O1I1-E 8 DIP switches
FLM-420- O1I1-D 3 rotary switches

Housing material
FLM-420- O1I1-E ABS/PC blend
FLM-420- O1I1-D incl.

adapter
PPO (Noryl)
Housing color
FLM-420- O1I1-E Signal white, RAL 9003

adapter
Gray white, similar to RAL 9002
Dimensions
FLM-420- O1I1-E Approx. 50 mm x 22 mm ( x H)

adapter
Weight Without/with packing
FLM-420- O1I1-E Approx. 35 g / 170 g
FLM-420-O2-D Approx. 95 g / 390 g

ture
-20 C to +65 C
Permissible rel. humidity < 96% (non-condensing)
IEC 60950
Class III equipment
Maximum cable length input 3 m
Maximum cable length output 3 m
8
FLM420O1I1E Output-input Interface
Module
in-built version
FLM-420-O1I1-E
FLM420O1I1D Output-input Interface
Module
DIN-rail version
FLM-420-O1I1-D
8
FLM-420-RLE-S Extin-
guishing Interface Module
Features
setting
2 input lines usable as independent inputs
LED display for status indication
Surface or DIN rail mounting
The FLM-420-RLE-S is used for the supervised monitoring
and activation of extinguishing systems connected to the
Local SecurityNetwork.
System Overview
Designation Connection
NO / COM Relay
FB2+ Feedback +
FB1- / FB2- Feedback -
FB1+ Feedback +
b1+ / a- / b2+ LSN
Functions
The FLM-420-RLE-S is fitted with a low voltage relay for
connecting one extinguishing system to one LSN fire panel.
Two feedback lines allow the FLM-420-RLE-S to signal a
fault or the activation of the extinguishing system. These are
indicated by a yellow and red LED.
The feedback lines can also be used as independent input
lines for the supervised monitoring of different peripherals.
The address of the interface module is defined by setting
the rotary switches accordingly.
Address setting (rotary switches 1-3)
addressing (Ttap system not possible)
manual addressing
CL 0 0 Loop/stub in LSN classic mode
of LSN improved technology:
Flexible network structures including Ttaps without

additional elements
Unshielded cables can be used

control panels
Short circuit isolators
loop (according to EN 54-17). A fault indication is sent to
the fire panel.
8
Complies with EN 5417:2005, EN 54-18:2005 and VdS 2496
Europe CE FLM-420-RLE-S
CPD 0786-CPD-20725 FLM-420-RLE-S
Germany VdS G 209085 FLM-420-RLE-S

FPA1200 and the classic LSN control panels
BZ 500 LSN, UEZ 2000 LSN and UGM 2020 (from
WinPara SW version 4.83).
The FLM-420-RLE-S can be surface-mounted with the

provided housing, or mounted on a DIN rail without the
housing. A DIN rail adapter is included in the delivery.
Parts Included
Quant. Component
1 FLM-420-RLE-S Extinguishing Interface Module
1 Surface-mount housing
1 DIN rail adapter
Electrical
Max. current consumption 7.9 mA
Activation extinguishing system
after initialization / during

standby
3.3 kOhm
during alarm 680 Ohm

Max. monitoring voltage 6 V
Max. monitoring current 1.5 mA (line short-circuit)
Mechanics
Operating/display elements 2 LEDs (1 yellow, 1 red)
Address setting 3 rotary switches for
LSN classic mode or LSN improved

version

Connection 8 screw terminals
Material
Surface-mount housing ABS/PC blend

Color
Interface module Gray white, similar to RAL 9002
Housing Signal white, RAL 9003

Dimensions
with housing Approx. 126 x 126 x 71 mm

(4.96 x 4.96 x 2.8 in.)
without housing (with DIN

rail adapter)
(4.33 x 4.33 x 1.89 in.)
Weight
with housing Approx. 390 g (13.8 ounces)
without housing Approx. 150 g (5.3 ounces)

ture
-20 C to 50 C
(-4 F to 122 F)
Permitted storage temperature -25 C to 85 C
(-13 F to 176 F)
IEC 60950
Class III equipment
IEC 60529
IP 30
FLM-420-RLE-S Extinguishing Interface
Module
The FLM-420-RLE-S is used for the supervised
monitoring and activation of extinguishing sys-
tems.
FLM-420-RLE-S
8
FMXIFB55S Interface Box
Surface-mount
The FMXIFB55S Interface Box Surface-mount acts as a
retainer for interface modules of wall mount type in the
420 series.
Parts Included
Type Qty. Component
FMX-IFB55-S 1 Interface Box Surface-mount
Note A compatible cover is included in the scope of
delivery for interface modules of wall mount
type in the 420 series (FLM420...W).
Mechanics
Material ABS
Color Signal white, RAL 9003
Weight Approx. 30 g
Dimensions ( x H) 76 x 33 mm
FLMIFB126S Surface-
mounted Housing
The FLMIFB126S Surface-mounted Housing acts as a
retainer for interface modules type DIN rail or as a spare
housing for the type surface-mount in the 420 series.
The Surface-mounted Housing has two cable ducts on

opposite sides:
-
-

-
21 mm (for conduit)
-
Material ABS/PC Blend
Color Signal white (RAL 9003)
FLM-IFB126-S
8
NAK 100 LSN Branch Inter-
face
Features
Connection of up to 32 LSN elements on a stub
Tamper surveillance of the branch expansion
NAK 100 LSN Branch Interface can also be used to switch
stubs with other LSN elements to loops/stubs.
System Overview
NAK
100
LSN
NAK
100
LSN
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2
2 2 2
2 2 2 1
3
4
4
4
Pos. Description
1 Fire panel
2 LSN element
3 Loop
4 Stub
Functions
The NAK 100 LSN has a device contact (tamper contact),
which if triggered sends a signal that is transmitted as a
separate message.
Europe CE NAK 100 LSN
Germany VdS G 293018 NAK 100 LSN
Hungary TMT TMT-50-7/2004 FK 100 LSN, NAK/NBK/
NKK/NSB/NTK 100 LSN
Maximum 32 LSN elements can be connected to a stub.
The power supply of the LSN part in the NAK 100 LSN
occurs via the two wires of the LSN line.
A second wire pair can be looped through to provide a

separate power supply for subsequent LSN interface.
VDE
In accordance with VdS, automatic detectors may not

be mixed with manual call points in a stub.
VdS allows a maximum of 10 manual call points per

stub.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 Interface housing for surface mounting
1 Interface circuit board NAK 100 LSN
1 Bag with connection accessories
Electrical
Operating voltage +10 V DC . . +33 V DC
Mechanics
Housing
Material Plastic, ABS Terluran
Color Light-gray, RAL 9002
Dimensions (W x H x D) 100 x 135 x 35.7 mm

Permissible operating temperature 0 C . . . +50 C
Planning
Connection Branch for loop or stub lines
8
NAK 100 LSN Branch Interface
To connect additional stubs to further LSN el-
ements on the loops or stubs
NAK 100-AP
8
Interface and EOL Modules | EOL Modules | 293
FLM-320-EOL2W Conven-
tional EOL Module 2-Wire
The EOL module terminates conventional lines according to
EN 5413.
It detects faults of the conventional line according to
EN 5413 and reports them to the fire panel. The reports are
displayed on the panel controller.
For wirings according to EN 5413 a maximum of 32
automatic fire detectors or 10 manual call points can be
used.
Max. 32 automatic fire detectors in a conventional line.
Max. 10 manual call points in a conventional line.

Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 FLM-320-EOL2W Conventional EOL Module
Available from end of 2009.
Electrical
Mechanics
Housing material Thermelt 861
Housing color black
Weight 7 g
ture
-25C to 70C
Permissible storage temperature -25C to 85C
Permissible relative humidity <96%, non condensing
2-Wire
ventional lines
FLM-320-EOL2W
8
294 | Interface and EOL Modules | EOL Modules
FLM-420-EOL2W-W EOL
Module LSN
The EOL module terminates LSN stubs or T-taps according
to EN 5413.
It detects LSN line faults according to EN 5413 and reports
them to the fire panel via LSN. The reports are displayed on
the panel controller.
For wirings according to EN 5413 a maximum of 32
automatic fire detectors or 10 manual call points can be
used in a LSN stub or Ttap.
Max. 32 automatic fire detectors in a LSN stub or Ttap.
Max. 10 manual call points in a LSN stub or Ttap.

Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 FLM-420-EOL2W-W EOL Module LSN
Available from end of 2009.
Electrical
Mechanics
Housing material ABS + PC Blend
Housing color Signal white (RAL 9003)
Dimensions (x D) 76 x 30 mm
Weight 50 g
ture
-20C to 55C
Permissible storage temperature -25C to 85C
Permissible relative humidity <96%, non condensing
stubs or T-taps
FLM-420-EOL2W-W
8
Signaling Devices
9
Acoustic Signaling Devices 298
Optical Signaling Devices 309
296 | Signaling Devices | Acoustic Signaling Devices
Acoustic Signaling Devices

MSS300-SA SG 200 DS 10
LSN/GLT GLT GLT GLT
Operating voltage 9 V DC to 30 V DC 10 V DC to 30 V DC 230 V AC, 24 V DC
Current consumption from LSN
Current consumption from exter-
nal source
Standby: 1 mA/ Alarm: 20 mA < 32 mA 230 V type: max. 60 mA
24 V type: max. 420 mA
Protection category IP 54 with flush-mounted base:
IP 54
with surface-mounted base:
IP 65
IP 55
ture
-10 C to +55 C -40 C to +80 -25 C to +55 C
Sound pressure 87 dB(A) to 100 dB(A) 93 dB(A) to 114 dB(A) 105 dB(A) to 110 dB(A)
Color red (RAL 3001) red (RAL 3001),
white (RAL 9010)
red (RAL 2002)
9
Signaling Devices | Acoustic Signaling Devices | 297
Acoustic Signaling Devices

HPW/11
LSN/GLT GLT
Operating voltage 230 V AC
Current consumption from exter-
nal source
100 mA
Protection category IP 55
ture
-20 C to +60 C
Sound pressure approx. 110dB(A)
Color light gray
9
MAGIC.SENS Detector
Base Sounders
Features
Volume up to 100 dB(A)
Electronic tone generator integrated into the signaling
device
11 different tone variants can be selected (incl.
DIN tone)
Great reliability and long service life
For surface-mounted and flush-mounted cable feed
The LSN types maintain LSN loop functions in the event
of wire interruption or short-circuit thanks to two
integrated isolators
Detector Base Sounders are used when the acoustic
signaling of an alarm is required directly at the site of the
fire.
System Overview
128
8
1
,
5
3
4
1
2
Pos. Description
1 Detector module
2 Sounder unit
3 Snap-fit hooks
4 Mounting base
Functions
The electronic tone generator integrated into the signaling
device can produce 11 different tones (including DIN tones
conforming to DIN 33404 and EN 457).
The tone variants include different wailing tones, various
signals for fire alarms, and other special modulations.
Depending on the tone type, volume set, and operating
voltage, the sound pressure level varies between 87 dB(A)
and 100 dB(A).
The programming of the tone type and volume setting is
performed:
for the MSS 300 via integrated DIP switch and

potentiometer (continuously)
for the MSS 401 via the LSN.

Europe CE MSS 300 WS
MSS 300 ws - EC
MSS 400 LSN
MSS 401 LSN
Germany VdS G 204067 MSS 300
G 204068 MSS 400 / 401
MAGIC.SENS Detector Base Sounders are intended

only for interior areas.
9
The current consumption depends on the tone type

selected and is maximum 20 mA.
MSS 300 ws Detector Base Sounder White
Control from the C point of the deployed fire detector
When the detector is reset in the event of an alarm, the

sounder is not reset.
The sounder continues to sound for approx. 90 s after

being switched off after occurrence of an alarm.
MSS 300 ws EC Detector Base Sounder White
The sounder is externally controlled, e.g. via

FLM420NAC or NZM 0002 A (not via the C point of the
deployed detector).
MSS 401 LSN Detector Base Sounder White
The Detector Base Sounder as well as the deployed

detector are each independent LSN elements.
The current consumption from the LSN is only max.

1.025 mA, as the sounder has a separate power supply.
Requires a separate power supply.

Tone type table
No
.
Signal type
(sound type)
Frequency /
modulation
Acoustic sound
level at 24 V
1* Increasing/ decreasing
tone (DIN tone)
1200/500 Hz
at 1 Hz
96 dB(A)
2 Increasing/ decreasing
tone
British alarm tone
(BS 5839)
800-970 Hz
at 1 Hz
100 dB(A)
3 Increasing / decreasing
tone
Australian alarm tone
(AS 2220)
2400-2850 Hz
at 7 Hz
95 dB(A)
4 Variable tone
Dutch alarm tone
500-1200 Hz
3.5 s on/
0.5 s off
97 dB(A)
5 Continuous tone, British
alarm tone (BS 5839)
970 Hz 97 dB(A)
6 Variable tone,
French alarm tone
554 Hz/100 ms
440 Hz/400 ms
97 dB(A)
7 Continuous tone,
Swedish alarm tone
660 Hz 97 dB(A)
8 Variable tone 580/1000 Hz
each 500 ms on / off
91 dB(A)
9 Pulse tone 580 Hz
each 250 ms on / off
87 dB(A)
10 USA temporal 3 tone
ISO 8201
610 Hz 99 dB(A)
11 USA temporal 3 tone
ISO 8201
2850 Hz 94 dB(A)
* Delivery state: tone complying with DIN 33404 or EN 457
Electrical
Operating voltage
MSS 300 9 V DC to 30 V DC
MSS 401 LSN 15 V DC to 33V DC

Current consumption from external
source
Quiescent state / alarm
MSS 300 LSN 1 mA / max. 20 mA
MSS 401 LSN 2 mA / max. 20 mA

MSS 401 LSN Max. 1.025 mA

Mechanics
Connections (inputs/outputs)
0.28 mm
2
to 2.5 mm
2
Dimensions (W x H) 128 x 40.5 mm
Weight
Without packaging Approx. 220 g
With packaging Approx. 260 g

Housing
Material Plastic, ABS (Novodur)
Color White, similar to RAL 9010

Protection category as per EN 60529
(with detector)
IP 30
Special features
Sound pressure level at a distance of
1 m
Max. 100 dB (A)
Frequency range 440 Hz up to 2.85 kHz
MSS 300 ws Detector Base Sounder White
Control via C-point of the detector
MSS 300
MSS 300 wsEC Detector Base Sounder
White
Control through fire panel via interface
MSS300-WH-EC
9
MAGIC.SENS Detector Base Sounders

MSS 300 MSS300-WH-EC
GLT/LSN GLT GLT
Control by the C point of the fire detector by the fire panel via an interface
Operating voltage 9 V DC . . . 28 V DC 9 V DC . . . 28 V DC
Current consumption external power supply external power supply
- Standby 1 mA 1 mA
- Alarm max. 20 mA max. 20 mA
Protection category IP 30 IP 30
Permissible operating temperature -10 C . . . +55 C -10 C . . . +55 C
9
SG 200 Acoustic Signaling
Devices
Features
Compact, robust and maintenance-free
Can be used in adverse environmental conditions
For 12 V DC and 24 V DC
Molded in electronic circuitry
Available for surface and flush-mounted cable feed
The SG 200 are acoustic signaling devices with an
electronic tone generator and are designed for connection
to fire panels.
Functions
The integrated tone generator offers a selection of 28 tone
variants, including various wailing tones, diverse signals for
fire alarm (e. g. the DIN tone according to EN 457 /
DIN 33404) and other special modulations.
The programming/coding is undertaken via a five-pin DIP
switch in the signaling device. With a selected tone type, on
activation of the second input, the second tone type is
switched on.
The volume can be set continuously via an integrated
potentiometer.
voltage, the sound pressure varies between 93 dB(A) and
114 dB(A).
Monitored connection to fire panels is possible.
The bayonet lock enables simple mounting.
Europe CE SG 200
CPD 0786-CPD-20177 SG 200
Germany VdS G 204147 SG 200
Poland CNBOP 0149/2008 SG 200
Hungary TMT TMT-89/13/2004 SG 200, SG 100
Can be connected to the following fire panels:

-
BZ 500 LSN
-
UEZ 1000 LSN
-
UEZ 2000 LSN
-
UGM 2020.
When connected to monitored control lines with

feedback, the acoustic signaling devices must be
operated using a universal circuit relay UAR.
When connected to monitored control lines without

feedback no UAR is required.
Doubled screw clips exist for looping-in of voltage.

Table: tone type, sound pressure level in dB(A) and
current consumption in mA
Tone
1/(2)
Signal type
(sound type)
Frequency /
modulation
Sound
level
dB(A)
3dB
Current
consump-
tion mA
3mA
at 12 / 24 V
1/(21) Variable tone
BS 5839 Part 1
800/1000 Hz
at 2 Hz
90 / 99
dB(A)
9/18 mA
2/(2) Pulse tone
Swedish alarm
tone
660 Hz
each 1.8 ms on / off
90 / 98
dB(A)
6/13 mA
3/(22) Variable tone 2400/2970 Hz
at 2 Hz
102 /
113
dB(A)
12/25 mA
4/(18) Pulse tone,
ISO 8210,
BS 5839
1 kHz at 0.3 Hz, ev-
ery 0.5 s on/off
86 / 94
dB(A)
10/24 mA
5/(22) Increasing/de-
creasing tone
2400-2900 Hz
at 7 Hz
97 / 105
dB(A)
12/23 mA
6/(6) Pulse tone
Swedish alarm
tone
600 Hz
at 1 Hz
90 / 99
dB(A)
8/14 mA
7/(21) Pulse tone
BS 5839 Part 1
1000 Hz
0.2 s on / 1 s off
83 / 93
dB(A)
7/11 mA
creasing tone
BS 5839 Part 1
Fast Sweep (LF)
800-1000 Hz
at 1 Hz
94 / 101
dB(A)
9/16 mA
9/(9) Continuous tone
Swedish alarm
tone
660 Hz 90 / 99
dB(A)
8/13 mA
BS 5839 Part 1
800-1000 Hz
at 1 Hz
91 / 97
dB(A)
9/17 mA
9
Tone
1/(2)
Signal type
(sound type)
Frequency /
modulation
Sound
level
dB(A)
3dB
Current
consump-
tion mA
3mA
creasing tone
1400-2000 Hz
at 10 Hz
93 / 101
dB(A)
13/26 mA
12/(21) Slow whoop 500-1200 Hz
0.5 s
92 / 100
dB(A)
9/15 mA
creasing tone
BS 5839 Part 1
Fast Sweep (LF)
800-1000 Hz
at 50 Hz
90 / 98
dB(A)
9/15 mA
14/(21) Special tone,
French alarm tone
554 Hz/100 ms
400 Hz/400 ms
87 / 95
dB(A)
7/12 mA
creasing tone
BS 5839 Part 1,
Fast Sweep (LF)
800-1000 Hz
at 7 Hz
91 / 99
dB(A)
9/15 mA
16/(16) Pulse tone, Swed-
ish alarm tone
660 Hz, 6.5 s on/
13 s off
89 / 98
dB(A)
7/12 mA
17/(21) Pulse tone
BS 5839 Part 1
1000 Hz
at 1 Hz
85 / 95
dB(A)
9/15 mA
18/(4) Pulse tone,
ISO 8201,
BS 5839 Part 1
2,9kHz at 0,3Hz,
on/off every 0.5 s
103 /
115
dB(A)
14/25 mA
creasing tone
2400/2900 Hz
at 1 Hz
99 / 104
dB(A)
11/22 mA
20/(21) Pulse tone
Pelican Crossing
2900 Hz, 150 ms
on / 100 ms off
102 /
110
dB(A)
10/25 mA
21/(21) Continuous tone
BS 5839 Part 1
1000 Hz 87 / 91
dB(A)
9/18 mA
22/(21) Continuous tone 2900 Hz 104 /
111
dB(A)
14/27 mA
23/(23) Alternating tone,
Swedish alarm
tone
800-970 Hz
at 50 Hz
89 / 95
dB(A)
7/13 mA
24/(22) Pulse tone
Back-up alarm
2400-2850 Hz
at 50 Hz
103 /
111
dB(A)
13/23 mA
BS 5839 Part 1
970 Hz 90 / 97
dB(A)
9/15 mA
26*/(21) Increasing/de-
creasing tone
DIN tone (see be-
low)
1200-500 Hz
at 1 Hz
90 / 98
dB(A)
8/16 mA
creasing tone
2400-2900 Hz
at 50 Hz
98 / 108
dB(A)
12/22 mA
28/(28) Pulse tone
Swedish alarm
tone
660 Hz,
each 150 ms on /
off
88 / 96
dB(A)
4/9 mA
* Delivery state: tone complies with DIN 33404 or EN 457
Measurement: SPL values for 1m measurement position are
based on a measurement at 3 m + 9,54 dB.
Measuring setup for DIN sound (DIN 33404, Part 3) according
to DIN EN543:2001/A1:2002.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 Acoustic Signaling Device, red or white
1 Base, surface or flush cable feed
Electrical
Current consumption < 32 mA
Switch-on current / time 30 mA (over 2 s) / 1.5 ms
Mechanics
Dimensions (W x H)
With flush-mounted base 93 mm x 81 mm
With surface-mounted base 93 mm x 101.5 mm

Color Red, RAL 3001
White, RAL 9010
Weight
With flush-mounted base 300 g
With surface-mounted base 320 g

ture
-40C . . . +80C
Permissible rel. humidity Complying with VdS EN 543
With flush-mounted base IP 54
With surface-mounted base IP 65

Special features
Max. sound pressure
At 12 V 110 dB(A) 3 dB(A)
At 24 V 114 dB(A) 3 dB(A)

Frequency range 400 Hz to 2900 Hz (0.15%)
Volume control - 20 dB(A)
SG 200 Red, Surface-mounted Cable Feed SG200-S-red
SG 200 Red, Flush-mounted Cable Feed SG200-R-red
SG 200 White, Surface-mounted Cable Feed SG200-S-white
SG 200 White, Flush-mounted Cable Feed SG200-R-white
9
DS 10 Sounders
Features
Very robust housing made of 4 mm pressure-molded
aluminum
Compact and maintenance-free
Great reliability and long lifespan
Reverse polarity protected connections
The DS 10 sounders are acoustic signaling devices for
connection to fire panels, available for operating voltage
230 V AC or 24 V DC.
Functions
The DS 10 sounders have an integrated tone generator with
a selection of 6 sound variants, including DIN tones
conforming to EN 457 (DIN 33404).
voltage, the sound pressure level varies between 105 dB(A)
and 110 dB(A).
The programming/coding is undertaken via DIP switches in
the signaling device.
The DS 10 sounders can be used as a monitored and non-
monitored signaling devices.
VdS ID number: G 28 609
CE DS 10
EN54-3: 2006
Europe CE DS 10
Germany VdS G 28609 DS 10
For surface-mounted cable feed

-
BZ 1012
-
BZ 1060
-
BZ 500 LSN
-
UEZ 1000 LSN
-
UEZ 2000 LSN
-
UGM 2020.
The DS 10 sounders can be directly connected to

monitored control lines.
Tone type table
No Signal shape Frequency
1 DIN tone (increasing/decreasing tone) 1200-500 Hz
2 Variable tone 825/1075 Hz
3 Pulse tone 1 825 Hz
4 Pulse tone 2 500 Hz
5 Continuous tone 1 825 Hz
6 Continuous tone 2 500 Hz
Calculation example:
Number of signaling devices used:
Maximum DS 10 sound pressure level: 110 dB
less 10 dB for unique audibility: -10 dB
less environmental sound level: -70 dB
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Attenuation through distance from siren: 30 dB
9
Diagram: Sound Pressure Level Drop
1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256
0
-20
-40
-60
-30
-10
-50
1
2
y
x
Pos. Description
x Distance from loudspeaker (m)
y Sound pressure level decrease (dB)
1 Sound pressure decrease on reflection
(depends on room volume and reverberation time)
2 Drop of sound pressure without reflection
The diagram shows a maximum distance of 32 m for this
damping. It is therefore recommended that an audible
notification appliance be installed approximately every
60 m.
32m
60m
32m
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 Sounder red, 24 V DC or 230 V AC,
surface-mounted cable feed
Operating voltage
DS 10 rot, 230 V 230 V AC
DS 10 rot, 24 V 24 V DC (12 V DC 30 V DC)

Current consumption
230 V type Max. 60 mA
24 V type Max. 420 mA

Sound pressure level at a distance of 1 m Max. 110 dB (A)
Frequency range 500 Hz up to 1.2 kHz
Permissible operating temperature -25 C . . +55 C
Permissible relative humidity 95%
Protection class as per EN 60529 IP 66/67
Housing material Cast aluminum
Housing color Red, similar to RAL 2002
Weight
230 V type 2,200 g
24 V type 1,800 g
DS 10 Red, 230 V DS10-230V
DS 10 Red, 24 V DS10-24V
9
HPW 11 AC Alarm Horn
Features
Robust housing made of impact-resistant plastic
Suitable for indoor and outdoor use
Very loud alarm tone: 110 dB(A)
The AC run Alarm Horn is a universal acoustic signaling
device for dry and damp areas.
Europe CE HPW 11
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 HPW 11 AC Alarm Horn, 230 V
Electric
Operating voltage 230 V AC
Current consumption 100 mA
Mechanics
Line feed PG11 screw point for cable diameter
812 mm
Housing color Light gray
Weight
With megaphone 1,200 g approx
Without megaphone 900 g approx.

Special features
1 m
Approx. 110 dB (A)
HPW 11 AC Alarm Horn
universal acoustic signaling device for dry and
damp areas.
HPW/11
9
FNM-420-A Sounder Indoor
Features
Volume up to 101.3 dB(A)
Maximum current consumption less than 3,9 mA
Up to 100 sounders per loop
Constant sound pressure level between 22 V and 33 V
operating voltage
Synchronization without delay
Easy to install
Long lifetime and modern design
32 different tone variants can be selected (incl. DIN
Tone)
The indoor sounders are used independently for signaling
an alarm directly at the fire location.
Functions
The sounder allows to select 32 types of alarm and
evacuation tones (incl. DIN tone 33404 Part 3) for different
requirements.
You can adjust the sound pressure by five levels according
to the operational environment. Depending on the tone type
and volume set, the sound pressure varies between 65 dB
and 101.3 dB. Sounders of the same LSN loop and with the
same tone type provide synchronization without delay. The
sounders can be programmed easily via the fire panel.
Complies with
EN 54-3:2001
EN 54-17:2005
The signaling devices are intended for indoor use.
The current consumption depends on the tone type

selected and is maximum 3,9 mA.
The maximum quantity of sounders on a loop depends

on the cable diameter and overall loop current.
Please refer to the Fire System Designer for a safe loop
configuration.
Tone type table
Nr Signal type
(Tone type)
Frequency /
modulation
Sound pres-
sure level
dB(A)
EN 54-3 **
1* Sweeping tone =
DIN-Tone
1200-500 Hz at
1 Hz, off 10 ms
99.0 dB(A) 93.9 dB(A)
2 Sweeping tone 2400-2900 Hz at
50 Hz
98.7 dB(A)
7 Hz
99.6 dB(A)
4 Sweeping tone 800/1000 Hz at
7 Hz
99.0 dB(A)
5 Intermittent
tone
1000 Hz at 1 Hz 101.2 dB(A)
6 Intermittent
tone
1000 Hz / 0.25 s
on, 1 s off
100.5 dB(A)
7 Alternating tone 800/1000 Hz at
1 Hz
101.3 dB(A)
8 Continuous tone 970 Hz 99.1 dB(A) 94.7 dB(A)
2 Hz
101.0 dB(A)
10 Intermittent
tone
970 Hz / 0,5 s on/
off, 3 tones per 4 cy-
cles
99.0 dB(A) 94.0 dB(A)
11 Intermittent
tone
2900 Hz / 0,5 s on/
off
100.1 dB(A)
12 Intermittent
tone
1000 Hz / 0,5 s on/
off
101.2 dB(A)
1 Hz
100.3 dB(A)
14 Alternating tone 510 Hz/610 Hz /
0,5 s on/off
97.8 dB(A)
15 Intermittent
tone
510 Hz / 1 s on, 1 s
off
96.5 dB(A)
16 Intermittent
tone
2900 Hz at 1 Hz 99.2 dB(A)
2 Hz
99.4 dB(A)
1 Hz
101.2 dB(A)
10 Hz
97.3 dB(A)
20 Sweeping tone 500-1200 Hz /
0.5 s
98.5 dB(A)
21 Continuous tone 2900 Hz 98.1 dB(A)
50 Hz
99.8 dB(A)
23 Alternating tone 554 Hz/100 ms +
440 Hz/400 ms
95.7 dB(A)
9
Nr Signal type
(Tone type)
Frequency /
modulation
Sound pres-
sure level
dB(A)
EN 54-3 **
24 Slow Whoop 500-1200 Hz in
3,5 s, off 0,5 s
100.1 dB(A) 96.0 dB(A)
25 Intermittent
tone
2900 Hz / 150 ms
on, 100 ms off
99.6 dB(A)
26 Continuous tone 660 Hz 97.6 dB(A)
27 Intermittent
tone
660 Hz; 1,8 s on/off 97.6 dB(A)
28 Intermittent
tone
660 Hz / 150 ms on/
off
96.4 dB(A)
29 USA temporal 3
tone ISO 8201
610 Hz 97.7 dB(A)
30 US Temporal
Pattern LF
950 Hz / 0,5 s on/
off x 3 then 1,5 s off
95.8 dB(A)
31 3. Hi/Lo 1000/800 Hz
(0,25 s on/alter-
nate)
100.7 dB(A)
32 Thyssen Krupp
Tone
450/650 Hz at 2 Hz 96.5 dB(A)
* Delivery state: Tone in accordance with DIN 33404
** Results taken from EN 54-3 test results: Min SPL @ 15V @
max. volume @ loudest node dB(A). All other SPL
measurements are taken on axis and are not third party
verified.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 Sounder Indoor
1 Key to open the housing
Electrical
Current consumption
Quiescent state < 1 mA
Alarm < 3,9 mA

Mechanics
Connections (inputs/outputs) 0,28 mm to 2,5 mm
Housing
Color red, similar to RAL 3001

white, similar to RAL 9010
Weight
Without packaging 250 g
With packageing 300 g

Special features
1 m
max. 101.3 dB(A)
Frequency range 440 Hz up to 2,90 kHz
FNM-420-A-WH Sounder Indoor, white FNM-420-A-WH
FNM-420-A-RD Sounder Indoor, red FNM-420-A-RD
9
308 | Signaling Devices | Optical Signaling Devices
Optical Signaling Devices

BL 200 PB 2005 EASY AV-R FNS-420-R
Signaling device type Strobe Strobe Inbuilt Strobe for
SG 200
LSN Strobe
LSN/GLT GLT GLT GLT LSN
Operating voltage 10 V DC to 30 V DC 18 V DC to 30 V DC 10 V DC to 32 V DC 15 V DC to 33 V DC
Current consumption/Pow-
er consumption
12 V type: 150 mA
24 V type: 175 mA
5.6 W 3 mA to 10 mA 0.5 mA to 6.55 mA
Protection category IP 65 IP 55 IP 65/IP 54 IP 42
perature
-20 C to +55 C -30 C to +55 C -25 C to +70 C -20 C to +60 C
Flash strength 12 V type: 0.7 J
24 V type: 1.3 J
5.0 J 1.9 cd/3.6 cd > 2 cd
9
Signaling Devices | Optical Signaling Devices | 309
BL 200 Strobes
Features
Reliable, bright light, and long-lived with Xenon flash
tubes
For operating voltage 12 V DC and 24 V DC
Suitable for surface and flush-mounted cable feed
The BL 200 Strobes are universally-applicable signaling
devices for optical alarm and designed for connection to fire
panels.
System Overview
Functions
The strobe lamps are located in the upper section of the
transparent signaling device. When activated via the fire
panel, this emits flashes of light in accordance with the
color of the signaling device. The blink frequency is once a
second.
The electronic circuit is cast and the connections are
reverse polarity protected.
Europe CE BL 200
Germany VdS G 207104 BL 200
Poland CNBOP 0148/2008 BL 200
The Strobes are suitable for mounting in interior and

protected exterior areas.
The upper section of the signaling device is connected

to the base by a bayonet lock.
The strobe lens has screw threads and is also secured

against removal by a security screw.

-
BZ 1060
-
BZ 500 LSN
-
UEZ 1000 LSN
-
UEZ 2000 LSN
-
UGM 2020.
Parts Included
Quant. Component
1 Signaling device upper section in red, white, yellow or green
transparent
1 Mounting base, red, for surface and flush-mounted cable feed
Electrical
Operating voltage 12 V DC / 24 V DC
Current consumption
12 V DC 150 mA
24 V DC 175 mA
Starting current < 1 A
Mechanics
Housing
Material Plastic PC (polycarbonate)
Color of signaling device up-

per section
Red
White
Yellow
Green
Color of mounting base Red, RAL 3001

Dimensions 93 mm x 112.5 mm
Weight 300 g
ture
-20 C . . . +55 C
9
Special features
Flash strength
12 V DC 0.7 J
24 V DC 1.3 J
Flash frequency 1Hz ( 10%)
Minimum service life 5 million flashes
Maximum service life 50 million flashes
BL 200 Red, 12 V/24 V
Signaling device upper part red transparent,
base red, for surface-mounted and flush-
mounted cable feed
BL200-S-red
BL 200 White, 12 V/24 V
Signaling device upper part white transparent,
mounted cable feed
BL200-S-white
BL 200 Yellow, 12 V/24 V
Signaling device upper part yellow transpar-
ent, base red, for surface-mounted and flush-
mounted cable feed
BL200-S-yellow
BL 200 Green, 12 V/24 V
Signaling device upper part green transparent,
mounted cable feed
BL-200-S-green
9
FNS-P400RTH Rotating
Beacons
Features
Powerful halogen bulbs
360 light beam
Extremely rugged and durable thanks to high-quality
synthetic
Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications
Can be mounted in any orientation
The rotating beacons are used for an additional local alarm
notification.
System Overview
0
2
2
0
2
1
0 2 1
5
8
5
2
5-7 mm
0
1
1

7
4
140
0
2
8
5
2 x M 20
3 x 5.4 mm
Functions
Inside the beacon, a motor-driven mirror rotates around the
halogen bulb with constant speed and thus, generates a
blinking signal.
In the event of an alarm, the beacons are activated by the
appropriate interface or functional modules of the fire
panel.
Europe CE FNS-P400RTH
A right-angle mounting bracket can be ordered

separately for easy wall mounting
Parts Included
Quant. Component
1 Rotating Beacon with motor and reflector, in a weatherproof
housing with a red or amber lens
Electrical
Operating voltage 230 V
Light output 40 W
Mechanics
Housing
Material Polycarbonate (PC)
Base color Black
Lens color Transparent red or amber

Light source Halogen bulb
Weight 578 g
Permissible operating temperature -25C to +50C
Special features
Rotation speed
Approx. 180 min
-1
Lifespan > 5,000 h
9
FNS-P400RTH-Y Rotating Beacon Amber,
230 V
Rotating Beacon FNS-P400RTH-Y with amber
lens
FNS-P400RTH-Y
FNS-P400RTH-R Rotating Beacon Red,
230 V
Rotating Beacon FNS-P400RTH-Y with red
lens
FNS-P400RTH-R
Accessories
Mounting Bracket for FNS-P400RTH
for easy wall-mounting of the FNS-P400RTH
Rotating Beacon; mounting bracket material:
polycarbonate.
FNA-P400RBA-MB
9
PB 2005 Strobe Red, 24 V
Features
Reliable, bright light, and long-lived with Xenon flash
tubes
Polarity-safe connections
Cable feed surface and flush-mounted possible
The PB 2005 Strobe is a signaling device for visual alarm. It
is designed for connection to fire panels.
System Overview
111,2 130,5
1
6
8
,
2
Functions
The strobe lamps are located in the transparent upper

section of the signaling device. This issues flashes of red
light when controlled via the central fire panel.
The blink frequency is once a second.
The circuit board has a protective lacquer.

Europe CE PB 2005

-
BZ 1060
-
BZ 500 LSN
-
UEZ 1000 LSN
-
UEZ 2000 LSN
-
UGM 2020.
Note When connected to the BZ 1060, a resistance
of 10 /2 W in series is switched.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 PB 2005 Strobe Red, 24 V, consisting of a gray lower part and
a signal part of red, transparent acrylic glass
Electrical
Power consumption 5.6 W
Mechanics
Cable entry M20
Housing color Graphite gray, RAL 7024
Signal strobe lens material PC
Signal strobe lens color Red transparent
Dimensions (W x H x D) 166 mm x 111 mm x 128 mm
Permissible operating temperature -30C . . . +55C
Permissible storage temperature -40C . . . +70 C
Permitted relative humidity 90%
Special features
Flash strength 5.0 J
Flash frequency 1 Hz
Service life*
)
8 million flashes
*) After approx. 8 million flashes, the light emission amounts
to only 70% of the initial power. The flash tube has then
become only a bit darker.
9
PB 2005 Strobe Red, 24 V
Signaling device for visual alarm, for connec-
tion to fire panels
PB 2005
9
EASY AVR Conventional
Inbuilt Strobe for SG 200
Features
Quick installation
No additional wiring or power supply necessary
Extremely low power consumption
Two flash frequency and light intensity (brightness)
levels can be selected (set via jumper)
The EASY AVR Conventional Inbuilt Strobe is installed in
the SG 200 Sounder to enable an additional visual alarm.
The EASY AVR is suitable for all variants of the SG 200 and
its predecessor, the SG 100.
System Overview
View 1
15,8 mm
2
3
,
6
m
m
5
8
,
8

m
m
View 2
4
3
,
5

m
m
Europe CE Easy AV-R
Parts Included
Quantity Components
1 EASY AVR Conventional Inbuilt Strobe for SG 200, red, with
seal ring
Electrical
Current consumption 3 mA to 10 mA
Light intensity
- High 3.6 cd
- Low 1.8 cd
Mechanics
Material PC (UL94 V-0)
Color Red, transparent
Weight 73 g
SG 100 / SG 200 with sur-

face-mounted cable feed
IP 65
SG 100 / SG 200 with flush-

mounted cable feed
IP 54
Special features
Flash frequency 1 Hz / 1.5 Hz
Light intensity 1.9 cd / 3.6 cd
Flash strength Approx. 1 W / 2 W
Light color (wave length) Red, 625 nm to 640 nm
9
EASY AVR Conventional Inbuilt Strobe for
SG 200
Red strobe for retrofitting to SG 200 Sounder
and SG 100 previous model
EASY AV-R
9
FNS420R LSN Strobe,
Red
Features
Quick installation
No additional cabling or power supply
Low consumption thanks to LED-technology
Synchronized flash rate of 1 Hz
The FNS420R LSN Strobe is an optical signaling device and
can be connected exclusively to the fire panels FPA5000
and FPA1200.
System Overview
m
m
9
6
99,5 mm
m
m
0
4
128 mm
m
m
2
5
120 mm
MSS 401 / MSS 400
MS 400
Functions
The LSN Strobe can only be used with the MSS 400 LSN and
the MSS 401 LSN Detector Base Sounders providing a
combination of visual and acoustic signaling. Mounted on
the MS 400 Detector Base, the FNS420R can be used as a
strobe without acoustic signaling.
Both applications are easily integrated into an existing
Local SecurityNetwork (LSN).
Note The FNS420R LSN Strobe cannot be used
with standalone or conventional sounders.
Complies with EN5417:2005
Europe CE FNS-420-R LSN
CPD 0786-CPD-20531 FNS-420
Germany VdS G 207145 FNS-420-R
The FNS420R LSN Strobe can be connected exclusively to
the fire panels FPA5000 and FPA1200.
9
Parts Included
Quant. Component
1 FNS420R LSN Strobe, Red
Electrical
Operating voltage 28 V DC (15 to 33 V DC)
Current consumption 0.5 to 6.55 mA
Light intensity > 2 cd
Mechanical
Dimension (H x W) 40 x 99.5 mm
Weight 67 g
Material PC, ABS (UL94 V2)
Operating temperature -20 C to 60 C
FNS420R LSN Strobe, Red
Optical signaling device that can be connected
to the fire panels FPA5000 and FPA1200.
FNS-420-R
9
Distributors and Relays
10
Relays 320
320 | Distributors and Relays | Relays
UAR Relays for Fire Detec-
tion Systems
The Universal Connection Relay (UAR) is controlled by a
security system and handles the triggering of additional
equipment on monitored control lines.
The UAR can be, depending on the connection to the
security system, equipped with a 12 V relay or a 24 V relay.
Europe CE UAR 12V/24V
Germany VdS G 178046 UAR
Parts Included
UAR/12 V Universal Connection Relay
Qty. Components
1 Relay housing with PC board and relay base
1 Relay 12 V
Qty. Components
1 Relay housing with PC board and relay base
1 Relay 24 V
Permissible switching current Max. 3 A
Switching voltage 60 V AC/DC
Switching power with AC current
load
180 VA
Permissible ambient temperature -25 C . . . +60 C
Housing color Gray
Both parts (housing and relay) are needed.
FMX-UAR12-compl
Both parts (housing and relay) are needed.
FMX-UAR24-compl
10
Test and Service Devices
11
Test Devices 322
Service Devices 328
322 | Test and Service Devices | Test Devices
SOLO461 Heat Detector
Tester
Features
Operating status display with multi-color LED
Automatic detector recognition with infrared sensors
Automatic switch-off after 5 min. standby time
Automatic switch-off in case of battery overvoltage
Enters standby mode after 120 seconds of use
Microprocessor maintains constant heat and airflow
even with variations in battery voltage
The SOLO461 Heat Detector Tester operates with a battery
to direct heated air at heat detector sensors. It uses a
patented CAT (Cross Air Technology) system to focus the
air and direct it horizontally at the sensor regardless of the
detector's size or shape.
Functions
Cross Air Technology
Under control of a microprocessor, blown air is heated by
the element just before exiting the duct. The narrow
opening focuses the heated air into a beam. A reference
platform incorporated into the Heat Detector Tester
ensures that the beam of heated air is correctly lined up
with the sensor whatever the shape and size of the
detector.
Because the beam of hot air is blown horizontally directly
at the sensor:
Test times are dramatically reduced
Minimum power is required thereby extending battery

life
The possibility of heat damage to detector plastics is

significantly reduced
Tool Operation
When the tool is fully assembled, press the switch on the
tester to put the tool into standby mode. When the tester
is positioned so that it encloses a detector, the detector
interrupts an infrared beam turning on the heater and
blower units in the tester. Hold the tool in place over the
detector until either:
the detector alarms indicating proper operation
until the tool automatically times out indicating a

problem with the detector
When the tool is moved away from the detector or when the
tool times out the heater shuts off and the blower runs for
a few seconds to cool the heater.
USA UL URRQ.S4994, URRQ.S7201 SOLO461
Parts Included
Quant. Component
1 SOLO461 Heat Detector Tester
2 SOLO720 Battery
1 Charging set with mains and car connector
1 Literature pack
Electrical
Charging set operating voltage
Alternating voltage 110 to 240 V AC ~50/60 Hz
Direct voltage 11 to 16 V DC
Mechanical
Weight
Without battery 600 g (21 oz)
With battery 1.1 kg (38.8 oz)

Dimension ( x H) 99.5 mm x 52 mm (3.9 in x 2 in)
Environmental
Operating temperature 5 C to 45 C (40 F to 115 F)
Storage temperature -10 C to 50 C (15 F to 120 F)
Trademarks
CAT and SOLO are trademarks of No Climb Products,
Ltd.
11
Test and Service Devices | Test Devices | 323
SOLO461 Heat Detector Tester
Heat Detector Tester operating with a battery
SOLO461
Accessories
SOLO610 Test Equipment Bag
Robust bag made of sturdy woven polyester for
carrying and storing test and service products.
SOLO610
SOLO100 Telescopic Access Pole
Enables the installation and replacement of fire
detectors at high ceilings. Expandable with up
to three SOLO101 Fixed Extension Poles.
SOLO100
SOLO101 Fixed Extension Pole
detectors at ceilings. Expandable with other
Fixed Extension Poles.
SOLO101
SOLO720 Battery
Rechargeable battery bar for the SOLO461
Heat Detector Tester
SOLO720
11
SOLO330 Smoke Detector
Tester
Features
Touch-sensitive, spring-loaded mechanism for
effective, economic aerosol delivery
Clear cup allows view of detector LED
Strong and durable modern plastics technology for
long life and minimal weight
Compatible with SOLO100 and SOLO101 Poles
Use the SOLO330 Smoke Detector Tester for in place
testing of smoke detectors using an aerosol designed to
simulate smoke particles.
USA UL URRQ.S4994, URRQ.S7201 SOLO330
Parts Included
Quant. Component
1 SOLO330 Smoke Detector Tester
1 Literature pack
Mechanical
Detector size range
1
()
99 mm (3.9 in)
Weight 567 g (1 lb 4 oz)
Working angle 0 to 90
1
Only the sensing chamber needs to be sealed within the
tester cup.
Trademarks
SOLO is a trademark of No Climb Products, Ltd
SOLO330 Smoke Detector Tester
Tests smoke detectors in place using an aero-
sol.
SOLO330
11
SOLO100 Telescopic
Access Pole
Features
Non-conductive at voltage of 20 kV
Expandable with up to three SOLO101 Fixed Extension
Poles
The SOLO100 Telescopic Access Pole enables the
installation and replacement of fire detectors at high
ceilings. It can be expanded with up to three
SOLO101 Fixed Extension Poles.
The Telescopic Access Pole withstands high voltage
situations and is checked for Safety compliance in
accordance with the requirements of BS EN 61235
Section 12 using an applied voltage of 20 kV.
Electrical
Conductivity Tested per BS EN 61235 Section 12;
applied voltage 20 kV
Mechanics
Length
Europe, Middle East, Africa 1 m to 3.4 m (3.3 ft to 11.2 ft)
America 1.26 m to 4.5 m (4.1 ft to 14.8 ft)

Trademarks
SOLO is a trademark of No Climb Products, Ltd.
SOLO100
Accessories
SOLO101
11
Solo A3001 Test Aerosol
for Optical Smoke Detec-
tors
Spray with 250 ml Test Aerosol for Optical Smoke
Detectors,
DU = 12 pieces
Detectors
DU = 12 pieces
Solo A3-001
Solo CO Testing Gas
Spray with CO testing gas for multisensor detectors with C
component.
Contents: approx. 4 l compressed gas
(DU = 12 pieces)
Solo CO Testing Gas
for multisensor detectors with C-sensor, DU =
12 pieces.
Solo CO test gas
11
LSN Simulator
By imitating an LSN loop or stub, one at a time, the LSN
Simulator enables the testing of the LSN control panel
parameters.
The required SenSim software is available for download on
the BOSCH ExtraNet (authorized access only).
Suitable for:
BZ 500 LSN
UEZ 2000 LSN
UGM 2020
LSN Simulator IPB-SIM-LSN
LSN Test Device
By imitating the control panel the LSN Test Device enables
the testing of the periphery.
The required PG32 software is available for download on
the BOSCH ExtraNet (authorized access only).
Suitable for:
BZ 500 LSN
UEZ 2000 LSN
UGM 2020
LSN Test Device IPB-TD-LSN
11
328 | Test and Service Devices | Service Devices
SOLO200 Detector
Removal Tool
Features
Suitable for a wide range of detector sizes
Adjustable color-coded grips rotate to fit different
sized detectors
Universal joint ensures tool remains parallel with
ceiling
With its pivoting grip segments and three different
diameters, the SOLO200 Detector Removal Tool is suitable
for the insertion and removal of most fire detectors.
The plastic caps ensure secure gripping of fire detectors
and thus also protect the detector surface against damage.
Functions
Adjustment of detector sizes
The color-coded grips use a pull and twist motion to rotate
to the desired combinations and lock into place to fit the
following detector sizes:
Color combination Detector diameter
Yellow 64 mm to 76 mm (2.5 in to 3 in)
Yellow and red 74 mm to 93 mm (2.91 in to 3.66 in)
Yellow and blue 75 mm to 87 mm (2.95 in to 3.93 in)
Blue 86 mm to 98 mm (3 in to 3.85 in)
Blue and red 92 mm to 105 mm (3.6 in to 4.13 in)
Red 98 mm to 112 mm (3.85 in to 4.4 in)
Universal joint
A universal joint enables detector removal and replacement
even if the detector cannot be accessed from directly
underneath.
Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 SOLO200 Detector Removal Tool
2 Plastic caps for the Detector Removal Tool
Note The SOLO100 Telescopic Access Pole or
SOLO101 Fixed Extension Pole must be
purchased separately.
Mechanics
Detector size range () 64 m to 112 mm (2.5 to 4.4 in)
Weight 1.1 kg (2 lb 7 oz)
Working angle max. 30
Trademarks
SOLO200 Detector Removal Tool
Use to remove and replace detectors
SOLO200
11
Test and Service Devices | Service Devices | 329
FME420ADAP Tool
Adapter for MS420
The FME-420-ADAPT Tool Adapter can be used in addition
to the SOLO200 Detector Removal Tool. The plastic bowl
and the adapter pole optimize the insertion and removal of
fire detectors when using detector bases with springs
(MS 420, FAAMS 420RSP).
Note Use the plastic bowl exclusively with the
adapter pole. On the adapter pole there is a
rubber bearing that cushions the turning
motion when removing the fire detectors and
prevents damage.
FME420ADAP Tool Adapter for MS420 FME-420-ADAP
Exchanger Device for
DO1101AEx and
DOW 1171
Exchanger Device for the insertion and removal of the
following fire detectors:
DO1101AEx Optical Smoke Detector for Ex Areas

Parts Included
Qty. Components
1 Exchanger Device for DO1101A-Ex and DOW 1171
Note The Exchanger Device fits only on Siemens
service poles. The service pole is not included
in the scope of delivery.
Exchanger Device for DO1101AEx and
DOW 1171
fits only on Siemens service poles
FAA-RTL-SIEMENS
11
SOLO100 Telescopic
Access Pole
Features
Expandable with up to three SOLO101 Fixed Extension
Poles
The SOLO100 Telescopic Access Pole enables the
installation and replacement of fire detectors at high
ceilings. It can be expanded with up to three
SOLO101 Fixed Extension Poles.
The Telescopic Access Pole withstands high voltage
situations and is checked for Safety compliance in
accordance with the requirements of BS EN 61235
Section 12 using an applied voltage of 20 kV.
Electrical
Mechanics
Length
Europe, Middle East, Africa 1 m to 3.4 m (3.3 ft to 11.2 ft)
America 1.26 m to 4.5 m (4.1 ft to 14.8 ft)

Trademarks
SOLO100
Accessories
SOLO101
11
Test and Service Devices | Service Devices | 331
SOLO101 Fixed Extension
Pole
Features
Expandable with other Fixed Extension Pole
Extension for the SOLO100 Telescopic Access Pole
The SOLO101 Fixed Extension Pole enables the installation
and replacement of fire detectors at ceilings.
Use it individually or with up to three other Fixed Extension
Poles. It also can be used with the SOLO100 Telescopic
Access Pole.
The Fixed Extension Pole withstands high voltage situations
and is checked for safety compliance in accordance with the
requirements of BS EN 61235 Section 12 using an applied
voltage of 20 kV.
Electrical
Mechanical
Length
Europe, Middle East, Africa 1 m (3.3 ft)
Amerika 1.13 m (3.7 ft)

Trademarks
SOLO101
11
SOLO610 Test Equipment
Bag
The SOLO610 Test Equipment Bag is made of sturdy woven
polyester with a PVC coating for carrying and storing test
and service products. It is designed with special
compartments to hold a full range of products.
Trademarks
Parts Included
Quant. Component
1 SOLO610 Test Equipment Bag
SOLO610 Test Equipment Bag
Robust bag made of sturdy woven polyester for
carrying and storing test and service products.
SOLO610
11
Index | 333
A
ADC5000OPC License Key 45
Address Cards 42
ADW 511A Linear Heat Detector 217
ANI 0016 A Annunciator Module 14
ATE 100 LSN red Extension Kit, Red 92
ATE 100 LSN ye Extension Kit, Yellow 92
B
Base for DO1101AEx Smoke Detector 188
BAT 100 LSN Display Panel 112
BCM 0000 A Battery Controller Module 8
BCM0000B Battery Controller Module 11
BL 200 Strobes 309
BS ATE 100 LSN Primary Extension Kit, Red 91
BS NRKN Network Relay Card 94
C
Cables 75
Components for Smoke Aspiration Systems 203
Converter Kit 24 V/28 V/35 V 120
CPH 0006 A Modular Panel Housing for 6 Modules,
CZM 0004 A 4 Zone Conventional Module 22
D
DBZ 1193A Detector identification 158
DBZ 1191 Additional Base 189
DBZ 1192 Additional Base for Damp Rooms 190
DBZ 1193A Detector Identification 190
DIB 0000 A Distribution Box 67
DO1101AEx Optical Smoke Detector for Ex Areas 170
DR 2020 T Log Printer without Roll-up Equipment 106
DR 2020 T/AV Log Printer with Roll-up Equipment 105
DR 500 T/AV Tabletop Printer 97
DS 10 Sounders 303
DZW 1171 Radio Test Unit 157
E
EASY AVR Conventional Inbuilt Strobe for SG 200
315
ENO 0000 B Fire Service Interface Module 28
EPH 0012 A Extension Housing for 12 Modules,
ERLE 10 Line Extension 89
ERSE 10 Interface Extension 90
ERT100 Module for Loop System Power Supply 86,99
ERWE 10 voltage converter 85
Exchanger Device for DO1101AEx and DOW 1171 329
Exchanger device for the DOW 1171 RF smoke
detector 158
F
FAA420RI Remote Indicator 147,183
FAA500 LSN Base 134
FAA500BB Ceiling Mount Back Box 137,173
FAA500CB Built-in Housing for Concrete Ceilings
137,174
FAA500GB LSN Base for GB 136
FAA500R LSN Base with Relay 135
FAA500RGB LSN Base with Relay for GB 136
FAA500RTL Exchanger Device 176
FAA500SB Surface Mount Back Box 138,174
Room Seal 138,175
FAA500SPRING for Concrete/Wooden Ceilings
139,176
Inserts 133,172
FAA500TR-W Trim Ring, White 133,172
FAA500TTL Test Adapter with Magnet 177
FAAMS 420RSP Detector Base with Relay and
Spring 144
FAAMSR 420 Detector Base with Relay 143
FAD420HSEN Duct Smoke Detector 222
FAP420/FAH420 Automatic Fire Detectors LSN
improved version 127
FAP520 Automatic Fire Detectors LSN improved
version 122
FAS420 Series Aspirating Smoke Detectors
FAS-420-TM Series Aspirating Smoke Detectors
FBH 0000 A Mounting Frame Large 54
FCA500EU Conventional Base 173
FCP320/FCH320 Conventional Automatic Fire
Detectors 164
FCP500 Conventional Automatic Fire Detectors 159
FCSLWM1 Linear Heat Detector 215
FDP 0001 A Dummy Cover Plate 78
FDT 0000 A Front Door Transparent 58,70
FDT 0003 A Front Door Transparent 59,71
FHS 0000 A Mounting Frame Large with Distributor
Rail 55
Fireray 2000 Linear Smoke Detector 208
Fireray 50/100RV Linear Smoke Detectors 204
FLM-320-EOL2W Conventional EOL Module 2-Wire
293
FLM420/4CON Conventional Interface Modules
4wire LSN 258
FLM-420-EOL2W-W EOL Module LSN 294
FLM420I2 Input Interface Modules 277
FLM420I8R1S Octo-input Interface Module with
Relay 274
FLM420NAC Signaling Device Interface Modules 261
FLM420O1I1 Output-input Interface Modules 284
FLM420O2 Output Interface Modules 281
FLM420RHV Relay High Voltage Interface
Modules 266
FLM-420-RLE-S Extinguishing Interface Module 288
FLM420RLV1 Relay Interface Modules Low
Voltage 269
FLM420RLV8S Octo-relay Interface Module Low
Voltage 272
FLMI 420S Short Circuit Isolator 264
FLMIFB126S Surface-mounted Housing 290
FMC120DKM Manual Call Points 241
FMC210DM Manual Call Points 230
FMC210SM Single Action Call Points 235
FMC300RW Single Action Call Points 237
FMC420RW Single Action Call Points LSN
improved 226
334 | Index
FMCFSTDE Printed Labeling Foils for the Upper
Label Field 247
FMCSPGLDEIL Spare Glasses 248
FME420ADAP Tool Adapter for MS420 329
FMH 0000 A Mounting Frame Medium 54
FMR-5000 Remote Keypad 43
FMXFSOGLT Punched, Self-adhesive Foil Sets
(Blank) 247
FMXFSOLSN Punched, Self-adhesive Foil Sets
(Blank) 246
FMXIFB55S Interface Box Surface-mount 290
FNM-420-A Sounder Indoor 306
FNS420R LSN Strobe, Red 317
FNS-P400RTH Rotating Beacons 311
FP Conventional Fire Panels 108
FPA5000 With Functional Modules 2
FPE5000UGM Interface Module 20
FPP5000 External Power Supply Unit Kit 24 V/6 A 117
FPP5000TI Trouble Interface for FPP5000 119
FRay5000-50-EN Linear Smoke Detector 212
FRB 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit, Large 57
FRK 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit 69
FRM 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit, Medium 57
FRS 0019 A 19" Rack Installation Kit, Small 58
FSH 0000 A Mounting Frame Small 55
FSM2000 Fire Monitoring System 79
H
HBC 0010 A Modular Panel Housing for 10 Modules 63
12 Modules 64
HCP 0006 A Modular Panel Housing for 6 Modules 62
HMP 0001 A Mounting Plate Short 68
HMP 0002 A Mounting Plate Long 69
HMP 0003 A Mounting Plate for Mounting Frame 56
Housings for Frame Installation 46
Housings for Wall Mounting 60
HPW 11 AC Alarm Horn 305
I
Infrared Flame Detectors 220
IOP 0008 A Input/Output Module 30
IOS 0020 A 20 mA Communication Module 24
IOS 0232 A RS232 Communication Module 26
Isolator Type YBOR/SCI 88,103
K
Key Switch 93
L
LSN RF Fire Detection System 152
LSN Simulator 327
LSN Test Device 327
LVM 100 Line Extension Module 98
M
MAGIC.SENS Detector Base Sounders 298
MH 400 Detector Heating Element 149,185
MK 400 Detector Console 148,184
MOD 300 Modem 95,101
Stilts 148,184
Mounting Kit 19" for BZ 500 LSN 96
DIN 14623 146,182
10 Modules, Frame Installation 50
MS 400 Detector Base 140,178
MS 420 LSN Detector Base with Spring 142
MSC 420 Additional Base with Damp Room Seal
145,179
MSD 320 Conventional Detector Base with Diode 181
MSF 400 Detector Base with Damp Room Seal
141,179
MSR 320 Conventional Detector Base with Relay 180
N
NAK 100 LSN Branch Interface 291
NZM 0002 A Notification Appliance Zone Module 36
O
Options Plate 95
P
Panel Controller 40
Panel Rails 38
PB 2005 Strobe Red, 24 V 313
PMF 0004 A Power Supply Big, Frame Installation 53
Power Supply Brackets 72
Power Supply Unit Kit 12 V/5.4 A 116
PSB 0004 A Power Supply 66
PSF 0002 A Power Supply Small, Frame Installation
52
PSK 0001 A Labelling Strips, Wide 77
PSL 0001 A Labelling Strips, Small 77
PSS 0002 A Power Supply Small 65
Punched, Self-adhesive Foil Sets (Blank), for
Operating Panel and Labeling Field 246
R
Radio Spy 1 Field Strength Measuring Unit and
Software 157
RLE 0000 A Junction Board EU 56
RLU 0000 A Junction Board 68
RMH 0002 A Relay Module 34
RML 0008 A Relay Module 32
RTP Panel Relay Module 94,102
S
Module 191,251
Service Switch for Extinguishing Systems 97
SG 200 Acoustic Signaling Devices 301
SIV 28 Fuse Distributor 28 V 89,104
SK 400 Protective Basket 149,185
SM 20 Interface Module 90,100
SM 24 Interface Module 91,101
Detectors 326
Index | 335
Solo CO Testing Gas 326
SOLO100 Telescopic Access Pole 325,330
SOLO101 Fixed Extension Pole 331
SOLO200 Detector Removal Tool 328
SOLO330 Smoke Detector Tester 324
SOLO461 Heat Detector Tester 322
SOLO610 Test Equipment Bag 332
SSK 400 Protective Dust Cover 150,186
T
THP 2020 A Thermal Printer 76
TP4 400 Support Plate for Detector Identification
150,186
TP8 400 Support Plate for Detector Identification
151,187
TRN Panel Relay Module 93,102
U
UAR Relays for Fire Detection Systems 320
UPS 2416 A Universal Power Supply 73
Installation 52
Bosch Security Systems Inc. 2009 | Data subject to change without notice
T2365506827 | 18 Aug 2009
Fire Alarm Systems
Databook 08/2009
F
i
r
e

A
l
a
r
m

S
y
s
t
e
m
s
Bosch Security Systems
For more information please visit
or send an e-mail to
emea.securitysystems@bosch.com
Bosch Security Systems, 2009
Modications reserved
08/2009
A Tradition of Quality and
Innovation
For over 100 years, the Bosch name
has stood for quality and reliability.
Bosch is the global supplier of
choice for innovative technology,
backed by the highest standards
for service and support.
Bosch Security Systems proudly
offers a wide range of security,
safety, communications and sound
solutions that are relied upon every
day in applications around the
world, from government facilities
and public venues to businesses,
schools and homes.
2
0
0
9

Fire Data Book 2010

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fire Data Book 2010

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fire Data Book 2010

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fire Alarm Systems

Housing for mounting directly on the wall

Frame installation housings which are fitted to the

module that controls batteries and power sup-

with 16 red and 16 yellow LEDs, freely pro-

for the connection of an LSN loop with up to 254

for the connection of an LSN loop with up to 254

for the connection to a UGM2020 System

for the connection of existing conventional pe-

sports an S20 interface, an RS232 interface and

for a connection with a voice alarm system Plena

with two RS323 interfaces

for a connection with a voice alarm system Ple-

for the connection to fire service equipment ac-

with 8 digital inputs and 8 open collector out-

with 8 relays for low voltage applications

with 2 relays for mains power (250 V) and with

with two monitored primary lines

Non-redundant bus via CAN1

Redundant bus via busses CAN1 and CAN2

Redundant loop via CAN1 and CAN2

Output to fire alarm devices

Control of fire alarm routing equipment

Outputs to fire protection equipment

Dependencies on more than one alarm signal

Fault warning condition

Country-specific standards and guidelines must be

Connection conditions for the regional authorities and

It is preferable to use the loop formation owing to the

It is possible to combine LSN interface modules and

If connecting classic and improved LSN elements within

Existing conventional detectors can be connected to a

In accordance with EN 542, control panels with more

For operation of the fire detection system according to

Bus topology, redundant 8

Bus topology, non-redundant 8

Stand-alone 4096 stand-alone

In network, per control panel 2032

Stand-alone 4096 stand-alone

In network, per control panel 2032

Up to 254 LSN improved version elements or 127 classic

Unshielded cables can be used

Fire panels can only be installed in dry, clean interior

To ensure optimum battery service life, the control

The following environmental conditions must be noted:

Operating and display elements should be located at

Frame installation housings require at least 230 mm

Sufficient space should be left underneath and next to

Do not operate devices showing condensation.

Only use the mounting materials specified by

If connected to a Building Management System (BIS

With 1 to 4 BCM modules:

With 5 to 8 BCM modules:

Standby 31 mA (at 24 V DC)

Fault 40 mA (at 24 V DC)

3 outputs, switchable +24 V / 1.7 A, battery-buffed

3 outputs, not switchable +24 V / 0.5 A, battery-buffered

1 green LED Power ON

3 yellow LEDs Trouble mains/batt. 1/batt. 2

1 key Batteries charge at V < 22 V and central